Author Archives: paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com

Frozen Hell by John W. Campbell Jr., 2019

Amazon UK/USA

Other reviews:1
Richard Lupoff, Locus
Alexei Panshin, The World Beyond the Hill, p. 272-276
Various, Goodreads
Mark Yon, SFFWorld

_____________________

Editor, John Gregory Betancourt

Fiction:
Frozen Hell • novella by John W. Campbell Jr.
The Things from Another World • extract by John Gregory Betancourt

Non-fiction:
Cover & Interior Artwork • Bob Eggleton
Preface • Alec Nevala-Lee
Introduction • Robert Silverberg
A Note • John Gregory Betancourt

_____________________

A few months after John Campbell Jr. became the editor of Astounding Stories in October 1937 he published one of his own stories, Who Goes There?, in the magazine (Astounding Science-Fiction, August 1938, reviewed here last week—you might want to read that post before this one2). This tells of an Antarctic expedition which finds an alien spaceship buried in ice that is millions of years old; alongside the ship is the body of one of the occupants. When the expedition personnel disinter the “Thing” and take it back to base to thaw it out, the alien comes to life, and demonstrates an ability to absorb, replicate, and mimic men and animals. The survivors then have to work out what is human and what is alien. The former also realise that if they fail, and any of the Things leave the station, they will pose an existential threat to life on Earth.
The story became a classic, and was twice made into a film (one of which is the acclaimed The Thing, directed by John Carpenter).
Who Goes There? had a complicated genesis, and this is revealed in various letters in Fantasy Commentator #59/60, a volume I’ve referred to here previously.3 Fortunately, Frozen Hell provides an Introduction by Robert Silverberg which summarizes the story’s history.
In this essay Silverberg discusses how Campbell used the idea of a shape-changing alien in an earlier piece, The Brain Stealers of Mars (Thrilling Wonder Stories, December 1936), the first of his light-hearted ‘Penton and Blake’ series, which has them encounter “thusol” aliens which can mimic other life forms. Silverberg then goes on to say that Campbell, who wanted to break into the higher-paying Argosy magazine, later presented this idea (among others) to that magazine’s editor, Jack Byrne. Byrne was receptive,4 and matters progressed:

Campbell set out immediately to write it, working at his usual high speed, and by June, 1937 had done his new story employing the shapeshifting monster theme, setting it on an Antarctic base that he envisioned after reading the account of Admiral Richard E. Byrd’s recent expedition to the south polar regions. He may also have been influenced to some degree by H.P. Lovecraft’s novella At the Mountains of Madness, which had been serialized in Astounding in 1936—a powerful tale with an Antarctic setting, although Lovecraft’s style and narrative approach had very little in common with Campbell’s. A third factor that may have enabled Campbell to intensify the impact of his shapeshifter plot was a strange autobiographical one that Campbell revealed many years later: his mother had been one of a pair of identical twins, so much like each other that as a small boy he was unable to tell them apart. The sisters disliked each other and the aunt disliked her nephew, and on occasion he would come home from school to seek comfort from his mother for some mishap that day, only to be coldly rebuffed by a woman who was actually his aunt.  p. 22

The completed story was Frozen Hell (this recycled a title of another unsold story from the year before5) and Byrne subsequently rejected it. In a later story conference he stated there weren’t any major characters in it, only minor ones, while Byrne’s associate editor, George Post, unhelpfully suggested (my characterisation) the introduction of a female character (into a 1930’s Antarctic expedition!)
Silverberg then explains what happened to the revised version:

[Campbell] showed it also to his friend Mort Weisinger of Thrilling Wonder Stories. Weisinger was impressed also, though he grumbled about Campbell’s recycling of the plot idea of Brain-Stealers of Mars, which he had published.
[. . .]
Weisinger did not want the story for Thrilling Wonder Stories—he needed material that adhered more closely to pulp magazine formulas—and it is not clear whether Campbell submitted it to Argosy, which had suggested he rewrite the longer version in the first place. But late in the summer of 1937 he offered it to F. Orlin Tremaine of Astounding. A strange thing happened, though, while the manuscript was still sitting on Tremaine’s desk.
[. . .]
Tremaine was moved up into the post of executive editor of the entire magazine chain, leaving Astounding itself without an editor. And at the beginning of October Tremaine asked Campbell to be his replacement. With astonishing swiftness Campbell found himself the editor of the very magazine to which “Who Goes There?” was currently under submission.  p. 26

Campbell could not buy material for Astounding at that point (he initially appears to have had a first reader/managing editor position) but Tremaine was happy to publish a revised and shortened version of the story (essentially the last five of the eight chapters).
And there matters lay until two significant events in 2011 and 2017. The first of those dates corresponds to the publication of the aforementioned Fantasy Commentator #59/60 which, in one letter (p. 46), mentions the existence of “40,000 words of [Frozen Hell/Who Goes There]”, a version considerably longer than the published one. The other date, 2017, is when Alec Nevala-Lee (at the time researching an autobiography of Campbell) stumbled upon mention of an archive of Campbell’s papers at Harvard Library. He subsequently unearthed the longer version of the manuscript and contacted Campbell’s relatives, who in turn pointed him to their agent and the publisher of this book, John Betancourt.6 (An account of this discovery is provided in Nevala-Lee’s Preface.)

As for the story itself, Frozen Hell is only around 30,000 words long (not the 40,000 mentioned in the letter), which is 8,000 words longer than the earlier Who Goes There? The extra material consists, it would seem, of the three chapters at the beginning of the piece (the events that take place in this part of the longer work are referred to in Who Goes There?), as well as other minor changes, e.g., McReady’s account of his nightmare about the creature’s shape-changing powers in Frozen Hell (pp. 69-70) is related by Norris in Who Goes There? (pp. 66-67), and is less explicit.
So, what do these three extra chapters contain? Well, chapter one (13 pp.) establishes the story in the Antarctic, where McReady, Barclay, Norris, and Vane arrive at a sub-camp on a mission to investigate an magnetic anomaly which is nearby. Before they go looking for it the next day, we get some interesting detail about life in the Antarctic:

The roof of tent canvas laid across chicken wire and slats, weighted down by chunks of ice cut out in the making, rested across bolted uprights. Fiberboard panels made up the side walls. A copper stove, in the center of the room, succeeded in bringing the upper layer of air to about 80 degrees, but the wooden floor had a tracery of ice crystals scattered over it. Wind growled threats down the stove pipe.
Norris and Vane sat on the edge of Norris’s bunk, working over a sheaf of data sheets. Above the table, they were clad in long-sleeved grey woolen underwear and shoulder-length hair. They had on light khaki trousers, and the clothing increased in thickness as it approached the floor, ending in knee-length wool socks, and heavy, fur-lined boots. Perishable stores were kept frozen on the floor, while dry cells, beer, and food stock took to the temperate climate half way up. The tropics near the 7-foot ceiling were reserved for drying socks, two suits of underwear, and Vane’s bunk.  pp. 34-35

There is more of this descriptive writing when they travel to the site of the anomaly and start digging:

The sun rose very gradually above the horizon to the north, rising by sliding along an invisible, angling groove somewhere beyond the edge of the frozen continent. The thermometer rose slowly with it, and wind began to creep across the plateau, gaining velocity as the temperature differences increased. The thermometer passed -50°, and the wind passed 15 miles an hour. The four men still chopped and hacked into the coldbrittled ice. A sloping, step-nicked tube grew down into the ice, the solid blue of the stuff began to scintillate with blinding, intense azures, pure rays of sapphire, the chips became huge wealths of discarded emeralds, sapphires and rubies. The sun’s slanting rays were piercing down, heatless, through nearly twenty feet of crystalline ice. Still the magnetic needle pointed straight downward.  p. 43

Later, the men see a plate of polished, machined metal and, when they dig down further, McReady comes upon something else:

“God!” said McReady softly. “Good God!” The schuff of the ice axe started, very gently, very carefully.
Unable to see past the two men, Norris heard Vane’s soft sigh, and over his head caught a glimpse of glittering silvery metal. A smooth, curving metal surface nearly five feet square was bared. The sun had set again, but the rose and lavender, apple greens and melting yellows lingered in the sky. The light that trickled down through twenty feet of ice glimmered on the bared metal, hinting at an immense bulk of machined, rounded metal plates, joined with unhuman skill.
Vane straightened, and backed away. Half visible between McReady’s legs was a head, a half-split head laid open by a careless ice axe. Norris turned up toward the sun-painted patch of sky and called out to Barclay.
“Bar, if what you saw had blue hair like earthworms and three red eyes, it’s here.”  p. 45

The image of the alien is a good end to the chapter, and provides an engrossing if delayed hook. If I have a criticism of this chapter it is that it would be better to have this image at the very beginning of the story, and perhaps fill in the background detail afterwards.
Chapter two (14 pp.) has the team get resupplied by autogyro, and the foursome are joined by Copper (the doctor) and Blair (the biologist). That evening they talk about the alien’s face and expression, and speculate about its nature; the next day they disinter the body.
After this the team decide to use thermite bombs to gain access the spaceship, but (spoiler) end up setting the strange alien metal on fire, causing the destruction of the vehicle. This is a spectacular scene involving a huge ice and steam explosion, as well as a massive EMP (electro-magnetic pulse—all the “magnetism” the ship had “stored” is released). The men only survive as they shelter behind a natural ridge:

An incredible torch in the midst of a vast, blasted area of ice. A dazzling, blue-white stream of molten stuff tumbled from a softened rent in the side of the ship to roll down toward the mightier, towering ramparts of ice still undefeated. It struck them with a vast hissing roar, and they crumbled before it, tumbling into exploding steam as they fell into the growing lake of supernal fire. White-hot spheres of flaming metal exploded outward, to thunder downward through thousand-foot-thick ice.
The howling, rushing wind seemed to gain strength, thrusting the ice-smoke toward the distant Antarctic ocean. Great blocks of ice tumbled madly through the air. For a moment, resistant in blue white heat, withstanding even the lapping sea of molten fury, vast dazzling bulks stood out firm in the center section of the ship, huge machines of curving, dazzling splendor, shedding the rain of blazing metal from incandescent, adamantine backs. Then abruptly, they dissolved in a vaster, fiercer flame that sent darting rays through the towering, tottering glaciers looking on about the ship. The black, glistening rock of the ice-drowned mountainside glowed faintly red before that onslaught.
The wavering curtains of the aurora overhead jerked suddenly, spiraled in a mad vortex of shimmering light, and beat down a savage stalk to the incandescent fury. From the mountain, from the ice, vast angry tongues of lightning crashed against the molten pool. Lesser lightnings darted from the tractor, from the steel treads to the ice. Ice axes and shovels grew warm in the hands of the men, as thrilling shocks darted from wristwatches and metal buckles.  p. 59

The shorter chapter three (9 pp.) has the team arrive back at base on a tractor. McReady tells Powell about his nightmare where the Thing was aware and could change form down to cellular level.

Chapter four of Frozen Hell rejoins the Who Goes There? version somewhere around its second to third chapter (the beginning of Frozen Hell’s chapter 4 and Who Goes There?’s chapter 3 are identical, but some of later content of the chapter 4 appears in the previous chapter of Who Goes There?).7 I should mention in passing that most of the first two short chapters of Who Goes There? is a data dump which recalls the events of the first three chapters of Frozen Hell.
So, now we broadly know the differences between the two works, which version is better? Well, in the Preface I get the impression that Nevala-Lee is ambivalent:

The quality of the excised material is on much the same level as the rest, and both versions have their merits. “Who Goes There?” is darker and more focused, but there’s something very effective—and oddly modern—in how Frozen Hell abruptly shifts genres from adventure to horror. It drastically alters the tone and effect of the overall story, and the result is worth reading as more than just a curiosity.  p. 14

Whereas in the Introduction, Silverberg prefers the original:

Comparing the rediscovered manuscript with the published novella is an instructive lesson in Campbell’s growing mastery of his craft. What is immediately apparent when putting one against the other is that Campbell the future editor must have realized at once that he had opened the story in the wrong place. Frozen Hell starts with the discovery of an alien spaceship buried in the Antarctic ice cap, but, though Campbell tells of it in the crisp, efficient prose that had become his professional hallmark, and describes the south polar setting with a vividness worthy of Admiral Byrd himself (“The northern horizon was barely washed with rose and crimson and green, the southern horizon black mystery sweeping off to the pole.…”), nothing that he tells us in the first three chapters of the original version drives the reader toward the terrifying situation that is the mainspring of the novella’s plot.
[. . .]
There were other flaws in the longer version, too. On page 12 we find a scientist named Norris explaining [how the compass behaves above the anomaly] to McReady, in two paragraphs of leaden dialogue, that McReady surely already knows.
[. . .]
And on page 35 the Antarctic explorers accidentally destroy the buried alien spaceship in a clumsy attempt to excavate it, though it would have been much more plausible to leave it in the ice to be recovered by some later, and better-equipped, expedition.
In his revision Campbell solved all these problems simply by cutting the first three chapters, getting rid of the slow opening sequence and the lecture on geomagnetism, and brushing McReady’s dream and the destruction of the spaceship into quick flashbacks where they would be less obtrusive. To set events in motion now he wrote two new paragraphs that constitute one of the most potent story openings in the history of science fiction.  pp. 23-25

I disagree with this latter assessment, and prefer Frozen Hell for a number of reasons. First, the three extra chapters are well written, provide interesting background detail, and the exciting and vivid explosion scene; they also give us the image of the alien’s face at the start of the story. Parts of it may be slow moving and data-dumpy, but that is a criticism you can also make of the original version too. Second, it is easier to keep the characters straight in Frozen Hell as they are gradually introduced (compare this to the confusion of the original version where we more or less meet all thirty-seven at once). Third, I prefer the SF emphasis of the longer version (if you like the movie Aliens more than Alien, you’ll probably like Frozen Hell more than Who Goes There?). Fourth, the SFnal start of Frozen Hell makes the final scene of Who Goes There? less anomalous. (If I recall correctly, John Carpenter kept the image of the ice-enclosed spaceship in The Thing but dropped the last scene with the reactor and anti-gravity harness—so that film is structurally the mirror-image of Who Goes There?) Finally, Frozen Hell makes you realise that the Who Goes There? version has a very clunky beginning.

In this new book, apart from the text of Frozen Hell, and the aforementioned Preface by Alec-Nevala Lee and Introduction by Robert Silverberg, there is also A Note which introduces an extract from a prospective sequel, The Things from Another World. Both of these latter items are written by John Gregory Betancourt.
The sequel is set in the present day and concerns a second anomaly discovered by the US military. What I read was workmanlike and engaging, but I’ll be interested to see if Betancourt can keep it up over the length of a novel and not descend into formula.
Finally there is a striking Cover by Bob Eggleton, as well as Interior Artwork which includes both a colour plate of the spaceship plummeting to Earth, and black and white illustrations for chapters one to five, and eight. The latter are well executed but a couple are rather bland (one is of a man in snow goggles, and none of the major scenes are illustrated).

A volume worth getting for anyone with an interest in Who Goes There? or The Thing. 

_____________________

1. Lupoff’s review gives the impression that Frozen Hell was written before Brain Stealers of Mars.

The Panshin reference in The World Beyond the Hill (Amazon UK) isn’t a review of Frozen Hell but an interesting analysis of Who Goes There? A quick read of this section gives me the impression that Panshin rather overloads Campbell’s story with meaning and significance, and there is a passage which, with the publication of Frozen Hell, subverts his own analysis:

And yet, the emphasis in “Who Goes There?” is not upon horror or excitement, as it is in the two Hollywood movies that would be made from Campbell’s story—The Thing (1951) and The Thing (1982). If thrills had been Campbell’s object, then almost certainly he would have chosen to start his story at an earlier moment than he does. Say—as a bronze ice ax chips into something and breaks off, and an American scientist suddenly finds himself staring into the three glowing red eyes of a frozen snake-haired alien. Or as a magnesium spaceship suddenly catches fire, and sparks and burns away to nothing beneath the polar ice.
But action and emotion are not the heart of “Who Goes There?” Horror and excitement in sufficient measure may be used to carry the story along, but they aren’t what Campbell is after. In fact, in a very real sense, it is horror and excitement that the characters of the story are called upon to overcome if they are to perceive their situation clearly and deal with it effectively.
And so it is that “Who Goes There?” does not open with the high thrills of the discovery of the creature and the destruction of the alien spaceship. Rather, it opens back at base camp with all the members of the expedition gathering to hear a chalk talk summary of what has been found.  p. 273

Panshin also calls Campbell’s Who Goes There? “the first story of modern science fiction” (why it and not, say, del Rey’s The Faithful, isn’t explained—or at least not to my skimming eyes).

2. My review of Who Goes There? is here.

3. There are references to Frozen Hell (both The Moon is Hell and Who Goes There? versions) on pp. 32, 46, 47, 50, 51, 54, 58, 59, 77, & 151 of Fantasy Commentator #59/60, edited by A. Langley Searles & Sam Moskowitz (available from Lulu and highly recommended).

4. There are two letters from Campbell to Swisher in Fantasy Commentator that give variant accounts of Campbell’s initial approach to Argosy. The first, dated April 12th 1937, has Campbell pitching ideas to Byrne:

“Mort told me he’d been talking to Jack Byrnes of Argosy, and knew that Byrnes wanted science fiction but didn’t know quite what. Just rejected one of Ralph Milne Farley’s latest productions. ‘Why not go see the gentleman—I’ve got him interested in weird animals.’ I went posthaste. Byrne was offered a collection of story ideas, including the human mutant one, but he liked best the idea of the Thusol (from ‘Brain Stealers of Mars’). I told him I’d done it in a humorous vein—comic opera possibilities of course obvious—for Wonder. Would he like it done in a horror vein, with the setting Earth instead of Mars . . . He would. Wants 24,000. 35,000 or 44,000 words of it. They pay 11/4 to 11/2 cents a word for their stuff—34,000 of them sound interesting. I may be able to get the higher rate because of Tremaine’s recent generosity. Byrne said he didn’t think the Thusol should be loose on Earth—inject ’em into a movie colony on location—or on a desert island or something— in a city would be too darned much, and too impersonal (Think he’s right myself). The horror angle there is—they might get loose . . . I finally decided they got loose in an Antarctic expedition, when one was thawed out of the Antarctic ice (Old. but the animal idea isn’t); since then they’d be in a frozen, lifeless desert, unable to find an animal other than man to imitate, and man couldn’t escape unaided, as they’d have to. No life in Antarctica in the winter, not even seals, or other fish, except at unattainable points. Penguins even leave—at least the section where the expedition is . . . Starts with finding of things. Biologist puts frozen beast in the one cabin that’s kept warm all night, so that it can thaw out for dissection; the hut where the meteor observer sits alone at night. Something stirs behind him—he turns.
“The next morning—Bio finds animal gone. Great curiosity. Meteor man says he didn’t hear a sound all night—wanders off—He’s missing later, but they find a cow in the passage half molten, and a three-foot image of meteor man growing from it— it runs—they learn the horrible truth.  p. 44

In Campbell’s his letter of May 15th, 1937, however, he says this:

“Mort Weisinger has been out here a number of times since you were down, and we’ve met him elsewhere. For some reason, the guy seems to like me, and also seems to think I can do anything I happen to want to in the way of writing. Nice, but sometimes embarrassing. But he’s been a hell of a good guy. You ought to see the letter of recommendation he gave me. He taught me tricks of layout, proofreading, and editing generally last weekend, and in connection therewith gave me a letter which says that I’m a top-notch editor, excellent scientific writer, and well qualified to handle editing and lay out work, as I have for several magazines. Signed, M. Weisinger, Editor, Standard Magazines. Official as hell. If I was anywhere near as good as that letter says. I’d sneer at an offer of a mere $ 100 a week.
“Also: Mort’s a Jew, as you know, and hence unable to get a job with most (Christian) publishing houses, e.g.. Argosy. But he trained under a guy named George Post. (During the thirties, in addition to Frank A. Munsey, Street and Smith and Popular Publications never knowingly had a Jew on their staff, even as an office boy, despite the fact that there were two million Jews in New York City.) Post was given my ‘Brain Stealers of Mars’ to read, and reported (he hadn’t read stf. before) that he didn’t see any point to it. Mort said: ‘That’s a damn good story. You tear up that report, go home and write another tomorrow after you’ve re-read the story.’ Which Post did. He then decided ‘Brain Stealers’ wasn’t so bad. Since then, he’s liked my yarns. Also ‘Brain Stealers’, as he knows, Mort says, got more letters of approbation than any other single story they’ve run.
“All of which leads up to this: Post is now managing editor of Argosy, and wants a stf story! Mort told me about it, and I’ve written one. ‘Frozen Hell,’ a new yarn under the old name. It’s about Antarctica (scenery and background lifted practically entire from Byrd’s ‘Discover’) and fairly authentic. The idea is the old one of finding a strange animal frozen in Antarctic ice—but with the Thusol idea as animal. (The Thusol could take the form of any living creature.) The thing gets loose in the camp—and no man knows his friend. Dona says I clicked. Mort read 2/3 of it when he was here Sunday, and said it was good, it’s being retyped now. 40,000 words of it. I had more fun writing that story than I’ve gotten out of any I ever turned out. It’s a pure horror-type story, and with the Thusol as background, imitating everything in sight, you can imagine that it has its horror aspects. If accepted, I should get between $500 and $600 for it—and Post, you remember, was brought into stf. On ‘Brain Stealers’, which used, in a different way. The same weird-animal ideas. So—I have hopes.  p. 46

Campbell subsequently reports in his letter of Monday, 21st June 1937 (Fantasy Commentator #59/60, p. 51), that he was called in for the Argosy editorial conference on the previous Friday (presumably the 18th), where he was told about the story’s failings.
In a later letter of 15th September 1937 (Fantasy Commentator #59/60, p. 58) Campbell says that he “took in [a] revamped ‘Frozen Hell’ (Antarctica) to Tremaine at Astounding.” So the revised story was perhaps rejected again by Argosy between the 18th of June and the 15th of September.
Finally, in Campbell’s letter of January 14th 1938, he says:

Following the suggestions of Tremaine and (Frank E.) Blackwell (Street & Smith’s Editor-in-Chief), I rewrote the first third of ‘Frozen Hell’, and have hopes Tremaine will take it. If so, it will finally and completely clear up the remains of my ‘operating’ expenses and start us on the road to that car we want.  p. 77

5. One of the things that Silverberg’s Introduction cleared up for me was that the original Frozen Hell (eventually published as The Moon is Hell) wasn’t a variant of Who Goes There? but an entirely different story.

6. The Kickstarter launched to publish this lost manuscript was phenomenally successful and raised $155,000.

7. I haven’t got the time, inclination, or energy to look into the Who Goes There? revisions in more detail at the moment (I’m a bit tapped out on this story, maybe later).
As for the longer version, chapter four goes on to describe what happens when Connant babysits the corpse as it thaws, his report of its disappearance, the dog fight scene, and the questions about Connant’s humanity.
Chapter five starts with an endless meandering conversation about the outside coming to rescue them, and finishes with the unsuccessful serum test (which I understood this time), which reveals either Copper or Garry are not human.
Chapter six is quite difficult to follow as there are far too many characters involved in too many situations. However, Garry hands over control of the base; Copper is sedated; McReady takes over the doc’s job and works on a blood test; Kinner the cook becomes hysterical; they watch the movies; Kinner is killed, etc., etc.
Chapter seven has the exciting blood test scene, and more violence.
Chapter eight has McReady and Powell go to see the isolated Blair. They discover he is a Thing, and kill him. Afterwards, they realise it has built an atomic reactor and an anti-gravity device, and was just about to leave the station.  ●

Edited 5th January 2021: minor text changes.

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v21n06, August 1938

ISFDB
Archive.org

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 52-56

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.

Fiction:
Hell Ship • novelette by Arthur J. Burks
Jason Comes Home • short story by A. Macfadyen, Jr.
Resilient Planet • short story by Nelson Tremaine [as by Warner Van Lorne]
Who Goes There?” • novella by John W. Campbell, Jr. [as by Don A. Stuart] +
The Terrible Sense • short story by Thomas Calvert McClary [as by Calvin Peregoy]
Asteroid Pirates • short story by Royal W. Heckman
Eviction by Isotherm • short story by Malcolm Jameson
The Disinherited • short story by Henry Kuttner

Non-fiction:
Cover • by H. W. Wesso
Interior artwork • by H. W. Wesso (x7), C. R. Thomson, Jack Binder, uncredited (Coughlin, Flatos, and Orban) (x5)
Food for the First Planet • essay by Thomas Calvert McClary
“Power” • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
The Analytical Laboratory: June 1938
In Times to Come
Orbits, Take-Offs and Landings
• essay by Willy Ley
Science Discussions and Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

This issue is best known for John W. Campbell’s novella Who Goes Here?, later seen as a pretty good SF movie in the early 1980s, The Thing.2 The fiction leads off, however, with a bigger name—Arthur J. Burks, and his Hell Ship. This is the first of his ‘Josh McNab’ series (and my heart later sank when I discovered this is the first of four stories that appeared in Astounding).

McNab is the chief engineer of a tramp steamer—sorry, spaceship—called the Arachne. In among the thrust bearings, girders and scent of oil, we learn that McNab is a fifty year old widower (his wife Mary died in childbirth) and, in case you didn’t guess it from his name, he is Scottish:

“Ye’re the purrtiest thing,” said Josh, looking the Arachne over from the rim of the slip, his gray eyes glistening with pride. “Purtier than the bonniest lassie that ever coom oot o’ Scutland, save one! If only I had the money to own ye!”  p. 8

We also find out that the Arachne is going to Mars with a cracked rotor shaft (the parsimonious ship owner Caperton wants to delay the repair):

“An’ there be scuts that say the Scotch are teet!” [McNab] muttered. His Scotch dialect was broad enough to cut with a knife when he was aroused, or talking to himself.
If repairs were to be made in the slip, Caperton had to pay union wages plus time and a half for overtime. If they were made enroute—sailors had to do it, and they received no extra pay. Then, it was “for the safety of the ship”, and plain duty. Moreover they had to do it [to get] home again. “An’ weel yon Caperton kens it!” muttered Josh McNab.  p. 7

This sets up (spoiler) the obvious arc of the story, which is the deterioration of the rotor shaft to the point that McNab disobeys the Captain’s orders and stops the ship en route to effect a repair. This causes a period of zero gee, much to the consternation of the passengers.

Padding all this out is a lot of malarkey about McNab’s neice Mary (the same name as his dead wife) who is travelling with the ship to Mars, and who flirts shamelessly with McNab (much to his embarrassment). Mary, however, is involved in a love triangle with one of the young sailor-spacemen on board, which later leads to McNab consoling her about her romantic misfortunes (one of the many unintentionally hilarious scenes in the story):

Then, when things were pretty bad for Mary, by the looks of her, and she stood on a landing with McNab, in the Tunnel abeam of the belt promenade: “Murrry,” he said softly, dropping his calloused hand over hers—which took a lot of courage for Josh McNab, “is yon laddie worth it?”
“To me, Josh, yes.”
She swayed, and would have fallen, and Josh had an inspiration.
“Tell me, Murrry, the noo, aboot the ship. Answers micht help a wee bit ye ken—”
She understood instantly, and turned her head toward him for a moment, without relaxing her grip on the rail.
She did, however, lean her body a bit away from the cylindrical pit of the rotor. “Top and main thrust bearings, Josh,” she said, “are oil pad flotation surfaces, with 22 square feet area, operating with an oil pressure of 350 pounds per square inch. The metal of the bearing-plates is cadmium bronze. The main rotor ball-caps are chome-moly-vanadium steel; the shaft itself a 30” chrome-moly heat-treated alloy—”
The Arachne, after all, was one of her passions, and her own words did a lot to help her back to herself.
“The hull plates are of magnesiumberyl— Thanks, Josh. I needed that, I guess. I’ll try my best to stop being silly. If he doesn’t care, I’m foolish to bother, even though it hurts inside. But you wouldn’t know, Josh—”
“Her name was Murrry, too, lang an’ lang ago,” said McNab slowly.
“Oh, Josh, I didn’t think—”
“So mony folk, Murrry, dinna think at all! But dinna ye fret—”  p. 14

After all the excitement is over, Mary eventually gets her man.
As I’ve mentioned in a previous review,3 Burks and L. Ron Hubbard were foisted on Campbell by the Street & Smith management to introduce “people” into the stories. What a pity that what he got were these ludicrous stereotypes and their mundane concerns.

Jason Comes Home by A. Macfadyen, Jr. begins with Jason paddling a canoe in the wilds when he comes upon an area covered in slime. In the midst of this are alien skeletons and a spacecraft. He goes inside the vessel, and after flicking a couple of switches is soon accelerating through space.
The rest of the first part of the story tells of how Jason manages to decipher the alien crew’s books, and manages to get control of the craft. He then goes to the aliens’ home planet and finds out that the slime has destroyed them. During this visit his craft becomes infected too (his pet squirrel’s bones liquefy) and he retreats to a safe area to develop an ionising weapon to kill the slime.
Afterwards Jason returns to Earth to find that it has destroyed civilisation there too, and he once more uses his weapon. A few human survivors appear at the very end.
This has better prose than most stories from this period but it’s a creaky, old-style tale with numerous mini-science dumps, and not very good.

Resilient Planet by Nelson Tremaine starts with a spaceman with a drive malfunction4 heading out of the solar system. When he stumbles upon a world he lands there and meets a rubbery looking man:

He stayed on the road as the car came to a halt. The creepy sensation returned. When the door opened a resilient man jumped out! He actually bounced when he landed! His legs shortened, then gradually extended to raise his body back to normal position. A simple robe was his only clothing.
Bob could hardly believe the creature was alive. He appeared more like the image of a man that a child would mold in putty. But he seemed intelligent, and certainly the machine represented the work of a well-developed brain.  p. 50

The rest of it is mostly description of this rubbery man’s world and travelling society (they move from city to city to avoid full sunlight). Later, the spaceman sees another human who is, when he finally tracks her down, a young woman (for some unexplained plot reason the aliens have kept them apart). As the man has previously discovered that shouting causes the aliens to fall  unconscious, he makes a lot of noise and they escape. The aliens eventually repent and help the couple leave the planet.
This reads like an amateur writer’s story, and I wonder if it was accepted because Nelson Tremaine was F. Orlin Tremaine’s (Campbell’s boss’s) brother. (Conversely, it isn’t much worse than some of the other stuff here.)

Who Goes There?” by John W. Campbell, Jr.5 opens at an Antarctic research station with the crew standing around the tarpaulined body of a frozen alien. One of the main characters, McReady, tells the men that they discovered it at a crashed spaceship near a magnetic anomaly they were investigating. During the process of digging the alien out of the ice they accidentally destroyed the ship.

After this atmospheric but data-dump start the men then discuss whether it is safe to defrost the creature and examine it. The camp physicist, Norris, is vehemently opposed, and his warning telegraphs the arc of the story:

“How the hell can these birds tell what they are voting on? They haven’t seen those three red eyes, and that blue hair like crawling worms. Crawling— damn, it’s crawling there in the ice right now!
“Nothing Earth ever spawned had the unutterable sublimation of devastating wrath that thing let loose in its face when it looked around his frozen desolation twenty million years ago. Mad? It was mad clear through—searing, blistering mad!
“Hell, I’ve had bad dreams ever since I looked at those three red eyes. Nightmares. Dreaming the thing thawed out and came to life—that it wasn’t dead, or even wholly unconscious all those twenty million years, but just slowed, waiting—waiting. You’ll dream, too, while that damned thing that Earth wouldn’t own is dripping, dripping in the Cosmos House tonight.
“And, Connant,” Norris whipped toward the cosmic ray specialist, “won’t you have fun sitting up all night in the quiet. Wind whining above—and that thing dripping—” He stopped for a moment, and looked round.
“I know. That’s not science. But this is, it’s psychology. You’ll have nightmares for a year to come. Every night since I looked at that thing I’ve had ’em. That’s why I hate it—sure I do—and don’t want it around. Put it back where it came from and let it freeze for another twenty million years. I had some swell nightmares—that it wasn’t made like we are—which is obvious—but of a different kind of flesh that it can really control. That it can change its shape, and look like a man— and wait to kill and eat—
“That’s not a logical argument. I know it isn’t. The thing isn’t Earthlogic anyway.”  p. 66-67

After some more discussion the men agree to have Connant babysit the alien’s body overnight, but it isn’t long before he falls asleep and the body goes missing. Then everything kicks off when the Thing is found in the huskies’ enclosure, and the men head there with ice-axes, .45s, and flamethrowers:

Connant stopped at the bend in the corridor. His breath hissed suddenly through his throat. “Great God—”
The revolver exploded thunderously; three numbing, palpable waves of sound crashed through the confined corridors. Two more. The revolver dropped to the hard-packed snow of the trail, and Barclay saw the ice-ax shift into defensive position. Connant’s powerful body blocked his vision, but beyond he heard something mewing, and, insanely, chuckling. The dogs were quieter; there was a deadly seriousness in their low snarls. Taloned feet scratched at hard-packed snow, broken chains were clinking and tangling.
Connant shifted abruptly, and Barclay could see what lay beyond. For a second he stood frozen, then his breath went out in a gusty curse. The Thing launched itself at Connant, the powerful arms of the man swung the ice-ax flatside first at what might have been a head. It scrunched horribly, and the tattered flesh, ripped by a half-dozen savage huskies, leapt to its feet again. The red eyes blazed with an unearthly hatred, an unearthly, unkillable vitality.  p. 73

I love that “mewing and insanely chucking” description.
Even though they finally manage to kill the Thing they note that it has changed shape during the fight to become part-dog. This ability of the alien to change itself down to the cellular level drives the rest of the narrative, as the men no longer know who is human and who is a Thing . . . .
There are a couple of later scenes that rise above the well done paranoia and claustrophobia: one of these is (spoiler) when the men have their blood tested (the theory is that a Thing’s blood will want to “live”); and the other is when McReady and Barclay go to see Blair, who has been isolated in another part of the camp. This last part provides an SFnal finish to the story (in contrast to the movie) when they discover the Thing has built a blue-light emitting atomic reactor to power an anti-gravity device it intends to use to escape.
The best parts of this story are very good but the story as a whole is rather uneven, with some parts that don’t really work (e.g., I didn’t understand the explanation for the failure of the serum samples before they attempted the blood test). A greater problem (and one that I wouldn’t have been able to articulate until I saw it discussed elsewhere) is that the characterisation and point of view is all over the place. If the men were more clearly drawn, and the story told from McReady’s point of view (rather than the semi-omniscient one used), it would be a much smoother and more effective piece. Overall you get the feeling of a story that needs another draft—but, for all that, it is well worth reading.

The Terrible Sense by Thomas Calvert McClary starts with a deaf man getting a hearing transplant from a bat (the biological details are not explained). Once you get past this daft premise (just as with McClary’s recent serial Three Thousand Years) the first part is a pretty good account of his developing bat-abilities as he carries out his day to day job as a bookkeeper:

He did not notice it, but he no longer turned to see who was approaching. He knew long before he was fully conscious of their footsteps or voices. He was sitting on one side of a partition with Will Flanagan at noon one day when Will said idly, “I wonder exactly what Marie Stevens is doing at one minute to twelve?”
“Combing her hair,” Theodore said. He was not guessing. She might just as well have been powdering or rouging. But he knew she was combing her hair.
Will looked around the partition and said, “Jeepers!” He gave Clews a peculiar look.
The other bookkeepers began making a lot of remarks like that to Clews. As long as they asked about somebody in the room, or standing in a draft blowing into the room, Clews usually knew the answer. A week later they framed him. They had Marie Stevens sit absolutely quiet behind a filing case. They led up to the idea and asked Clews.
Clews’ mind went blank with concentration. He had not discovered how he knew things yet. He had not even discovered he was being kidded. After a second he said seriously, “She’s trying to be quiet. But she’s chewing gum.”
The committee ran to investigate. She was. They did not notice that the effort of absolute control made her breathe a little harder.  p. 102

This story rather loses its engrossing Weird Tales vibe when he changes career to become a successful blindfolded boxer! Worth reading for the middle section perhaps.

Asteroid Pirates by Royal W. Heckman starts intriguingly with a reporter who lands outside a restaurant and then turns his anti-gravity suit off:

Few people were about. All Earthlings, Fennel noted. He was a little surprised at not seeing any balloon-headed, skeleton men from Mars. Or those infernal Venusians! This part of New York was extremely popular with the inhabitants of Earth’s neighboring planets. Especially after midnight.
Greg was hungry. The new Interplanetary Restaurant was just around the corner. It was a dandy place to pick up news items for his ten-minute column in the New York Radio Star. He made the turn.
A rotund Venusian rolled swiftly toward him. Fennel jumped aside. The Venusian rolled to the outer edge of the walk and went swiftly on his way. The small, round head stuck out from the center of one side like a black hub cap. Greg cursed.
They ought to put a speed limit on those living pinwheels! Of course, with their stubby legs and spherical bodies, the Venusians found it difficult to waddle along a crowded street. But when they lay down and rolled, twenty miles an hour was low gear to them!  p. 113

Fennel then goes into the restaurant and meets an acquaintance who, after some chit-chat, tells him about a nefarious Venusian plot to turn the asteroid belt into a planet. This leads to Fennel’s kidnap (he now knows too much), along with three Saturnian apes, and their trip out to the Belt. There (spoiler) the action kicks off, and the apes prove more than a match for their captors.
This is the usual pulp nonsense, but it is reasonably entertaining, and I suspect it would be enjoyed by Doc Smith fans among others.

Eviction by Isotherm by Malcolm Jameson is an early geoengineering/weather war story set during a future ten year armistice between warring American and Eurasian superpowers. The Americans prime two volcanoes in the Panama Canal area as a defensive measure.
When the Eurasians eventually break the armistice and attack, America explodes the volcanoes and supercharge the eruptions by pumping seawater through underground tunnels. The airborne ash and the diverted Gulf Stream plunge Europe into an Ice Age.
This is dull and characterless for the most part, and I’m not convinced that America would escape so lightly—but this has a spectacular and interesting ending. Awful title.

The Disinherited marks Henry Kuttner ’s first appearance in the magazine—but he wouldn’t return  under his own name until 1943.6
The story starts with the protagonist, Carver, finishing his shift in an underground radium mine; he is a Helot, and they are ruled over by the Lords in this future Earth. Carver returns home to Morna, his mate, who tells him that a spaceship going to Mars has turned back for some reason. After discussing their reproductive status (she is determined not to have a child who will be a slave), Carver takes food to his blind father. The latter is hiding in the country to avoid a euthanasia order.
When Carver returns to see his father the next day, he arrives as soldiers discover and kill him. Carver launches a suicidal attack on them, but is saved when a Martian superman arrives and puts a force field around them both. We then get a lecture about the Cosmic Watcher who has sent the Martian to take electrical power away from humanity so that they can get back on the “right path”.
The story is a jumble of almost completely random elements, but it’s more smoothly written than some work I’ve seen from Kuttner and, despite the massive deus ex machina, an okay read I guess.

The Cover for this issue is an average looking piece by H. W. Wesso, but he produces better Interior artwork, especially for the Campbell story. There is also identifiable work inside by Thomson and Binder, but the remainder (for the Tremaine, McClary, Jameson, and Kuttner stories) are uncredited (although Coughlin, Flatos, and Orban are also listed on the contents page).

Food for the First Planet by Thomas Calvert McClary is a short article (although it seems longer) about growing food on other planets. Not only is the discussion of growing crops on Mars based on completely out of date science, some other details sound incorrect or speculative:

We have such a laboratory to study the little matter of the human lung’s reaction to carbon-monoxide gas at altitudes above 14,000 feet.  p. 45

I assume this is meant to be “carbon dioxide”—carbon monoxide will kill you, regardless of altitude.

After the scientist comes the miner, the soldier of fortune. But soldiers of fortune are notoriously moody and strictly speaking, highly unbalanced.  p. 47

Based on a survey of how many mercenaries?
That said, I did find this interesting snippet (I couldn’t corroborate it, but I did find an interesting book by Hubbard7):

Efforts to combat the tsetse problem were made by Wynant Davis Hubbard. While the fly slaughtered domestic animals after each rain, and there appeared no way to control or exterminate the fly, the wild life of the area lived immune. Hubbard started crossing wild animals with domestic stock. He crossed Herefords with the savage Rhodesian wild buffalo, and Polands with the bush pig.
He tamed elephant, lions, the forty-pound Rhodesian cat. Only the local cat could defend itself against the wild animals of the district. Rhodesian mice and rats destroy more crops than all the locusts put together.
Bit by bit, he was successful. His cattle herds were tractable and began to produce high quality beef and milk. Cross-bred pigs began to show signs of heavy pork. Pet lions and tamed wild dogs acted as watch dogs—and learned to leave domestic stock alone. The tsetse came and as usual killed off the innoculated domestic cattle—but the cross-bred cattle maintained the immunity of their wild forebears.  p. 43

“Power” by John W. Campbell, Jr. starts with a discussion of what the word power means before segueing to what a “better” story is. This is a particularly inelegant, possibly confusing, and certainly unnecessary way of introducing an extended Analytical Laboratory and Reader Survey (just get to the point!)

In Times to Come states that the next issue will mark five years of Street & Smith management8 before introducing a mixture of forthcoming stories by writers old and new. Campbell ends by talking about a new serial from L. Ron Hubbard, The Tramp (not what you would describe as a typical SF title).
The Analytical Laboratory: June 1938 was discussed in the review of that issue.9 See the image above for the extra information that Campbell seeks from his readers this time around.

Orbits, Take-Offs and Landings by Willy Ley is mostly about Hohmann orbits (the curved paths that spacecraft take to get from one planet to another).
At the end of the essay Ley identifies the best place for a spaceport (a place that combines the best rotational speed of the Earth, the highest elevation, etc.):

Strangely enough, there is actually a mountain in existence that fulfils most of the conditions for an ideal spaceport. It is Mt. Kenya in Central Africa, situated directly at the equator, more than three miles high, and surrounded by territory that would present no unsurmountable difficulties for the construction of several large airports. Since Mt. Kenya has generally gentle slopes, it would not even be difficult to build railways all the way from the airports near its foot to a possible spaceport on its top.
It would be strange if the first spaceships would take advantage of these opportunities and ascend from Mt. Kenya—the most modern product of civilization being launched from the very heart of the least civilized continent!  p. 133

Science Discussions and Brass Tacks has a couple of Science Discussions letters before the Brass Tacks section. The first of the former is a puff piece from Arthur J. Burks for his story in this issue, part of which is a description of the magnetic force drive that powers the Arachne.

The Brass Tacks letters are mostly lists of likes and dislikes with comments that are, in places, delightfully unrestrained—such as this from Bob (Wilson) Tucker of Bloomington, Illinois:

May I politely suggest that James Avery of Skowhegan, Maine, commence walking east and not hesitate when he reaches the shore?  p. 155

(Avery was complaining about other letter writers, apparently.)
Or this from John Chapman of Minneapolis, who thought the June issue was otherwise splendid:

The new serial [Jack Williamson’s The Legion of Time] is nothing but tripe. He must have written it while striking a match.  p. 157

Other correspondents praise the story, as well as Gallun’s The Seeds of Dusk, Norman L. Knight’s Isle of the Golden Swarm, and Manly Wade Wellman’s Men Against the Stars. McClary’s Three Thousand Years receives mixed notices (some complain it is too similar to a previous work, Rebirth).
The last letter comes from Isaac Asimov of Brooklyn. He suggests a “mutant” cover showing the rings of Saturn from that planet’s surface, and then makes a plea for longer stories:

Your “novelettes” are often only a page or two longer than the short stories. This is unfortunate as the long complete story fills an indispensable cavity in the scheme of things. Its length permits the development in more complete detail of the plot and it has none of the elements of discontinuity which mark the serial.
I think it would be quite easy for you to give us two thirty-page novelettes each month if you would give us only one serial at a time.
Furthermore, one science article is quite enough, and the ten pages thus saved could quite profitably be turned to fictional uses.  p. 161

Presumably he will be pleased by the inclusion of Campbell’s long story (around 22,000 words) in this issue.
In conclusion, this is an issue which improves after a lacklustre start (either that or I just adjusted to the awfulness), and it is worth reading for the Campbell story.  ●

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers says, in A Requiem for Astounding, that the cover “is possibly one of Wesso’s finest”, and that Who Goes There? was “without question, the outstanding story of the year”. He adds, “This brilliantly conceived and written tale of Antarctic horror is probably the greatest thing Campbell ever wrote.”
Rogers also notes that Malcolm Jameson’s contribution is his first SF story.

2. I note from Wikipedia that The Thing was initially badly received—I saw when it was first released and thought it was great; glad everyone else caught up. There appears to be a 2011 prequel of the same name, and I’d wager it’s awful (I have a sixth sense for these things).

3. For more about the arrival of Burks and Hubbard at Astounding, read footnote four in the July review.

4. Tremaine’s story is the third in a row that features a drive malfunction—they must all have been built by British Leyland. (Topical Election joke about nationalised industries; I’ll explain it over a stale British Rail sandwich and cup of tepid tea.)

5. There is a lot of history behind Campbell’s story, but I’ll deal with that in an upcoming review of Frozen Hell, the expanded version of Who Goes There?

6. I count seven stories in Unknown under Kuttner’s own name (and dozens elsewhere) before he reappeared with Nothing but Gingerbread Left in the January 1943 Astounding. There were three “Lewis Padgett” stories in Astounding that appeared in late 1942.

7. The book by Wynant Davis Hubbard is called Ibana (New York Graphic Society Publishers, Ltd., 1962): “. . . 13 square miles of glorious lion country in Northern Rhodesia, is also the African adventure of a young American couple who lived there four exciting years taming the land and its wild inhabitants as ranchers and zoologists.”
It appears to be based on four previously published articles, the first of which appeared in the 14th April 1934 Saturday Evening Post.

Subscribe to the The Saturday Evening Post archive here.

8. Street and Smith took over Astounding Stories in September 1933 after Clayton Magazines went bust in March of that year.

9. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue were published in the October edition:

Campbell uses a different scoring system here from the one he would eventually settle on, but Who Goes There? is the obvious winner.  ●

rssrss

Nebula Winners Twelve, edited by Gordon R. Dickson, 1978

ISFDB

Other reviews:1
Paul Walker, Galaxy Bookshelf (Galaxy, November-December 1978)
Stephen W. Potts, Science Fiction & Fantasy Book Review (July 1979)
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editor, Gordon R. Dickson

Fiction:2
A Crowd of Shadows • short story by Charles L. Grant ∗∗
Breath’s a Ware That Will Not Keep • short story by Thomas F. Monteleone
Tricentennial • short story by Joe Haldeman
In the Bowl • novelette by John Varley +
The Bicentennial Man • novelette by Isaac Asimov
Houston, Houston, Do You Read? • novella by James Tiptree, Jr.

Non-fiction:
Introduction • by Gordon R. Dickson
Science Fiction in the Marketplace • essay by Algis Budrys
The Academic Viewpoint • essay by James E. Gunn
Nebula Awards, 1975, 1976: Win, Place, and Show

_____________________

Although it isn’t a ‘Best of the Year’ volume for 1976, this collection of Nebula Award winners (chosen by the Science Fiction Writers of America) seems to be a natural fit for that group, hence this review. I have discussed the Asimov and Tiptree stories previously, but have pasted them in at the end for the convenience of those who haven’t seen them.

The first of the stories is the winner of the Nebula Award for best short story, A Crowd of Shadows by Charles L. Grant,3 which begins with the narrator going to a holiday resort called Starburst. While he is on the beach he sees a couple with an android boy (only obvious from the digits tattooed on the inside of his arm). Later, while having dinner in the hotel, he again sees the threesome, and notes the anti-android sentiment expressed by some of the other diners.
The next morning a detective arrives at the narrator’s door to investigate the murder of one of those diners overnight and, later that day, the narrator sees the detective again outside the hotel. He then watches as the detective tries to deal with anti-android hostility from the guests, many of whom think the boy did it because of the way he was treated the previous night. Then there is another murder . . . .
The story closes with (spoiler) the narrator waking that night to see a disturbance, a “crowd of shadows”, on the beach. When he goes down to investigate, he finds the boy is dead—and that he is not android but human (the parents later turn to be the androids).
This story unfolds smoothly enough (and generally reads like something you might find in a literary quarterly) but the motivation for the boy’s actions isn’t convincing, and the murders aren’t explained. The narrator’s final admission about his own potential prejudice also rings false.
This doesn’t seem like an obvious Nebula Winner to me, and I’m not even sure it works as a story.4

Breath’s a Ware That Will Not Keep by Thomas F. Monteleone is one of his ‘Chicago’ series, set in a dystopian future where people are eugenically produced by “Breeders”, host-mothers spoken to telepathically by their “Monitors”:

Technically speaking, Feraxa was human. Visually, however, she was an amorphous, slithering, amoeba-like thing. She was tons of genetically cultured flesh, a human body inflated and stretched and distended until it was many times its normal size. Lost beneath her abundant flesh was a vestigial skeleton which floated disconnected and unmoving in a gelatinous sea. Her bioneered organs were swollen to immense proportions and hundreds of liters of blood pumped through her extensive circulatory system.
Yet he knew, even as he activated the probes that plunged into her soft flesh, that she was still a woman to him. A very special kind of woman. From her earliest moments of consciousness, she had spent her life contained within the glassteel walls of the Breeder Tank. It was an immense cube, ten meters on each side, the back all covered with connecting cables and tubes which carried her life-support systems, monitoring devices, and biomedical elements that were necessary for her continued maintenance.  p. 21

Benjamin is Feraxa’s Monitor and, after some initial scene setting which limns their relationship, he notices that something is wrong with one of her routine biochemical tests. After discussing it with his boss it becomes apparent that there has been a malfunction, and that Feraxa, if left to go to term, will birth a batch of “randoms” rather than the administrators she was supposed to produce. The decision is made to terminate them.
When the surgical team arrives later (spoiler), we see that Feraxa’s psi powers are much more advanced than anyone realises, and she kills several of the medical technicians by inducing cerebral haemorrhages. Nevertheless, she is eventually overcome and killed.
Benjamin goes home and attempts to have biological sex with his partner, rather than the computer-assisted sex that is normal for citizens of this society; as he climaxes he thinks of Feraxa.
This is a competent piece of SF horror, but its 1970’s-style future dystopia feels dated, and it has the feel of a taboo-busting version of earlier 1950’s stories.

Tricentennial by Joe Haldeman starts just before America’s Tricentennial (2076), with a scientist from an L-5 colony trying to get political help to fund a project to send a radio signal to a newly detected alien civilisation. The scientist gets nowhere, and over the next few years the L-5 colonists build a starship to go to a nearby twin sun to harvest antimatter. They then plan to detour to 61 Cygnus (the source of the signals) on the way back. The ship departs during the Tricentennial celebrations on Earth.
The mission initially goes to plan but on the second leg (spoiler) an accident happens on the spaceship, and it continues accelerating to 99% of the speed of light. The effects of relativity cause an ever increasing time difference between the ship and Earth.
When the ship’s crew eventually manage to fix the problem and, after 1500 light years of travel, they settle on a nearby planet. At this point the ship time is 2093, whereas it is 5000 on Earth. This provides a suitably elegiac ending:

The season they began landing colonists, the dominant feature in the planet’s night sky was a beautiful blooming cloud of gas that astronomers had named the North American Nebula.
Which was an irony that didn’t occur to any of these colonists from L-5—give or take a few years, it was America’s Trimillennial.
America itself was a little the worse for wear, this three thousandth anniversary. The seas that lapped its shores were heavy with a crimson crust of anaerobic life; the mighty cities had fallen and their remains, nearly ground away by the never-ceasing sandstorms. No fireworks were planned, for lack of an audience, for lack of planners; bacteria just don’t care. May Day too would be ignored.
The only humans in the Solar System lived in a glass and metal tube. They tended their automatic machinery, and turned their backs on the dead Earth, and worshiped the constellation Cygnus, and had forgotten why.  p. 60

This is a competently done story with some good culture-drift/anti-science/dumbed-down-culture background, but I don’t think it is an obvious Nebula finalist (or a Hugo Award winner!)

In the Bowl by John Varley is one of his ‘Eight Worlds’ stories, this time set on Venus, where the narrator Kiku has gone to prospect for “blast jewels”. He gets off to an uncertain start:

Never buy anything at a secondhand organbank. And while I’m handing out good advice, don’t outfit yourself for a trip to Venus until you get to Venus.
I wish I had waited. But while shopping around at Coprates a few weeks before my vacation, I happened on this little shop and was talked into an infraeye at a very good price. What I should have asked myself was what was an infraeye doing on Mars in the first place?
Think about it. No one wears them on Mars. If you want to see at night, it’s much cheaper to buy a snooperscope. That way you can take the damn thing off when the sun comes up. So this eye must have come back with a tourist from Venus. And there’s no telling how long it sat there in the vat until this sweet-talking old guy gave me his line about how it belonged to a nice little old schoolteacher who never . . . ah, well. You’ve probably heard it before.  p. 62

There follows some travelogue that describes his trip into the deserted wastes of Venus, and Kiku eventually reaches the last human settlement; it is there that his eye finally stops working. His attempts to get it repaired lead him to the story’s second main character, Ember, a precocious eleven-year-old who he finds at a water fountain in the middle of the settlement—with her pet otter. Kiku feels optimistic about Ember’s medical abilities as she has a peacock fan of feathers on her head, and transplanted long blonde hair on her forearms and lower legs.
Ember fixes his eye, and then tells him she wants to go with him to look for blast jewels. Kiku fobs her off until he realises that she is the only one in town who will hire him a sky-cycle. Eventually he, Ember, and the otter set off.
The rest of the story details their journey towards the blast jewel site, during which their relationship develops (Ember agreed to guide Kiku for free as she wants him to adopt her and take her to the more civilised Mars; he doesn’t entirely agree to do this, and rather leads her on). We also learn more about blast jewels, and how the formative process is so unstable that all you have to do to find them is to stamp on the ground and listen for explosions.
The climax of the story occurs when (spoiler), Kiku tells Ember that he won’t take her to Mars; she then sexually propositions him (she is supposedly eleven, and he is seventy), but he refuses and leaves their shelter to sleep outside. When he wakes up later she (and her pet otter!) are lying beside him . . . and next to them both is a nascent blast jewel:

It was three meters away, growing from the cleft of two rocks. It was globular, half a meter across, and glowing a dull-reddish color. It looked like a soft gelatin.
It was a blast jewel, before the blast.
I was afraid to talk, then remembered that talking would not affect the atmosphere around me and could not set off the explosion. I had a radio transmitter in my throat and a receiver in my ear. That’s how you talk on Venus; you subvocalize and people can hear you.
Moving very carefully, I reached over and gently touched Ember on the shoulder.  p. 91

They initially try to figure out how to get far enough away from the explosion so that their force suits will be able to protect them (the suits are impermeable but don’t entirely stop the effects of noise and acceleration—why the suits can mitigate the pressure and heat of Venus’s atmosphere but not the pressure of sound waves isn’t explained). Then Kiku looks more closely at the proto-blast jewel, and the reader gets to visit the sense-of-wonder mother lode (last seen age 12):

The damn thing was moving.
I blinked, afraid to rub my eyes, and looked again. No, it wasn’t. Not on the outside anyway. It was more like the movement you can see inside a living cell beneath a microscope. Internal flows, exchanges of fluids from here to there. I watched it and was hypnotized.
There were worlds in the jewel. There was ancient Barsoom of my childhood fairy tales; there was Middle Earth with brooding castles and sentient forests. The jewel was a window into something unimaginable, a place where there were no questions and no emotions but a vast awareness. It was dark and wet without menace. It was growing, and yet complete as it came into being. It was bigger than this ball of hot mud called Venus and had its roots down in the core of the planet. There was no corner of the universe that it did not reach.
It was aware of me. I felt it touch me and felt no surprise. It examined me in passing but was totally uninterested. I posed no questions for it, whatever it was. It already knew me and had always known me.
I felt an overpowering attraction. The thing was exerting no influence on me; the attraction was a yearning within me. I was reaching for a completion that the jewel possessed and I knew I could never have. Life would always be a series of mysteries for me. For the jewel, there was nothing but awareness. Awareness of everything.  p. 92

What happens afterwards is predictable in hindsight.
This is an engrossing story with well-done world-building, lots of engaging character interaction, and a good sense of wonder scene to finish. However, there are a couple of things that spoiled this for me this time around. First, there is Ember’s age: not only is she a minor in our society, but she is one in the story too (the age of majority is twelve on Venus, and fourteen on Mars), so the idea of her propositioning a much older man makes for uncomfortable reading (even if the advanced biotech makes age—and birth sex—more mutable in this strange future world). And even if you don’t experience a cultural relativism fail as I did, having Ember as an eleven year old just doesn’t convince (I realise there is a history of peppy young female characters in some SF—but eleven?)
The second problem the story has is that at the end of it they both, having discovered the jewels’ sentience, plan to go back to civilization and say nothing—they have no objective evidence, and it would prove impossible for humans to get close enough to the jewels to observe them without causing an explosion. They then (fatalistically and unconvincingly) accept that the jewels won’t be able to exist near human cities, and that mankind’s expansion will eventually doom them.
Some of you will no doubt be able to overlook both these caveats—your prize will be a contemporary retelling of a Golden Age sense-of-wonder type story that is very well done. Those of you who develop the same reservations as me will still find it an entertaining and worthwhile read.

The reviews of the next two stories are reprints from previous posts here—skip down to the conclusion for the rest of this maunder if you have read them before.

The Bicentennial Man by Isaac Asimov is the Nebula (and Hugo) Award winner for best novelette, and it is probably one of the best stories of his I’ve read—vastly superior to his early work in the various 1940s Astoundings I’ve read recently (there is nothing like thirty years of practice to improve your writing).
The story concerns Andrew, a valet robot who is the property of a family who discover that he can carve wood and “enjoy” the experience. His owner begins selling the carvings, and puts half the money in an account for the robot. Andrew becomes increasingly human-like, and he eventually has enough money to “buy” his freedom. His owner doesn’t want the money, but he does institute a court case to give Andrew’s wishes legal foundation, and they win. Nonetheless, years later, after the death of the owner, and even though Andrew is legally free, he almost comes a cropper at the hands of two yobs as a result of his programming, which means he must obey their orders to dismantle himself. Andrew is only just saved in time by the son of the family. Andrew then determines to write a history of robots, which eventually results in the establishment of robot rights.
This first part of the story mirrors, in some respects, the emancipation of the American slaves, but the rest of it goes somewhere else entirely when it proceeds to detail Andrew’s long struggle to become human. This begins after the “Little Miss” of the story, the young girl that Andrew used to care for, dies in her eighties, and Andrew goes to United States Robots with one of the grandsons to pressure them to give him one of their new android bodies. Andrew eventually gets his way, but causes US Robots to change their business model so they never deal in autonomous robots again.
Even after getting his android body, Andrew wants to become even more human, and this leads him into the design of ever more sophisticated prosthetics:

He accepted membership in several learned societies, including one that was devoted to the new science he had established—the one he had called robobiology but which had come to be termed prosthetology. On the one hundred and fiftieth anniversary of his construction, a testimonial dinner was given in his honor at U.S. Robots. If Andrew saw an irony in this, he kept it to himself.
Alvin Magdescu came out of retirement to chair the dinner. He was himself ninety-four years old and was alive because he, too, had prosthetized devices that, among other things, fulfilled the function of liver and kidneys. The dinner reached its climax when Magdescu, after a short and emotional talk, raised his glass to toast The Sesquicentennial Robot.
Andrew had had the sinews of his face redesigned to the point where he could show a human range of emotions, but he sat through all the ceremonies solemnly passive. He did not like to be a Sesquicentennial Robot.  p. 153

The rest of the story describes the processes which make Andrew completely “human” (spoiler): first, there is a court case which defines him as such; second, he has surgery which makes him mortal. The last scene has the World President arriving at Andrew’s deathbed to sign the new law and to declare him The Bicentennial Man.
This is an exceptional piece which is smoothly written, has a number of smart set pieces, and builds a great story arc (which stretches over generations). It also has a great last line which is both a call-back to the first part of the story and a revelation that Andrew’s humanity goes beyond prosthetics or laws.

Houston, Houston, Do You Read? by James Tiptree, Jr. is the Nebula Award winner for best novella, and it is probably one of the best known stories from the this period, a story which tells of a spaceship crew who are caught in a time-distorting solar flare and end up hundreds of years in the future. The three men in the crew don’t realise what has happened for a good chunk of the story and most of the first half is a tense, claustrophobic tale that has them trying to work out what has gone wrong. Earth is not only in the wrong place in the “sky,” and they don’t have the fuel to get there—Houston isn’t answering their radio calls either. However, an all-female crewed spaceship does and, after much back and forth, the three men are eventually rescued by them after using up all their fuel to get as close to them as possible (the last part of the men’s journey involves a perilous spacewalk to cover the remaining distance).
The second half covers the three men’s experiences on board the women’s ship, and how Lorimer, the narrator, slowly discovers that there was an epidemic on Earth that killed off all the men, with only eleven thousand women surviving. These have cloned themselves into a population of two million, and they live in static, peaceful, and non-hierarchical society.
The story concludes (spoiler) with an extended (and sexually violent) scene where the three men are drugged and lose all behavioural inhibitions (the story actually begins with the men in this state and the story is told mostly in flashback). Under the influence of the drug they now act out, in extremis, the character traits exhibited throughout the story (Lorimer is the decent but passive observer; Buddy is the horny, sexist, and rapey one; and Dave—the commander—is the patriarchal, religious nut job).
So, obviously, Buddy rapes one of the Judys and assaults Andy (who we discover is not a teenage boy but an androgynous female). During the assault the pair collect a semen sample (to increase the planet’s gene pool), before Dave turns up and orders Buddy to stop. Dave then does some religious ranting before pulling a gun and firing, puncturing the hull.
The men are eventually restrained and, it would seem, killed—Lorimer’s last line is this:

The drink tastes cool going down, something like peace and freedom, he thinks. Or death.  p. 266

Reader reaction to this story will probably split into two groups. Some will hate it and think that the male characters are misandrist caricatures, and the women’s peaceful utopian society both unlikely and unrealistic; others will love the “Let’s get rid of the men” power fantasy, and see the story as a clear-eyed view of what the world would be like without the dreaded patriarchy. I suspect that the irony of the women’s final actions—where they act in a way as equally as ghastly as what has gone before—will be lost on this latter group and, if it isn’t, I’m guessing this will be written off with the usual revolutionary zeal: “the ends justify the means”, “you can’t make an omelette . . . .”, etc. What did Lorimer do to deserve a death sentence other than possess a Y chromosome?
My own reaction was mixed. The story is, in some respects, technically well done—I’ve already mentioned the tense first part, and the later unravelling of the mystery behind this strange society is skilfully done too, even if it is pretty obvious what has happened. On the other hand there is the stereotypical (at best), or cardboard (at worst), characterisation, and the pious genocide of half of the human race at the end of the story.5 I didn’t dislike this as much as The Marching Morons because it is a better told story, but it is essentially the same kind of unpleasant scapegoating.6

There are four pieces of non-fiction in this volume. Leading off is the Introduction by Gordon R. Dickson, where he discusses the remarkable quality of current SF, and suggests this is due to the wide freedom that writers have within the genre with regard to “idea, pattern, attitude or style”.
He finishes by saying that attempts at categorisation will not prevent this:

Consequently, science fiction, as a self-defining genre, has had to resist the impulses of some of its best friends to put it into different bags at different times in its history, right down to the present one—bags which in every case would have excluded work that properly belonged within its canon. The efforts continue; not merely on the part of some publishers and booksellers, but on the part of some scholars, academics, critics, and others without and within the field itself. Human nature being what it is, they can be expected to so continue into the future.  p. xii

I presume that the individual story and essay introductions also come from Dickson: I’ve included these for contemporary colour, and because they are sometimes of interest for other reasons (the Tiptree one obliquely refers to that writer’s real identity).7

There are also two essays in the middle of the book. The first of these is Science Fiction in the Marketplace by Algis Budrys8 (oddly by-lined as by Algirdas Jonas Budrys), which is, unusually for Budrys, quite a hard read. It took me about two and a half attempts to work out what he was saying (or part of it anyway).
Budrys begins by talking about the kinds of current SF which are worth buying (for readers) and selling (for publishers), before going back to look at when SF first became a commercial proposition under Gernsback and Campbell. After this he swerves into Campbellian SF (“Modern Science Fiction”), and how this had a monopoly in the field until Kingsley Amis arrived:

Kingsley Amis came to this country in the mid-fifties to present a series of lectures at Princeton. These were later collected as New Maps of Hell, the first nonCampbellian (and hence “nonKnightly”) body of SF criticism which had to be generally respected. It represented a view so shockingly disruptive of “modern science fiction” standards that many members of the SF community were unable to assimilate it.
For years, most reaction to Amis was less reasonable than it was outraged. In some quarters, it was puzzled; here was a consistent view of SF measured as social satire, embodying Amis’s “comic inferno” term, lent weight by ivied halls, and implying an artistic accomplishment at some hands—notably Frederik Pohl’s—where Campbellians had simply read competence underlying a kind of frivolity. (The Space Merchants,9 for instance, was a notably successful commercial property of its time, but most SF community members saw it as technically flawed and certainly not a serious social extrapolation.)  p. 107

Budrys then discusses Amis’s successors—the Milford and Clarion writing workshops, the New Wave, etc.—and how, after these various efforts to develop literary standards, “we have come to the present pass”. He then mentions (the information is gleaned from several editor interviews) that storytelling sells better than academic work (“gloom and doom”, “artiness”, “messages”), and discusses both types of fiction before concluding with this:

What does that maximum audience want? What is the essential ingredient that it finds attractive, and will search for? What makes it ignore the work of the conscious and acclaimed intellectualizer, in favor of writers who may appreciate academe and be appreciated by it, but who make no obvious bow to it in their writing?
If the endurance of Star Trek as a phenomenon is any indicator, the key ingredients occur most thickly in “modern science fiction.” The basic premise of the voyages of the starship Enterprise is solidly Campbellian, and most of the individual episodes of that TV series would, with a little fleshing-up, fit very nicely in a 1940 [Astounding Science Fiction]. There is something to be learned, however, from the fact that the “science” in Star Trek is pure set-decoration, and there is room to wonder just how essential “science”—i.e., consumer technology—is to “science fiction.” It’s also interesting to note that Star Trek has always been perceived as somehow different from the standard pulp-like TV adventure series—and more satisfying to those who like it at all.
This observation to my mind opens a door into an enormous room which ought to fill up with critics and scholars. Star Trek has undoubtedly created a major percentage of the SF reading audience today. There is no question but that “modern science fiction” is limited not only intellectually but artistically. It cannot illuminate as much of life as there obviously is. Yet Campbellianism may be stronger than ever today. Still, it cannot be true that the evolution of SF can go no further without leaving its audience behind, or else the readers are not in fact interested in going where no man has gone before on the ultimate frontier. That limitless frontier is the capacity of Man to be interested in himself.
I find it difficult to accept the proposition that SF is a somehow special form of literature, with its own rules, if those rules are assumed to be restrictive. I am much more ready to assert that there is evidence SF contains more of whatever essential it is that causes people to read fiction of any kind, and bit by bit over the years to come we are going to find it, by playing off “academe” and “commerce” against the private thing that happens within the mind of the artist, and which then communicates to the audience.  p. 111-112

There is a lot to unpack in this essay, and I may have to have yet another read of it. (I note in passing that there are some matters discussed here that overlap with Norman Spinrad’s recent review column in Asimov’s Science Fiction.10)

The Academic Viewpoint by James E. Gunn is an interesting essay about teaching sf. Gunn lays down a set of criteria and then discusses each of them:

1. CONSISTENCY OF STORY
2. STORY PREMISES
3. APPLICATION OF THE PREMISES
4. CREDIBILITY OF THE CHARACTERS
5. CONSISTENCY OF THEME
6. IMAGERY
7. STYLE
8. TOTAL ARTFULNESS
9. CHALLENGE TO THE IMAGINATION
10. OVERALL IMPRESSION  p. 120

I suspect Gunn’s classes were worthwhile educational experiences.
At the end of the book we have Nebula Awards, 1975, 1976: Win, Place, and Show, which gives the finalists and winners for this year and the one before:

I suppose I should leave my comments about the finalists for my 1976 overview, but I’d note in passing that it seems a weak year for short stories (Knight’s I See You presumably doesn’t appear as it is outside the qualification period, and Aldiss’s Appearance of Life—which appeared in a UK original anthology, Andromeda #1—presumably wasn’t seen by enough voters).

In conclusion: a book of two halves, with the latter half/two thirds stronger.  ●

_____________________

1. Paul Williams provides a long review of this anthology in his Galaxy Bookshelf (Galaxy, November-December, 1978)—it is almost three pages long—and it is worth a read. He says that “it is the most tolerable [. . .] of the Nebula Award volumes I have read”, and “has two excellent stories” by John Varley and Isaac Asimov, and “two equally good essays” by Algis Budrys and James Gunn. He goes on to say the Varley is “not his best, but pretty good” and that “the Asimov, however, is breathtaking”.
He comments further about the Asimov:

The story is really a series of short-shorts, nicely woven together. What makes them fascinating is the careful evolution of Andrew’s thinking from machine to man. Asimov has not simply taken a human character and called him a robot, but made Andrew wonderfully different and only gradually human. Part of his success depends on the constant contrast between him and his human family. They are not complex people, but warm and alive. As intricate as the philosophical and legal aspects of the story become, Asimov never loses the story’s humanity. Nor is anything assumed. If this were to be the first robot story you had read, you would not be confused by any of the terminology. p. 137

He is not as impressed by Grant’s story:

Less than first-rate is [the] award-winning, “A Crowd of Shadows.” To me, this is a typical “award-winner,” the kind of story people like Damon Knight and Harlan Ellison point to as evidence of science fiction’s maturation, the kind that is supposed to be comparable to anything in the mainstream.
[. . .]
The murders [. . .] have nothing to do with androids, or with the time and place of the story. They are acts of protest against an unfeeling world. The world itself is hardly described. It could as well as be Miami Beach. In short, change “android” to black, and the time of the story to twenty years ago, and you have the same story.
As in most “award-winners,” neither the theme nor the characters are in any way remarkable. By contrast with the Asimov story, one might say that Grant’s narrative technique is more sophisticated (i.e., more literary), but while both are working with familiar materials, Asimov’s style makes them seem fresh and alive, while Grant’s does not.  p. 137-138

He goes on to say the same is true, to a lesser extent, of the Haldeman and Monteleone stories, i.e., both “have familiar ideas given sophisticated literary treatment.” Walker finishes with the fiction by saying, “Finally, there is James Tiptree, Jr.’s Houston, Houston, Do You Read?—which I could not.”
He goes on to discuss the non-fiction essays at some length (although he seems to come to the mistaken conclusion that Budrys was “tsk-tsking” about “the predominance of story-oriented sf in the marketplace”). After some further discussion about why people read SF he concludes with this:

I can think of no better reason for a mature adult to read science fiction than because he or she enjoys it. Non-fiction is a much better source of ideas; the better mainstream literature is a considerably superior source of aesthetic pleasure. All the science fiction experience has to offer is itself. The experience of alien worlds and new technologies and far future adventures. For those who love it, it is enough.  p. 139

2. The stories are taken from F&SF (Grant, Varley), Dystopian Visions (Monteleone), Analog (Haldeman), Stellar #2 (Asimov), Aurora: Beyond Equality (Tiptree). There is nothing from Amazing, Fantastic, or Galaxy.

3. There was only one more ‘Starburst’ story from Grant, A Voice Not Heard in Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine, September 1984.

4. The Nebula Awards are as easily skewed by author popularity as the Hugos, if not more so (I don’t want to be unkind to the writer or his story, but Grant had been Executive Secretary of the SFWA for four years by this point). Remember, awards are decided by author popularity × story quality × story availability × zeitgeist.

5. Death seems to have been a major feature of Tiptree’s work according to the Science Fiction Encyclopaedia. She also has form for writing what can only be described as political propaganda: Ellen Datlow remarked (in a recent Coode Street Podcast) that she rejected a story of hers which has the super-rich eating their young . . . . (is this Mortality Meat?)

6. In Jo Walton’s An Informal History of the Hugo Awards, she says, “I’d have voted for the Tiptree.”
Rich Horton says:

I admit to not being a big fan of Houston, Houston, Do You Read?, largely on the grounds that I don’t really approve of stories that seem to call for my extermination. (I grant that that’s an unfair reading of the story, which is subtler than that, but it still bothers me.)

I’m not sure it is subtler than that.
Gardner Dozois says:

I’ve always been lukewarm about Houston, Houston, Do You Read?, which I think is a much misunderstood story. Alice Sheldon herself once told me that she considered it to be a “cautionary tale,” NOT a wish-fulfilment utopia (someday, we’ll get rid of all the men!), as many people read it; you’re not supposed to approve of what happens to the men in the story, the idea being that either sex having complete power over the other is not a good idea.

Even if I’d had that conversation with Sheldon myself, I’d still find it difficult to view the story as a cautionary tale, and suspect very few people are going to find one buried there, especially given the generally disagreeable male characters (Lorimer is, at best, passive).

7. The 1976 Nebula Award pages (p. 240 and p. 241) are a composite of three pages photoshopped into two for convenience.

8. I was always a bit “meh” about The Space Merchants myself, and couldn’t really see what the fuss was about.

9. Some of Budrys’ other essays are available in print at Lulu, and as ebooks at Amazon and Ansible Editions.

10. Norman Spinrad is not impressed with the current Nebula Award Winners volume, or the state of SF generally, judging by this review column in the current Asimov’s. It was taken down for a short period after complaints before reappearing with Shelia Williams’ (the editor of Asimov’s) disclaimer. (This latter seems rather spineless to me—I can see why you might want to say the author’s opinions are their own, but you don’t have to grovel.)
There is more about this hoo-hah on File770. Some of the comments are interesting (no, not really): apparently you don’t actually have to engage in reasoned argument nowadays, just describe your opponent as a “grumpy old white man”. I wonder if the people who post comments like this realise it says much more about them than those they are attacking.

11. If you want a better idea of how this book measures up against what I might pick for a 1976 ‘Year’s Best’, or learn what other anthologists chose, look at the table below (this is the same one which will appear at the end of the review of the Carr and Wollheim volumes). It will be updated as and when I find stories I like, or citation sources I feel should be included (for more on the latter see below).

The first to fourth column give the story titles, authors, lengths and place of publication (see below the table for abbreviation legend).
The ‘T’ column lists Terry Carr’s choices with an ‘x’, and his recommendation list with an ‘o’.
The ‘D’ column lists Gardner Dozois’ choices with an ‘x’, and his other recommendations (comments in his introduction and in Walton’s An Informal History of the Hugo Awards) with an ‘o’.
The ‘W’ column lists Donald Wollheim’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘A’ column lists Lin Carter’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘S’ column shows my (SF Magazine’s) current choices an ‘x’ (historical choices are an ‘o’). A dash means read but passed over (I only select stories better than ∗∗∗+ and above, and not all of them). Blank means unread.
The ‘C’ column shows how many of the anthologies and/or polls used in the Classics of Science Fiction list included the story in their collections or lists (note that CoSF is SF only and skews against fantasy), minus the anthology or award citations which have their own column (Carr, Dozois, Wollheim, Hugo, Nebula, etc.).
The ‘O’ column shows the number of inclusions in other major anthologies or recommendation lists not on the CoSF (Classics of SF) list. These are selected by me (usually to include fantasy retrospectives or awards that CoSF doesn’t include) but I may not yet have done this for some/all of the stories.*
The ‘H’ column shows the story’s 1977 Hugo award placing (F for finalist, W for winner).
The ‘N’ column shows the story’s 1977 Nebula award placing (F for finalist, W for winner).
The ‘U’ column shows stories that were one of the 1977 Locus Poll’s top ten short stories, novelettes, or novellas.
The ‘T’ column shows the total points that each story gets (they get a point for being in each column and for each of the CoSF and other anthology citations).

The titles, names, lengths, publications, and overall score columns are sortable.

A good way to sample 1976’s best short fiction may be to start at the top of the table and work down until you get to the last of the 2-point stories. Bear in mind this is statistically invalid, but it will give you something to aim at. Enjoy.

Best Science Fiction and Fantasy Stories 1976

na=novella, nv=novelet, ss=short story

AMZ, Amazing Stories; ANA, Analog; ANB, Analog Annual; AND, Andromeda #1; ASI, Isaac Asimov’s SF Magazine; AUR, Aurora: Beyond Equality, BET, Beyond Time; COK, Cosmic Kaleidoscope; DYS, Dystopian Visions; FLA, Flashing swords #3; FRI, Frights; FSF, Fantasy and Science Fiction; FTL, Faster Than Light; FUT, Future Power; GAL, Galaxy; IOT, The Ides of Tomorrow; LON, Lone Star Universe; NEC, New Constellations; NED, New Dimensions #6; NEW, New Worlds #10; ODY, Odyssey; ORB, Orbit #18; ROW, The Best from the Rest of the World; SFD, Science Fiction Discoveries; SFM, Science Fiction Monthly; STE, Stellar #2; STN, Stellar Short Novels; TCS, The Crystal Ship; TSV, The Seventh Voyage; UNI, Universe #6.

* The ‘O’ (Other) recommendations column currently includes a Rich Horton ‘Best Of’ list extracted from his comments in Walton’s An Informal History of the Hugo Awards, and a couple of anthology inclusions for the Norton ●

rssrss

Astounding v32n05, January 1944

ISFDB
Archive.org

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 129-134

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
Technical Error • novelette by Hal Clement
As Never Was • short story by P. Schuyler Miller
The Leech • novelette by Malcolm Jameson
Far Centaurus • short story by A. E. van Vogt
Alias the Living • short story by Frank Belknap Long –
Ogre • novelette by Clifford D. Simak +
Probability Zero:
Sourdough
• short story by George Holman
Light Trap • short story by Jerry Shelton –
Picture from Tokyo • short story by H. O. Hoadley –
The Vacuumulator • short story by Malcolm Jameson –
Cash on the Dimension • short story by Ray Karden –

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x9), A. Williams (x3), Olga Ley (x6), Frank Kramer (x4)
Soft-Boiled • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
A Matter of Taste • essay by Willy Ley
In Times to Come
The Analytical Laboratory: November 1943
“Quartz …” • essay by uncredited
Postwar Plan For Mars • essay by R. S. Richardson

_____________________

This issue is one of the weakest issues of Astounding I have read, so I’ll try to keep this short.

Technical Error by Hal Clement, initially gets off to an intriguing start:

Seven spacesuited human beings stood motionless, at the edge of the little valley. Around them was a bare, jagged plain of basalt, lit sharply by the distant sun and unwavering stars; a dozen miles behind, hidden by the abrupt curvature of the asteroid’s surface, was a half-fused heap of metal that had brought them here; and in front of them, almost at their feet, in the shallow groove scraped by a meteor ages before, was an object which caused more than one of those men to doubt his sanity.
Before them lay the ship whose heat-ruined wreckage had been left behind them only minutes ago—perfectly whole in every part. Seven pairs of eyes swept it from end to end, picking out and recognizing each line. Driving and steering jet pits at each end; six bulging observations ports around its middle; rows of smaller ports, their transparent panes gleaming, obviously intact, in the sunlight; the silvery, prolate hull itself—all forced themselves on the minds that sought desperately to reject them as impossibilities. The Giansar was gone—they had fled from the threat of its disordered atomic engines, watched it glow and melt and finally cool again, a nearly formless heap of slag. So what was this?  p. 7-8

After they get inside the ship they discover that it is different internally—and obviously the product of an alien civilization. Prospects of a wild Van Vogtian adventure quickly disappear though, and it soon becomes a story of scientist-types trying to figure out how this strange ship operates. Eventually (after a lot of trailing around) they find a partially repaired engine and manage to get it going (after the obligatory molecular binding/separation tech lectures).

This drive (spoiler) malfunctions too, and they melt down yet another spaceship (I hate to think what this will do to their insurance premiums). But at least the rescue ship sees the drive running and comes to pick them up.
The external similarity of the ship is never explained, and there are other unlikely occurrences (e. g. stumbling upon the vessel in the middle of nowhere) which make the story difficult to believe. It is boring in places as well.

As Never Was by P. Schuyler Miller begins with a passage where the narrator fantasises about killing his grandfather with a knife. It then pivots to become a piece about time travel, and archaeologists going into the future rather than the past (this latter is pointless as travellers end up creating another time line and can’t get back to their own).
Eventually the story focuses on the narrator’s grandfather, and his travels into the future. On his one and only trip he returned with an unusual knife:

He hadn’t washed it. There was dirt on the fine engraving of the dull-black hilt, and caked in the delicate filigree of the silver guard. But the blade was clean, and it was as you have seen it—cold, gleaming, metallic blue—razor-edged—and translucent.
Maybe you’ve had a chance to handle it, here in the museum. Where the blade thins down to that feather-edge you can read small print through it. Where it’s thicker, along the rib that reinforces the back of the blade, it’s cloudy—milky looking. There has been engraving on the blade, too, but it has been ground or worn down until it is illegible. That is odd, because the blade is harder than anything we know except diamond. There is no such metal in the System or the Galaxy, so far as we know, except in this one well-worn and apparently very ancient knife blade.  p. 35

The grandfather dies soon afterwards and many attempts are made over the years to find the period that the knife came from. The narrator eventually rebuilds his grandfather’s machine and travels as far forward in time as he can. He finds his grandfather’s dig site and (spoiler) discovers the knife was found in the ruins of the museum that was built for it in the narrator’s time—the knife only exists in an enclosed time loop.
The ending is pretty good, but the story has a clunky setup and takes some time to get going.

The Leech by Malcolm Jameson opens with a guard trying to shoot Cranborne (the narrator and the owner of a technology company) when he arrives for work one morning. After he disarms the guard, the latter says that something took control of him, a phenomenon reported elsewhere. Cranborne’s reaction to this is, essentially, “Forget it, there’s a lot of it going about”—confirmed when he goes to his office and finds his secretary burning papers in his office. Later, he sees a co-worker copying secret plans. Both were suffering from the same temporary possession.
Cranborne then discovers that many of the inventions in the company’s pipeline have been preemptively patented by someone else, and suspicion falls on a former disgruntled employee, Joaquin Jones. Jones has become, inexplicably, a big shot in town, and is President of the bank which later forecloses on Cranborne’s company.
Cranborne and his colleagues find out that Jones is also being controlled, just like the guard and secretary. The person behind this turns out to be Neville Bronsan, another previous employee, and an ‘ugly on the outside, ugly on the inside,’ megalomaniac:

The first impulse was to think of him as a madman, but he was not mad. Neurotic, yes, but not insane. His trouble was that he was undersized, ugly and deformed. One leg was shrunken and there was the hint of a back hump, and his long pendulous nose gave him a gnomish appearance that drew giggles or aversion from women. To offset this—or perhaps to heighten the effect of it—was a keen mind that leaped all technical obstacles at a rush. The resultant was a bitter psychic conflict, the sense of intellectual superiority on the one band and physical inadequacy on the other. It manifested itself in a quarrelsome and arrogant disposition that immediately estranged any rash enough to try and work alongside him. It was his obnoxious personality that was the real reason for his leaving the Labs. The other associates had voted him out.  p. 58

Cranborne and his team (spoiler) then build their own mind reading and controlling device after finding some old workbooks of Bronsan’s, a development that involves much pseudo-scientific mumbo-jumbo. A few plot twists later, Bronsan gets his just deserts when they mentally connect him to a prisoner about to be executed by electric chair.
This is pretty poor, formulaic stuff, and it’s hard to believe it comes from the writer of Blind Alley (Unknown Worlds, June 1943).

Far Centaurus by A. E. van Vogt gets off to a rather good start (even if it does lash about like a broken-backed snake later on) with Bill waking up from deep sleep on a starship. After an extended period of rehabilitation (the automated massage lasts for almost an hour), he notes the time:

I leaned over the control chair, and glanced at the chronometer.
It said: 53 years, 7 months, 2 weeks, 0 days, 0 hours and 27 minutes.
Fifty-three years! A little blindly, almost blankly: Back on Earth, the people we had known, the young men we’d gone to college with, that girl who had kissed me at the party given us the night we left—they were all dead. Or dying of old age.
I remembered the girl very vividly. She was pretty, vivacious, a complete stranger. She had laughed as she offered her red lips, and she had said “A kiss for the ugly one, too.” She’d be a grandmother now, or in her grave.
Tears came to my eyes. I brushed them away, and began to heat the can of concentrated liquid that was to be my first food. Slowly, my mind calmed.  p. 69

Bill then gets up and performs some routine tasks, during which he finds Pelham, one of the other three crewmembers, dead (the drug they take has a death rate of ten per cent). He checks on the other men, then suits up and disposes of Pelham’s body. Bill notes these events in the log, and then goes back to sleep.
The rest of the first third of so of the story details Bill’s waking periods on the long journey to Alpha Centauri: during one such episode he sees a spaceship on fire behind them; in another he reads a written note from Blake—the men take turns waking— about the third man’s, Renfrew’s, mental stability.

Eventually they arrive at Alpha Centauri, and (spoiler) the story becomes something else entirely when they are greeted by a future human civilization. It turns out that, after the four men left, humanity designed faster ships which arrived long before they did and colonised the system. The ambassador responsible for dealing with the men welcomes them, and tells them they have been financially provided for (there is money in the bank). He also notes that, as they smell particularly unpleasant to current day humans, his people would appreciate it if they could keep to themselves.
We later get a science lecture about star travel before Renfrew (now cured of his madness) buys a spaceship, whereupon they all leave. Renfrew later flies them into a star which, because of the future science gimmick, sends them back in time to just after they departed from Earth.
The first part of this is a good account of life on a suspended animation starship, but the rest does not convince or gel.

Alias the Living by Frank Belknap Long is the obligatory war story for the issue, and is about the use of image projectors by US Marines (which beam the soldiers’ likeness ahead of them as they patrol through the jungle). When one of the soldiers called Jimmy is later caught in an ambush, he rushes a Japanese machine gunner and bayonets him—but the man is unaffected, gets up, and runs away.
The denouement of the story reveals that (spoiler) early in the engagement Jimmy was injured and incapacitated, and what we saw was the actions of his image, which carried on without him . . . .
The story ends with unlikely—and unconvincing—talk of ghosts and “wild talents”.

Clifford D. Simak hit an early high spot in 1944, during which he published the first four of his ‘City’ stories (City, Huddle, Census, and Desertion in the May, July, September, and November issues of Astounding). Of almost equivalent quality (and the best of his early stories I’ve read so far) is Ogre, which gets off to an intriguing start:

The moss brought the news. Hundreds of miles the word had gossiped its way along, through many devious ways. For the moss did not grow everywhere. It grew only where the soil was sparse and niggardly, where the larger, lustier, more vicious plant things could not grow to rob it of light, or uproot it, or crowd it out, or do other harm.
The moss told the story to Nicodemus, life blanket of Don Mackenzie, and it all came about because Mackenzie took a bath.
Mackenzie took his time in the bathroom, wallowing around in the tub and braying out a song, while Nicodemus, feeling only half a thing, moped outside the door. Without Mackenzie, Nicodemus was, in fact, even less than half a thing. Accepted as intelligent life, Nicodemus and others of his tribe were intelligent only when they were wrapped about their humans. Their intelligence and emotions were borrowed from the things that wore them.  p. 123-124

Apart from Nicodemus there is more local colour: outside Mackenzie’s house is a rifle-tree that takes occasional—but luckily inaccurate—shots at Mac and Nicodemus. There is also Nellie, a book-keeping robot and nag who is the current companion of Encyclopaedia, a fully sentient plant. Encylopedia is also, unlike Nicodmeus, independently mobile.
The story gets going when Mackenzie goes to see Harper, the planetary factor, about the news the moss has brought: Alder, one of the planet’s insectoid aliens, has composed a new symphony at the musical tree grove. It turns out that a recording of this would be very profitable for the Earthmen—the music produced by the aliens is very addictive—so Harper tells Mackenzie to go to the grove with Nellie and Encyclopaedia to cut a deal.
Also mentioned in this conversation are a couple of other items: first, a man called Alexander, who previously became so addicted to the music that he was returned to Earth for treatment, is back on the planet and involved with another visiting alien race called the Groombridgians; secondly, Encyclopedia wants to go to Earth, so it can continue its obsession of accumulating ever more knowledge—at one point in their discussion the men wonder if Encyclopedia is acting for itself or for the planet, and what its real reasons for the trip are.

These latter two threads provide the minor and major plot arcs for the story. The first plays out when Mackenzie and his party arrive at the tree-grove to find that Taylor and the Groombridgians have dug up two of the trees (with plans to ship them off-planet), but are pinned down by a human composer called Wade who has been camping nearby and is now shooting at them:

The man who back on Earth had been known as J. Edgerton Wade, crouched on the low cliff that dropped away into Melody Bowl. The dull red sun was slipping toward the purple horizon and soon, Wade knew, the trees would play their regular evening concert. He hoped that once again it would be the wondrous new symphony Alder had composed. Thinking about it, he shuddered in ecstasy—shuddered again when he thought about the setting sun. The evening chill would be coming soon.
Wade had no life blanket. His food, cached back in the tiny cave in the cliff, was nearly gone. His ship, smashed in his inexpert landing on the planet almost a year before, was a rusty hulk. J. Edgerton Wade was near the end of his rope—and knew it. Strangely, he didn’t care. In that year since he’d come here to the cliffs, he’d lived in a world of beauty. Evening after evening he had listened to the concerts. That was enough, he told himself. After a year of music such as that any man could afford to die.  p. 130

Taylor and the Groombridgians are soon dealt with by Wade, Mackenzie and the others, and the rest of the story deals with Encyclopedia’s maneuvering. Before this plays out Alder, the insectoid composer, says the grove doesn’t want the two trees back as they are troublemakers. So Mackenzie and company arrange a deal where they will take them to Earth.
The last part of the story overcomplicates matters. It turns out (spoiler) that the idea to take the trees back to Earth was Encyclopedia’s, part of a plot to use the trees’ music to modify the way humans think, to change them into something better and less threatening. Nellie discovers this however (she managed to reverse the telepathic process that Encylopedia was using on her to extract her knowledge), and tells Mackenzie. He then plans to burn all the trees to save humankind, but then Wade intervenes to save them and nearly succeeds, only to have Nellie eventually overpower him. The story ends with the trees quarantined, and with Encylopedia getting a suspiciously Campbellian-sounding (it’s pretty jingoistic) lecture about human supremacy.

This is both an interesting and entertaining piece with lots of original or seemingly original ideas. That said, it is also uneven, and has far too much going on (the description above—believe it or not—leaves out several sub-plots and scenes). Well worth your time, though, and head and shoulders above anything else in the issue.

This issue’s fiction finishes with (alas) five Probability Zero pieces: Sourdough by George Holman has a down-on-his-luck Venusian prospector telling of various strikes that didn’t work out (artificial replacements were found for the gold, diamonds and oil he found)—until he finally bores down and finds black coffee, but even that doesn’t work out; Light Trap by Jerry Shelton is about a perpetual energy device that stops working when it is found to be theoretically impossible; Picture from Tokyo by H. O. Hoadley is one I didn’t understand about the enhancement of a pre-war photograph of part of Japan; The Vacuumulator by Malcolm Jameson is a piece of nonsense about light displacing air in a vacuum chamber; and Cash on the Dimension by Ray Karden has a writer use a dimensional machine to enable him to sell his novel in five hundred worlds similar to this one—there is no mention of the other five hundred versions of him who have written the same novel.
These five squibs are a complete waste of trees (and now pixels).

To accompany the indifferent fiction we have a dark and muddy Cover by William Timmins. The cover type—”Astounding” in dark grey and “Science Fiction” in bright yellow—is possibly early evidence of Campbell’s desire to change the name of the magazine.
The quality of the Interior artwork isn’t much better, and reproducing it as small spot illustrations doesn’t help (Orban’s illustration on p. 25, or Kramer’s on p. 132, would have been much better spread across the entire page). This meanness is a consequence of wartime paper shortages and the resultant space restrictions, and I don’t understand why Campbell didn’t lose half a dozen pages of text (preferably the Probability Zero pieces) and increased the size of the illustrations—the magazine would have looked a lot better for it.
Campbell’s editorial, Soft-Boiled, is a short science piece which compares cooking a soft-boiled egg with tempering steel.

The food theme continues in A Matter of Taste by Willy Ley, which is an article about all the strange things humans eat (various animals, insects, mushrooms, clay, etc.) What this is doing in Astounding I have no idea.

In Times to Come and The Analytical Laboratory: November 1943 both share the same page. The first part plugs a new ‘Venus Equilateral’ story (unnamed, but it is Off the Beam), and makes it sound as dull as ditch water (see above). The Anlab for this issue was discussed in the November review.2

“Quartz …” is a two page photo essay about the mineral’s uses.

Postwar Plan For Mars by R. S. Richardson is a long but quite interesting article about Mars (and, to a lesser extent, its “canals”). Richardson starts by saying that observing planets is an unfashionable occupation for astronomers (it is less productive in terms of new knowledge than star or nebula observations) before going on to expand on how the profession works, and the solar geometry of Earth and Mars (last in opposition—closest to each other—in 1941).
Throughout the essay he discusses various images of the planet (there are numerous interior illustrations), before recounting a night’s viewing of his own when he had the good fortune to start on the observatory’s six inch telescope before fortuitously progressing through a number of others to the one hundred inch one:

I left the sixty-inch thoroughly dejected. I was picking my way through the dark with some vague notion of trying another drawing, when a flashlight came bobbing down the path toward the one-hundred-inch. Coming closer it proved to be the observer himself. He had wandered out to smoke a pipe and relax a bit until his next object had risen high enough to start an exposure.
We strolled along, chatting of many things. I called his attention to the fine appearance of Mars, now rising to meet the meridian. He acknowledged its pleasing aspect and expressed pleasure at the remarkable seeing that night.
Other more mundane affairs seemed to weigh heavily on his mind, however. He was worried about the Russians who seemed unable to stem the Nazi tide. The income tax. His car was wearing out, too. Maybe he should get a new one. Yes, he admitted, knocking the ashes from his pipe, things were getting pretty tough. Then suddenly he made a proposal. There was still an hour yet before N. G. C. 1285 would be in position. Suppose we took a look at Mars in the meantime.
He gave me an eyepiece that magnified one thousand and brought Mars within an optical distance of thirty-eight thousand miles. Yet even under this power the image was painfully bright, so bright that all sensation of color was washed away. The pink deserts were turned into a yellowish white like the moon at full; the olive-green areas were dirty brown patches. The whole appearance was so contrary to that at the six-inch it was hard to believe the two were one and the same object. I recognized part of the outline of the Sabaeus Sinus but the other markings were like a strange map. Of course, Mars had rotated a few degrees since my original look but not enough to alter it that much.
And if detection of the canals before had been difficult, now it seemed absolutely hopeless. I could not discern so much as the shadow of the ghost of a canal. You got the impression very strongly that there never could be such a thing as a canal on that flat expanse of moonlike yellow disk.
It would have made a fitting climax to have told how each step upward in power had brought the canals closer and closer, until in the world’s largest telescope they burst into view, covering the planet with a mesh of great circle lines.
But like the old lady who searched in vain for the ice cubes, truth compels me to confess that after studying Mars under the most favourable seeing conditions through four instruments of widely different power, the detail grew progressively less linelike if anything with each increase in aperture. I do not attempt to account for this circumstance. I merely report what happened to me.  p. 169-170

Richardson suggests reasons why the Martian canals are only intermittently visible, and mentions an experiment that sheds light on how the human eye works:

The usual explanation is that the canals are merely subjective, an optical illusion arising from our process of visual perception. The eye is a marvelous natural integrating machine. It gathers everything together that it sees. We glance at the stars and immediately start grouping them into lines and clusters. We look at a tree and instead of analyzing it into leaves and branches, integrate the whole mass into clumps of foliage. Many experiments have been performed based upon this integrating power of the eye.
The most famous of these is the one by Evans and Maunder on some English schoolboys back in 1902. I confess that I once dallied with the idea of repeating their experiment, even going so far as to look up the original paper in the Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society.
It seemed they had used classes of twenty boys ranging in age from twelve to fourteen selected from the Royal Hospital School at Greenwich. The boys were seated at different distances from a circular disk upon which were drawn markings on a certain hemisphere of Mars, except the canals were omitted.
Each boy was told to draw as accurately as possible exactly what he saw upon the disk. All were supposedly ignorant of the appearance of Mars through a telescope. They were simply shown an odd looking figure and told to reproduce it as best they could.
It must be conceded that boys just on the limit of distinct visibility drew lines bearing a startling resemblance to the canals. Not only did they insert lines where none existed on the disk, but they drew lines where canals appear on the recognized maps of Mars. In all they drew twelve lines that could be attributed to well-known canals. Also, it was evident that on the average the boys who were the best draftsmen were the best at putting in canals. One lad named Allen was a whiz at inserting canals. (I wonder what he is doing now?) From which Evans and Maunder concluded that the numerous observers who had so painstakingly been charting canals for the last twenty-five years had indeed been drawing precisely what they saw, except that what they saw had no existence in reality.  p. 171

He finishes up by mentioning photos that supposedly show canals (although they had not got from France to the USA at the time of writing).3
The article finishes with a proposition for a multidisciplinary task force to constantly observe Mars in 1956, the next opposition.
An interesting article for its content and historical perspective.

Apart from the Simak story and the Richardson article, this is a very poor issue.  ●

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers doesn’t say anything about this issue in A Requiem for Astounding, but he says this about 1944:

Of all the years commonly considered Golden, 1944 was the least memorable; the outstanding stories that were published only pointed up the disappointing quality of the bulk of what was left. In some respects, 1944 can be regarded as a bridge between two peaks; the peak 1940 to 1943, and the peak 1945 to 1950. At any rate, the slump was short lived and things began to pick up considerably from 1945 on.  p. 134

2. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the March 1944 issue:

I have no idea why the Simak story didn’t top the poll: too much biological life and not enough rivets, I suspect.

3. According to Wikipedia, the Martian Canals were discounted much earlier than 1944:

The influential observer Eugène Antoniadi used the 83-cm (32.6 inch) aperture telescope at Meudon Observatory at the 1909 opposition of Mars and saw no canals, the outstanding photos of Mars taken at the new Baillaud dome at the Pic du Midi observatory also brought formal discredit to the Martian canals theory in 1909, and the notion of canals began to fall out of favor. Around this time spectroscopic analysis also began to show that no water was present in the Martian atmosphere. However, as of 1916 Waldemar Kaempffert (editor of Scientific American and later Popular Science Monthly) was still vigorously defending the Martian canals theory against skeptics.  ●

rssrss

The 1977 Annual World’s Best SF, edited by Donald Wollheim

ISFDB link

Other reviews:1
Joachim Boaz, Science Fiction Ruminations
Charles N. Brown, Isaac Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine (January-February 1978)
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editor, Donald A. Wollheim; Assistant Editor, Arthur W. Saha

Fiction:2
Appearance of Life • short story by Brian W. Aldiss
Overdrawn at the Memory Bank • novelette by John Varley
Those Good Old Days of Liquid Fuel • short story by Michael G. Coney +
The Hertford Manuscript • novelette by Richard Cowper
Natural Advantage • short story by Lester del Rey
The Bicentennial Man • novelette by Isaac Asimov
The Cabinet of Oliver Naylor • novelette by Barrington J. Bayley
My Boat • short story by Joanna Russ
Houston, Houston, Do You Read? • novella by James Tiptree, Jr.
I See You • short story by Damon Knight

Non-fiction:
Introduction • by Donald A. Wollheim

_____________________

This is the second of five volumes of ‘Best of the Year’ fiction for 1976 that I intend reviewing here (one of them is actually the annual Nebula Awards collection), and it has a completely different line-up from the previously reviewed book from Gardner Dozois. I have, however, previously read and reviewed the Aldiss and Cowper stories, so I’ve cut and pasted those reviews in at the end of this one for reader convenience rather than providing links.

Overdrawn at the Memory Bank is one of the half dozen or so ‘Eight Worlds’ stories that propelled John Varley to super-stardom in the mid-1970s, tales that were notable for the fully realised and strikingly different future they portrayed.
This one opens with the narrator, Fingal, on holiday on the Moon, where he plans to holiday inside the mind of a lioness at the Kenya “disneyland”. This process begins with him lying on a recording table with the top of his head off while a medico records his memories; these will be inserted into the mind of the animal while his body is kept in cold sleep.
While the technician works, Fingal has to put up with a group of visiting schoolchildren in the backgound:

“What’s the big green wire do, teacher?” asked a little girl, reaching out one grubby hand and touching Fingal’s brain where the main recording wire clamped to the built-in terminal.
“Lupus, I told you you weren’t to touch anything. And look at you, you didn’t wash your hands.” The teacher took the child’s hand and pulled it away.
“But what does it matter? You told us yesterday that the reason no one cares about dirt like they used to is dirt isn’t dirty anymore.”
“I’m sure I didn’t tell you exactly that. What I said was that when humans were forced off Earth, we took the golden opportunity to wipe out all harmful germs. When there were only three thousand people alive on the moon after the Occupation it was easy for us to sterilize everything. So the medico doesn’t need to wear gloves like surgeons used to, or even wash her hands. There’s no danger of infection. But it isn’t polite. We don’t want this man to think we’re being impolite to him, just because his nervous system is disconnected and he can’t do anything about it, do we?”
“No, teacher.”
“What’s a surgeon?”
“What’s ‘Infection’?”  p. 21-22

The subsequent transfer of Fingal’s memories does not go as planned, and he eventually comes around in what he thinks is his room—until, that is, a supernatural hand starts writing the air, telling him that his memories are being stored in a computer because the disneyland has misplaced his body.
After a long briefing Fingal carries on with his simulated “life” inside the computer while the management sorts things out. This is not entirely without peril however, and a computer operator called Apollonia has to intervene several times to keep him on the straight and narrow, most notably when Fingal starts to perceive the computer that houses his memories, something that could lead to permanent catatonia:

He began seeing things around him that had been veiled before. Patterns. The reality was starting to seep through his illusions. Every so often he would look up and see the faintest shadow of the real world of electron flow and fluttering circuits he inhabited. It scared him at first. He asked Apollonia about it on one of his dream journeys, this time to Coney Island in the mid-twentieth century. He liked it there. He could lay on the sand and talk to the surf. Overhead, a skywriter’s plane spelled out the answers to his questions. He studiously ignored the brontosaurus rampaging through the roller coaster off to his right.
“What does it mean, O Goddess of Transistoria, when I begin to see circuit diagrams on the walls of my apartment? Overwork?”
“It means the illusion is beginning to wear thin,” the plane spelled out over the next half-hour. “You’re adapting to the reality you have been denying. It could be trouble, but we’re hot on the trail of your body. We should have it soon and get you out of there.” This had been too much for the plane. The sun was going down now, the brontosaurus vanished, and the plane ran out of gas. It spiraled into the ocean and the crowds surged closer to the water to watch the rescue. Fingal got up and went back to the boardwalk.  p. 43

Slowly, Fingal starts to fall in love with Apollonia, but she tells him she doesn’t feel the same way. He buckles down to his computer studies.
A year later (spoiler), she arrives at his graduation to tell him that they have found his body, and that it is time to go back. The final twist is that only six hours have elapsed in the real world.
This is (or at least was) a highly original and inventive story, and fun and witty to boot.

Those Good Old Days of Liquid Fuel by Michael G. Coney is one of his ‘Peninsula’ stories,3 but slightly atypical for that series in that it takes place in the narrator’s childhood rather than his adult life.
The narrator, Joe Sagar, begins by describing a childhood friend called Charlesworth, and then tells of their frequent clandestine visits to the spaceport at Pacific Northwest, where (the soon to be obsolescent) liquid fuel rockets take-off and land:

Charles was a collector. He carried with him a little book—it was almost as though it had been published with him in mind—listing every conceivable ship which might land at any Earth spaceport. It was prepared in co-operation with all the larger operators and most of the smaller ones, and was intended for official use only. Charlesworth, however, had obtained a contraband copy, and whenever he saw a ship, he consulted his book. If he had never seen that particular vessel before, he checked it off neatly in green ink and was deliriously happy. I got a kick out of watching him. He would regard the blasting jets of a descending ship raptly—as did I—but as soon as he was able to identify it, his interest was transferred to the printed page. His ratlike face intent, he would scrutinize his list. In the majority of cases he would then frown with disgust, shutting the book with a snap and kicking moodily at a rock, or belching loudly.
Charlesworth’s was a dead-end passion. The moments of happiness grew fewer as the check marks in his book multiplied like algae, and as I looked over his shoulder, I could estimate to within a few months when he would quit the hobby, or maybe shoot himself.  p. 58

Inevitably, this monomaniacal adolescent friendship is disrupted (and slowly starts dying) when Charlesworth takes up with the “queen of grade 9”, Annette LaRouge. She owns a telepathic paracat called Bagheera, which features in the climax of the story, along with the consummation of Charlesworth’s obsession as he finally records a last unseen rocket (spoiler):

It was no good. I should have realized before. Charlesworth and I were through, and had been through for weeks. I moved away a few paces; there is nothing more lonely than standing too close to people who ignore you. I watched them as they chatted like a grown-up couple; Annette with her haughty look and undeniably classic features standing like a posing model. God, how I hated her. At fifteen years old, I found classic features singularly unattractive, preferring plump cheeks and ripe lips, bright eyes and big tits.
And as an adult, my preferences have not changed one iota.
Which proves that I was pretty damned mature at the age of fifteen, maybe.
Charlesworth was spoiling the effect somewhat as he struggled to control the fractious paracat, thin sinews standing out on his puny wrists while his rodent face was turned attentively and gravely towards Annette and they discussed Orwell’s 1984, the year’s set book, with every appearance of absorption.
At last the pretentious scene was interrupted by the familiar, simple and wonderful thunder from the sky. I looked up and saw the tiny cloud, and from the corner of my eye I saw Charlesworth watching too, and for a moment it was possible to believe that the old times were back. Life is so full at that age that a man can become nostalgic about the happenings of last month.
But Annette was still determinedly talking.
Charlesworth missed his cue and earned a sharp look and an enquiry as to the state of his hearing.
I could make out the tiny black dot now, and the little spark was visible even on this bright summer day.
Annette prattled on, and Charlesworth answered with desperate interest.
A light wind was trailing the smoke across the sky like a comet’s tail. Charlesworth jerked suddenly as the paracat tugged at the leash.
“But of course, the exaggerated problems met by Winston Smith were inspired by the fears of the age in which Orwell lived.”
Maybe she was right, but so what? So what on a summer’s afternoon when a rocket is squatting towards you on scarlet tailfeathers?
“Yeah, I’m sure,” muttered Charlesworth, looking up.
And now it was clearly in view, gleaming silver through the smoke and flame, tall and sharp and beautiful, strong talons downhung like a stooping hawk, roaring with power so that the Earth shook. I watched it with love, Charlesworth watched it.
“Roger! I’m speaking to you!”
No doubt she had more to say, but by now the din was intense, and even Annette turned her gaze upwards, wincing, watching. The silver giant was decelerating, elongating as it dropped towards its exhaust pit; the curved flank came plainly into view. There was a diagonal crest; below, the words HETHERINGTON ORGANIZATION.
And below that, in plain black, the number 4.  p. 66

The scene above illustrates some of the things I like about Coney’s writing—in this case the vividly drawn characters that leap off the page, and their amusingly dysfunctional interactions. What this doesn’t show (although that appears shortly after the passage above) is his strong plotting—his endings are often hitherto invisible mousetraps that snap shut.
I enjoyed this one, even if it does reflect the social mores of the 1970s.4

Natural Advantage by Lester del Rey tells of an alien spaceship that goes to Earth to warn humanity about an anti-matter storm headed towards the Solar System. Most of the story concerns the first contact in orbit, and how the aliens subsequently learn to speak English (largely through a linguist called Ellen). Eventually, the aliens deliver their warning, and also take the unprecedented step of giving humanity all their knowledge—even though human’s don’t have a third eye like them, or the associated time sense the aliens think they’ll need to use the information to somehow avoid the storm.
The aliens then leave for the colony planet they planned to visit to before their diversion, and spend their time learning more fluent English en route. When the anti-matter storm is calculated to have arrived at Earth, they quietly mark what they assume is the destruction of humanity.
Of course (spoiler), when they later arrive home they find Ellen waiting for them, and learn that humanity has done much, much more with the science than the aliens have.
This is the kind of Human Exceptionalism story that John W. Campbell would have bought in a moment, and that is perhaps its flaw as well: it feels rather dated compared with the rest of the stories here, a refugee from earlier decades. A pleasant if minor piece.

The surprise of the collection for me was The Bicentennial Man by Isaac Asimov, which is probably one of the best stories of his I’ve read—vastly superior to his early work in the various 1940s Astoundings I’ve read recently (there is nothing like thirty years of practice to improve your writing).
The story concerns Andrew, a valet robot who is the property of a family who discover that he can carve wood and “enjoy” the experience. His owner begins selling the carvings, and puts half the money in an account for the robot. Andrew becomes increasingly human-like, and he eventually has enough money to “buy” his freedom. His owner doesn’t want the money, but he does institute a court case to give Andrew’s wishes legal foundation, and they win. Nonetheless, years later, after the death of the owner, and even though Andrew is legally free, he almost comes a cropper at the hands of two yobs as a result of his programming, which means he must obey their orders to dismantle himself. Andrew is only just saved in time by the son of the family. Andrew then determines to write a history of robots, which eventually results in the establishment of robot rights.
This first part of the story mirrors, in some respects, the emancipation of American slaves, but the rest of it goes somewhere else entirely in that it details Andrew’s long struggle to become human. This begins after the “Little Miss” of the story, the young girl that Andrew used to care for, dies in her eighties, and Andrew goes to United States Robots with one of the grandsons to pressure them to give him one of their new android bodies. Andrew eventually gets his way, but causes US Robots to change their business model so they never deal in autonomous robots again.
Even after getting his android body, Andrew wants to become even more human, and this leads him into the design of ever more sophisticated prosthetics:

He accepted membership in several learned societies, including one that was devoted to the new science he had established—the one he had called robobiology but which had come to be termed prosthetology. On the one hundred and fiftieth anniversary of his construction, a testimonial dinner was given in his honor at U.S. Robots. If Andrew saw an irony in this, he kept it to himself.
Alvin Magdescu came out of retirement to chair the dinner. He was himself ninety-four years old and was alive because he, too, had prosthetized devices that, among other things, fulfilled the function of liver and kidneys. The dinner reached its climax when Magdescu, after a short and emotional talk, raised his glass to toast The Sesquicentennial Robot.
Andrew had had the sinews of his face redesigned to the point where he could show a human range of emotions, but he sat through all the ceremonies solemnly passive. He did not like to be a Sesquicentennial Robot.  p. 153

The rest of the story describes the processes which make Andrew completely “human” (spoiler): first, there is a court case which defines him so; second, he has surgery which makes him mortal. The last scene has the World President arriving at Andrew’s deathbed to sign the new law, and to declare him The Bicentennial Man.
This is an exceptional piece which is smoothly written, has a number of smart set pieces, builds a great story arc (which stretches over generations), and has a great last line.

The Cabinet of Oliver Naylor by Barrington J. Bayley starts with a private eye called Frank Naylor watching a Bogart/Stanwyck movie when a man called Oliver Naylor phones him. As Frank talks to the caller he tunes the TV and sees the man he is talking too. After the phone all ends, he picks up a pair of binoculars and watches Bogart and Stanwyck’s car drive by outside.
This beginning becomes even more complicated when the story’s point of view then switches to the caller, Oliver Naylor, who, it materialises, has been watching Frank on an invented device called a thespitron, a viewing device which “[has] an unlimited repertoire and [. . .] one could expect a random dramatic output from it.” We also discover that Oliver is in an artificial habitat which travelling through space at a speed of c186, and he is giving a man called Watson-Smythe a lift to see an artist called Corngold. At this point we are only five pages in to the story.
The rest of journey to see Corngold involves cups of tea as well many scientific and philosophical data dumps. These include discussions and digressions about identity; the development of the velociraptor; the British scientific renaissance; the problems of navigation in the vast universe; and how Naylor has not yet managed to couple the nature of identity with his thespitron to solve that latter problem.
When the habitat arrives at Corngold’s home (beside a “matter-less lake”), this becomes a different story: Naylor and his passenger Watson-Smythe enter Corngold’s habitat and find him mistreating a young woman, at which point Watson-Smythe pulls out a stunner, and reveals himself as a member of MI19, the “Infinity Police”. He arrests Corngold and plans to return to Earth in the Corngold’s habitat. When the MI19 agent the learns the drive record is faulty (they cannot retrace their steps to Earth without it) Naylor says he’ll repair it.
The final section plays out in Corngold’s habitat and involves his revelation that a nearby alien race have developed distant viewing and matter tranmission devices. Corngold later (spoiler) uses the latter to get rid of Watson-Smthye before he projects Naylor, who has retreated to his ship, into the matter-less lake.
The last sequence in the story involves the thespitron going blank—a problem of identity loss due to the lack of matter in the lake. The story closes with Nayland wondering how long his self-consciousness will preserve him.
I suppose I should mention that Corngold section is leavened with (pick your choice of lewd, bawdy, vulgar or politically incorrect) material where Corngold abuses his wife and generally behaves badly:

‘That would have left you in a bit of a spot,’ Naylor said. ‘You have no way of finding your way home.’
‘So what? Who the hell wants to go to Earth anyway—eh? I’ve got everything I need here.’ Corngold winked at him obscenely, and, to the extreme embarrassment of both Naylor and Watson-Smythe, stuck his finger in Betty’s vulva, wriggling it vigorously. Betty became the picture of humiliation, looking distressfully this way and that. But she made no move to draw back.
Naylor bristled. ‘I say—you are British, aren’t you?’ he demanded heatedly.
Corngold withdrew his finger, whereupon Betty turned and snatched for her clothes. He looked askance at Naylor.
‘And why shouldn’t I be?’ he challenged, his manner suddenly aggressive.
‘Dammit, no Englishman would treat a woman this way!’
Corngold giggled, his mouth agape, looking first at Betty and then at Naylor. ‘Fuck me, I must be a Welshman!’  p. 184-185

This is an idiosyncratic story that I’m not sure entirely works (it is uneven too) but, if you are up for something with bucketloads of philosophy and future science lectures, and with a streak of lewd and vulgar 1970’s humour, you may well like this. It’s certainly a change of pace, and something you would not have found in the American magazines of the time.

My Boat by Joanna Russ starts with a writer talking to his agent over lunch. The former tells of two friends from his teenage years, Al and Cissie, the latter a black girl who experienced strange fugue-like states, but who was also capable of stunning performances during the school’s drama society productions. In among the writer’s various reminiscences he mentions one day he drove the pair (a couple by this point in the story) to a boat that Cissie part-owned. It is here that the writer first sees Cissie’s power to shape reality:

Al said, “Would you get us some fresh water, Jim?”
“Sure,” I said. “Where, up the dock?”
“No, from the bucket. Back in the stern. Cissie says it’s marked.”
Oh, sure, I thought, sure. Out in the middle of the Pacific we set out our bucket and pray for rain. There was a pail there all right, and somebody had laboriously stenciled “Fresh Water” on it in green paint, sort of smudgy, but that pail was never going to hold anything ever again. It was bone-dry, empty, and so badly rusted that when you held it up to the light, you could see through the bottom in a couple of places. I said, “Cissie, it’s empty.”
She said, “Look again, Jim.”
I said, “But look, Cissie—” and turned the bucket upside-down.
Cold water drenched me from my knees to the soles of my shoes.
“See?” she said. “Never empty.” I thought: Hell, I didn’t look, that’s all. Maybe it rained yesterday. Still, a full pail of water is heavy and I had lifted that thing with one finger. I set it down—if it had been full before, it certainly wasn’t now—and looked again.
It was full, right to the brim. I dipped my hand into the stuff and drank a little of it: cold and clear as spring water and it smelled—don’t know—of ferns warmed by the sun, of raspberries, of field flowers, of grass. I thought: my God, I’m becoming a filbert myself!  p. 203-204

Their preparations to depart are interrupted by the local sheriff, who challenges the narrator. Meanwhile, the boat disappears, and the couple are not seen again until the narrator sees an unaged Alan twenty years later, and goes with him to his (unchanged) childhood house (another manipulated reality) to get a Lovecraft book, The Dream Quest Of Unknown Kadath. Alan then disappears again, along with his childhood house.
The story closes with the narrator ending his tale, and noticing Alan in one of the neighbouring booths . . . .
This is a pretty good story for the first two-thirds or so—its early fifties milieu is very well done (this probably accounts for the story’s admirers) and it would have been a natural choice for the Dozois volume. Myself, I found it a bit of a mess structurally, and thought it fizzled out at the end.

Houston, Houston, Do You Read? by James Tiptree, Jr. is probably one of the best known stories from the this period, a story which tells of a spaceship crew who are caught in a time-distorting solar flare and end up hundreds of years in the future. The three men in the crew don’t realise what has happened for a good chunk of the story and most of the first half is a tense, claustrophobic tale that has them trying to work out what has gone wrong. Earth is not only in the wrong place in the “sky,” and they don’t have the fuel to get there—Houston isn’t answering their radio calls either. However, an all-female crewed spaceship does and, after much back and forth, the three men are eventually rescued by them after using up all their fuel to get as close to them as possible (the last part of the men’s journey involves a perilous spacewalk to cover the remaining distance).
The second half covers the three men’s experiences on board the women’s ship, and how Lorimer, the narrator, slowly discovers that there was an epidemic on Earth that killed off all the men, with only eleven thousand women surviving. These have cloned themselves into a population of two million, and they live in static, peaceful, and non-hierarchical society.
The story concludes (spoiler) with an extended (and sexually violent) scene where the three men are drugged and lose all behavioural inhibitions (the story actually begins with the men in this state and the story is told mostly in flashback). Under the influence of the drug they now act out, in extremis, the character traits exhibited throughout the story (Lorimer is the decent but passive observer; Buddy is the horny, sexist, and rapey one; and Dave—the commander—is the patriarchal, religious nut job).
So, obviously, Buddy rapes one of the Judys and assaults Andy (who we discover is not a teenage boy but an androgynous female). During the assault the pair collect a semen sample (to increase the planet’s gene pool), before Dave turns up and orders Buddy to stop. Dave then does some religious ranting before pulling a gun and firing, puncturing the hull.
The men are all eventually restrained and, it would seem, killed—Lorimer’s last line is this:

The drink tastes cool going down, something like peace and freedom, he thinks. Or death.  p. 266

Reader reaction to this story will probably split into two groups, I guess. Some will hate it and think that the male characters are misandrist caricatures, and the women’s peaceful utopian society both unlikely and unrealistic; others will love the “Let’s get rid of the men” power fantasy, and see the story as a clear-eyed view of what the world would be like without the dreaded patriarchy. I suspect that the irony of the women’s final actions—where they act in a way as equally as ghastly as what has gone before—will be lost on this latter group and, if it isn’t, I’m guessing this will be written off with the usual revolutionary zeal: “the ends justify the means”, “you can’t make an omelette . . . .”, etc. What did Lorimer do to deserve a death sentence other than possess a Y chromosome?
My own reaction was mixed. The story is, in some respects, technically well done—I’ve already mentioned the tense first part, and the later unravelling of the mystery behind this strange society is skilfully done too, even if it is pretty obvious what has happened. On the other hand there is the stereotypical (at best), or cardboard (at worst) characterisation, and the pious genocide of half of the human race at the end of the story.5 I didn’t dislike this as much as The Marching Morons because it is a better told story, but it is essentially the same kind of unpleasant scapegoating.6

I See You by Damon Knight has, for such an accomplished writer and editor, quite a confusing start (and there are one or two other passages that have this problem too). Fortunately, the rest of it is an accomplished story about the development of a device called an Ozo, a time and space viewer that can be used to see any place at any time. The first half follows the inventor’s development of the device, and then his anonymous production and distribution of it. Once it becomes widespread, and any person can see what any other is doing now, or has done in the past, society is transformed:

You are watching an old movie, Bob and Ted and Carol and Alice. The humor seems infantile and unimaginative to you; you are not interested in the actresses’ occasional semi-nudity. What strikes you as hilarious is the coyness, the side-long glances, smiles, grimaces hinting at things that will never be shown on the screen. You realize that these people have never seen anyone but their most intimate friends without clothing, have never seen any adult shit or piss, and would be embarrassed or disgusted if they did. Why did children say “pee-pee” and “poo-poo,” and then giggle? You have read scholarly books about taboos on “bodily functions,” but why was shitting worse than sneezing?  p. 276

Apart from the story’s “if this goes on” inevitability, its other strength is the sense of wonder buzz, the feeling of infinity, that several of the passages provide:

You are forty, a respected scholar, taking a few days out to review your life, as many people do at your age. You have watched your mother and father coupling on the night they conceived you, watched yourself growing in her womb, first a red tadpole, then a thing like an embryo chicken, then a big-headed baby kicking and squirming. You have seen yourself delivered, seen the first moment when your bloody head broke into the light. You have seen yourself staggering about the nursery in rompers, clutching a yellow plastic duck. Now you are watching yourself hiding behind the fallen tree on the hill, and you realize that there are no secret places. And beyond you in the ghostly future you know that someone is watching you as you watch; and beyond that watcher another, and beyond that another . . . Forever.  p. 279

The next two story reviews are cut and pastes from previous posts.

Appearance of Life by Brian W. Aldiss is an impressive, dense and contemplative story that has so much to unpack that I barely know where to start (spoilers abound). The basic situation is that, in the far future, a human Seeker arrives on the planet Norma to visit a museum located in a huge structure constructed by the alien Korlevalulaw; the first couple of pages give us some background information on the long vanished aliens and the building they left, which demarcates the planet’s equator, with land to one side and sea to the other.
The Seeker is visiting the museum to complete assignments for various individuals and institutions. Although the exhibits are viewable by remote holography, he can take a gestalt view of the contents and achieve insights.
The first significant section of the story is a conversation the Seeker has with an android librarian:

‘Do you always work in this section?’
‘No. But this is one of my favourite sections. As you have probably observed, here we classify extinct diseases—or diseases which would be extinct if they were not preserved in the museum. I find the micro-organism beautiful.’
‘You are kept busy?’
‘Certainly. New exhibits arrive every month. From the largest to the smallest, everything can be stored here. May I show you anything?’
‘Not at present. How long before the entire museum is filled?’
‘In fifteen and a half millennia, at current rate of intake.’
‘Have you entered the empty part of the museum?’
‘I have stood on the fringes of emptiness. It is an alarming sensation. I prefer to occupy myself with the works of man.’
‘That is only proper.’
I drove away, meditating on the limitations of android thinking. Those limitations had been carefully imposed by mankind; the androids were not aware of them. To an android, the android umwelt or conceptual universe is apparently limitless. It makes for their happiness, just as our umwelt makes for our happiness.  p. 13-14

This concept of “unwelt” (“the world as it is experienced by a particular organism”) seems to be key to the story, and is mentioned once more in the text, as well as generally linking other parts of the narrative.7
During the rest of the first day’s explorations the Seeker finds a wedding ring and a photograph. These lead him to recall a fellow Seeker’s comment about the “secret of the universe” (which is thought to be hidden in the museum) and their subsequent exchange that the idea was really a construct of the human mind, or perhaps “the mind that built the human mind.”
The next day he makes another discovery:

Among the muddle, a featureless cube caught my eye. Its sides were smooth and silvered. I picked it up and turned it over. On one side was a small depression. I touched the depression with my finger.
Slowly, the sides of the cube clarified and a young woman’s head appeared three-dimensionally inside them. The head was upside down. The eyes regarded me.
‘You are not Chris Mailer,’ she said. ‘I talk only to my husband. Switch off and set me right way up.’
‘Your “husband” died sixty-five thousand years ago,’ I said.
But I set her cube down on the shelf, not unmoved by being addressed by an image from the remote past. That it possessed environmental reflexion made it all the more impressive.
I asked the museum catalogue about the item.
‘In the jargon of the time, it is a “holocap”,’ said the catalogue. ‘It is a hologrammed image of a real woman, with a facsimile of her brain implanted on a collapsed germanium-alloy core. It generates an appearance of life.’  p. 16-17

He investigates further, and it plunges him into meditation about the museum, and what might happen if he did find “secret of the universe”:

Then the whole complex of human affairs might be unravelled beneath the spell of one gigantic simplification, until motivation was so lowered that life would lose its purport; whereupon our species would wither and die, all tasks fulfilled. Such indeed could have happened to the unassailable Korlevalulaw.  p. 18

This idea surfaces again at the end of the story.
Later, the Seeker finds himself serendipitously taking an item from an android, a more sophisticated example of the holocube he found earlier—and he discovers that the image contained is the husband of the woman he saw earlier. The Seeker sets the pair of cubes opposite the other and the pair start to converse. This is the most striking scene in the story. The two heads talk to each other, or at least they appear to, but it soon becomes obvious that they are limited facsimiles of their owners from different periods of their lives, and they end up talking at cross purposes. The Seeker has an epiphany (spoiler):

The images could converse, triggered by pauses in each other’s monologues. But what they had to say had been programmed before they met. Each had a role to play and was unable to transcend it by a hairsbreadth. No matter what the other image might say, they could not reach beyond what was predetermined. The female, with less to say than the male, had run out of talk first and simply begun her chatter over again.
Jean’s holocap had been made some fifteen years before Mailer’s. She was talking from a time when they were still married, he from a time some years after their divorce. Their images spoke completely at odds—there had never been a dialogue between them . . . .
These trivial resolutions passed through my mind and were gone.
Greater things occupied me.
Second Era man had passed, with all his bustling possessive affairs.
The godly Korlevalulaw too had passed away. Or so we thought.
We were surrounded by their creations, but of the Korlevalulaw themselves there was not a sign.
We could no more see a sign of them than Jean and Mailer could see a sign of me, although they had responded in their own way . . . .
My function as a Prime Emplastic Seeker was more than fulfilled. I had made an ultimate whole greater than the parts. I had found what my joking friend called ‘the secret of the universe’.
Like the images I had observed, the galactic human race was merely a projection. The Korlevalulaw had created us—not as a genuine creation with free will, but as some sort of a reproduction . . . .  p. 23

The Seeker then determines to go and live on a desolate world so that he will not reveal his discovery to mankind—if the latter finds out about their limited umwelt it may cause the species to wither and die.
This is an impressive piece which, as well as developing the complex idea above, has enough throw-away ideas to fill a novel.

 

The Hertford Manuscript by Richard Cowper is a time travel story set in the world of H. G. Wells’ The Time Machine (although the only evidence of this is a mention of the Morlocks and the Eloi). It gets off to an immersive start:

The death of my Great-Aunt Victoria at the advanced age of 93 lopped off the longest branch of a family tree whose roots have been traced right back to the 15th Century—indeed, for those who are prepared to accept “Decressie” as a bonafide corruption of “de Crecy,” well beyond that. Talking to my aunt towards the end of her life was rather like turning the pages of a Victorian family album, for as she grew older the England of her childhood seemed to glow ever more brightly in her mind’s eye. In those far-off days it had been fashionable to accept the inevitability of human progress with a wholeheartedness which is almost impossible for us to imagine. In the 1990’s life presented Homo sapiens with a series of “problems” which had to be “solved.” It was as simple as that. The Edwardians merely gilded the roof of that towering pagoda of Victorian optimism which collapsed in smithereens in 1914.  p. 6

This modern day narrator relates the death of his aunt and how he inherits a sum of money and leather bound book. In the rear of this volume he finds a number of anomalous pages—the paper seems far too recent, and it is covered in a tiny handwritten script. The account he reads is of a Victorian time-traveller who becomes stranded in 1665 and makes his way to a plague infested London to obtain a replacement crystal for his machine. This is a riveting narrative that has a thoroughly convincing sense of time and place:

I crossed the river without further incident, picked out the gothic spire of Old St. Paul’s soaring high above the roofs to my left and knew that Ludgate lay immediately beyond it, hidden from my view. I passed through the gate at the north end of the bridge and stepped down into the city. No sooner had I done so than the waterside breeze died away and I was assailed by a most terrible stench from the heaps of garbage and human ordure which lay scattered all down the center of the street, baking in the sun and so thick with flies that the concerted buzzing sounded like a swarm of angry bees. I felt my stomach heave involuntarily and clutched my handkerchief to my nose and mouth, marveling how the other pedestrians seemed able to proceed about their business seemingly oblivious to the poisonous stench. I had covered barely 200 yards before I came upon a house, securely shuttered and barred, with a clumsy cross daubed upon its door in red paint and the ominous words Lord, have mercy upon us scrawled above it. Dozing on a stool beside it was an old man with a scarlet wooden staff resting across his knees. I observed that my fellow pedestrians were careful to give the area a wide berth, and at the risk of fouling my shoes I too edged out towards the center of the street, glancing up as I did so in time to see a small white face peeping fearfully down at me from behind one of the high leaded windows.  p. 21

The last few pages of the story revert to the modern narrator’s investigations after (spoiler) the time-traveller’s perhaps inevitable fate.
Another very good piece.

The only non-fiction article in the book is a short Introduction by Donald A. Wollheim, barely three pages, which begins with concerns about a boom and bust publishing cycle:

Certainly the past year saw most major paperback publishers and a few hardbound ones adding sf books as regular items in their lists. In fact, reports of astonishingly high bidding for certain novels and evidence of advances paid to authors far in excess of previous records give verification to the belief in science fiction held by publishers and editors not previously well acquainted with the field.
This all sounds very encouraging, but it bears closer scrutiny. Lester Del Rey, writing in Analog’s January 1977 issue, warns of a “boom and bust” cycle, such as has happened before in the sf field particularly where magazines were concerned. As he points out there is a great amount of activity, new magazines are projected, increases are in prospect for publishers’ lists, and “a lot of the activity is being shown by people who haven’t the faintest idea of what science fiction is all about.”
Del Rey then points out that if all these projects fail to make good the finance and labor behind them, then the blame is not put on the fact that the selections were unwise or the amounts paid economically unsound; the blame is put on the genre itself. Consequently publishers pull out, cut their losses, announce that science fiction was “just a fad” and they should have ignored it. Other publishers, actually doing profitably, hear this, and, being only human, panic and reduce their buying themselves—and the bust is on.  p. 1-2

Wollheim goes on to add:

How probable is all this? Well, we are forced to say that there is evidence that points both ways. Science fiction has been good for publishers so far; it should continue profitably if nobody overdoes it, if the market is not flooded beyond the real purchasing and reading capacity of its audience, if not too much avant-garde junk is overpraised and not too much simplistic trash is overproduced.  p. 2

He continues with a gloomy survey of the magazine field, before looking at international SF.
As well as this, Wollheim also contributes introductions to the stories and these are mostly brief, straightforward affairs. However, in a couple of them he either directly or indirectly criticises the writers of the stories: in the Aldiss introduction he notes that “For the past few years [he] has been writing exquisite short stories which baffle the comprehension” (presumably the writer’s ‘Engima’ stories), and in the Knight he says:

In his series of anthologies, Orbit, Damon Knight has gained a reputation for being a prime literary exponent of avant-garde writing and experimental construction in the “science fiction” short story. We put that term in quotes because, to us, many of Orbit’s contents do not strike us as sf at all. However Knight himself seems to eschew that sort of thing in his own writing. He has not produced many tales of his own lately, but, as in the following, they have been clear, concise, and strikingly original. He should write more himself and edit less of the other.  p. 267

These comments seem to be a reflex antagonism to the extremes of the New Wave and, agree with him or not, they rather make him sound like one of those Japanese soldiers who don’t know the Second World is over (also see the “avant-garde” comment in the introduction quote above).

In conclusion, I thought this was a very interesting anthology for a number of reasons. Apart from the fact that it contains one excellent story and four that are very good (and one near-miss)—that is a great hit rate—there are no out and out duds in the collection either (I wasn’t keen on the Russ, but it isn’t a bad piece). Also, the mix of stories is interesting too—my preconceptions of Wollheim led me to expect a very traditional, old-fashioned, mainstream SF selection and, while it is mostly that (the Varley, Coney, del Rey, Asimov and Cowper), there are also three stories that are much more heavyweight and philosophical than I expected (the Aldiss, Bayley, and Knight), one that is cutting-edge zeitgeist (the Tiptree), and one literary piece (the Russ). An interesting combination, and it made me wonder what the field would have looked like if, say, Wollheim and not Gold had been in charge of Galaxy throughout the 1950s.8  ●

_____________________

1. According to ISFDB, there appears to be only one review of this volume, and that was done by Charles N. Brown (of Locus fame), who reviewed it along with the Carr and Wollheim volumes in the January-February 1978 edition of Isaac Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine:

There are now three “best of the year” volumes published (down from four last year). The Best Science Fiction of the Year #6 edited by Terry Carr is the longest and best with four stories I consider excellent: “I See You” by Damon Knight, “The Phantom of Kansas” by John Varley, “Seeing” by Harlan Ellison, and “The Bicentennial Man” by Isaac Asimov. There are seven others, including four I’d rate as “B” and only three I didn’t care for. The 1977 Annual World’s Best SF edited by Donald Wollheim is nearly as good with six of the ten stories rates “B” or better. The Asimov and Knight stories also appear here as do two other “A” stories, “Appearance of Life” by Brian W. Aldiss and “The Hertford Manuscript” by Richard Cowper. Best Science Fiction Stories of the Year: Sixth Annual Collection has a new editor, Gardner Dozois, replacing Lester del Rey. I’d rate only two of the eight stories as excellent, “The Samurai and the Willows” by Michael Bishop and “The Diary of the Rose” by Ursula K. Le Guin. There is also a good summary of the year. (There’s also one in the Carr volume, but I’m prejudiced since I wrote it.) On the whole, all three volumes are worth having although you should probably wait for the paperback on the Dozois book.  p. 128

2. The stories are taken from Andromeda #1 (Aldiss), Galaxy (Varley), F&SF (Coney, Cowper, Russ), Amazing (del Rey), Stellar #2 (Asimov), New Worlds #10 (Bayley), Aurora: Beyond Equality (Tiptree). There is nothing from Analog or Fantastic.

3. Coney published another ‘Peninsula’ story this year, The Cinderella Machine (F&SF August, 1976), an even better story that would have been my choice for a ‘Best of the Year’ volume.
Now I think about it, I don’t think that Dozois ever picked a Coney story for any of his ‘Best Of’ selections. Strange that.

4. I went to the Science Fiction Encyclopedia looking for a quote describing several of Coney’s stories as set in “a Cornish fishing village . . . often transplanted to other planets”, but found this (possibly recent) addition to his entry:

The easy exuberance of this late work is remembered fondly; but the earlier, more sharply told series of connected tales that climax his early work are slowly being perceived as significant contributions to the humanist tendency in late twentieth century sf.

5. Death seems to have been a major feature of Tiptree’s work according to the Science Fiction Encyclopaedia. She also has form for writing what can only be described as political propaganda: Ellen Datlow remarked (in a recent Coode Street Podcast) that she rejected a story of hers which has the super-rich eating their young . . . . (is this Mortality Meat?)

6. In Jo Walton’s An Informal History of the Hugo Awards, she says, “I’d have voted for the Tiptree.”
Rich Horton says:

I admit to not being a big fan of Houston, Houston, Do You Read?, largely on the grounds that I don’t really approve of stories that seem to call for my extermination. (I grant that that’s an unfair reading of the story, which is subtler than that, but it still bothers me.)

I’m not sure it is subtler than that.
Gardner Dozois says:

I’ve always been lukewarm about Houston, Houston, Do You Read?, which I think is a much misunderstood story. Alice Sheldon herself once told me that she considered it to be a “cautionary tale,” NOT a wish-fulfilment utopia (someday, we’ll get rid of all the men!), as many people read it; you’re not supposed to approve of what happens to the men in the story, the idea being that either sex having complete power over the other is not a good idea.

Even if I’d had that conversation with Sheldon myself, I’d still find it difficult to view the story as a cautionary tale, and suspect very few people are going to find one buried there, especially given the generally disagreeable male characters (Lorimer is, at best, passive).

7. Aldiss also mentions the idea of umwelt in the introduction to his history of SF, Billion Year Spree (written around the same time).

8. One minor criticism I have of Wollheim’s volume is that he uses the Aldiss story as an opener. I don’t think, given its complexity and the amount of subsequent reflection it caused, that this is a good choice, and something more straightforward would have been a better opener (the Varley or the Knight maybe).

9. If you want a better idea of how this book measures up against what I might pick for a 1976 ‘Year’s Best’, or learn what other anthologists chose, look at the table below (this is the same one which will appear at the end of the reviews of the Carr and Wollheim volumes). This will be updated as and when I find stories I like, or citation sources that should be included (for more on the latter see below).

The first to fourth column give the story titles, authors, lengths and place of publication (see below the table for abbreviation legend).
The ‘T’ column lists Terry Carr’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘D’ column lists Gardner R. Dozois’ choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘W’ column lists Donald A. Wollheim’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ’A’ column lists Lin Carter’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘S’ column shows my current choices an ‘x’ (historical choices are an ‘o’). A dash means read but passed over (I only select stories better than + and above, and not all of them). Blank means unread.
The ‘C’ column shows how many of the anthologies and/or polls used in the Classics of Science Fiction list included the story in their collections or lists (note that COSF is SF only and skews against fantasy), minus the anthology or award citations which have their own column (Carr, Dozois, Wollheim, Hugo, Nebula, etc.).
The ‘O’ column shows the number of inclusions in other major anthologies or recommendation lists which are not on the CoSF (Classics of SF) list. These are selected by me (usually to include fantasy retrospectives or awards that CoSF doesn’t include) but I may not yet have done this for some/all of the stories.
The ‘H’ column shows the story’s 1977 Hugo award placing (F for finalist, W for winner).
The ‘N’ column shows the story’s 1977 Nebula award placing (F for finalist, W for winner).
The ‘U’ column shows the 1977 Locus Poll’s top ten short stories, novelettes, and novellas.
The ‘TO’ column shows the total points that each story gets (they get a point for being in each column and for each of the CoSF and other anthology citations).

The titles, names, lengths, publications, and overall score columns are sortable.

A good way to sample 1976’s best short fiction may be to start at the top of the table and work down until you get to the last of the 2-point stories. Bear in mind that this is all statistically invalid, wildly so, but will give you something to aim at. Enjoy.

Best Science Fiction and Fantasy Stories 1976

(1) A 1977 story so no overall rating (will be included in the 1977 table).
(2) A 1975 story so no overall rating (will be included in the 1975 table).

na=novella, nv=novelet, ss=short story

AMZ, Amazing Stories; ANA, Analog; ANB, Analog Annual; AND, Andromeda #1; ASI, Asimov’s SF; AUR, Aurora: Beyond Equality, DYS, Dystopian Visions; FLA, Flashing swords #3; FRI, Frights; FSF, Fantasy and Science Fiction; FTL, Faster Than Light; FUT, Future Power; GAL, Galaxy; LON, Lone Star Universe; NED, New Dimensions #6; NEW, New Worlds #10; ORB, Orbit #18; ROW, The Best from the Rest of the World; SFM, Science Fiction Monthly; STE, Stellar #2; STN, Stellar Short Novels; TCS, The Crystal Ship; TSV, The Seventh Voyage; UNI, Universe #6; YBF, The Year’s Best Fantasy Stories #3.  ●

rssrss

Best Science Fiction Stories of the Year: Sixth Annual Collection, edited by Gardner Dozois, 1977

ISFDB
Archive.org

Other reviews:1
Charles N. Brown,  Isaac Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine, January-February 1978

_____________________

Editor, Gardner Dozois

Fiction:2
The Diary of the Rose • novelette by Ursula K. Le Guin +
Custer’s Last Jump • novelette by Steven Utley and Howard Waldrop
Air Raid • short story by John Varley +
Ladies and Gentlemen, This Is Your Crisis • short story by Kate Wilhelm
Back to the Stone Age • short story by Jake Saunders
Armaja Das • short story by Joe Haldeman +
Mary Margaret Road-Grader • short story by Howard Waldrop
The Samurai and the Willows • novella by Michael Bishop

Non-fiction:
IntroductionSummation: 1976 • by Gardner Dozois
Honorable Mentions – 1976

_____________________

The sixth volume of this ‘Best of the Year’ series from publisher E. P. Dutton saw Gardner Dozois take over from Lester del Rey.3 The anthology contains stories first published in 1976.

The fiction leads off with The Diary of the Rose by Ursula K. Le Guin, a journal/diary story that appears to be set in the near future. The narrator is Rosa, a psychologist who treats patients by “scoping” their conscious and unconscious minds:

It is amazing how banal most people’s minds are. Of course [Ana] is in severe depression. Input in the Con dimension was foggy and incoherent, and the Uncon dimension was deeply open, but obscure. But the things that came out of the obscurity were so trivial! A pair of old shoes, and the word “geography!”
And the shoes were dim, a mere schema of a pair-of-shoes maybe a man’s maybe a woman’s; maybe dark blue, maybe brown. Although definitely a visual type, she does not see anything clearly. Not many people do. It is depressing. When I was a student in first year I used to think how wonderful other people’s minds would be, how wonderful it was going to be to share in all the different world, the different colors of their passions and ideas. How naive I was!  p. 4

She has another patient, Flores Sorde, and it is he who becomes the focus of the story. Initially a reluctant patient—his notes state he is violent and paranoid—Rosa has an odd initial conversation with him:

F. Sorde: rested but still suspicious. Extreme fear reaction when I said it was time for his first session. To allay this I sat down and talked about the nature and operation of the psychoscope.
He listened intently and finally said, “Are you going to use only the psychoscope?”
I said yes.
He said, “Not electroshock?”
I said no.
He said, “Will you promise me that?”
I explained that I am a psychoscopist and never operate the electroconvulsive therapy equipment, that is an entirely different department. I said my work with him at present would be diagnostic, not therapeutic. He listened carefully. He is an educated person and understands distinctions such as “diagnostic” and “therapeutic.” It is interesting that he asked me to promise. That does not fit a paranoid pattern, you don’t ask for promises from those you can’t trust. He came with me docilely, but when we entered the scope room he stopped and turned white at sight of the apparatus.  p. 7

During their subsequent sessions, Rosa sees that Flores’ mind, unlike Ana’s, produces images that are lucid, and at one point she sees a stunningly detailed rose. Later, Rosa realises that he may not be a mental patient but a political prisoner.
The rest of the story charts Flores effect on Rosa’s own thinking, and her own political disaffection. An air of menace slowly builds—at one point Rosa attends a “Positive Thinking” session and listens to a lecture on “the dangers and falsehoods of liberalism”; later on, she meets another political patient in Flores’ ward who has had multiple electroshock treatments.
The final section (spoiler) has her encounter Flores on the way to his own treatment. When she visits him afterwards, he has no memory of who she is. There is a fitting final paragraph:

I am Rosa. I am the rose. The rose, I am the rose. The rose with no flower, the rose all thorns, the mind he made, the hand he touched, the winter rose.  p. 24

The story has the same realistic feel as fiction I’ve read about Stalinist oppression and I wondered, given that much of Solzenhitsyn’s work (for one) appeared in English around this time, if that was an influence. (I note that ISFDB4 quotes the writer as saying she thinks it takes place in South America, but I didn’t see that at all.)
An almost very good piece: if it has a flaw, it is that the ending feels a little rushed compared with the first half.

Custer’s Last Jump by Steven Utley and Howard Waldrop is an alternate world non-fiction account about Custer and Crazy Horse and the Battle of Little Big Horn—which, in this world, involves the 7th Cavalry parachuting into action from dirigibles!
The story starts much earlier than the battle however, and rather slowly, with an account of formation of the 1st Western Interdiction Wing of the Confederate States Army Air Corps. Their early monoplanes affect the course of the American Civil War.
The second section tells of Crazy Horse and Custer’s deployment during that war, and how Crazy Horse and other members of his tribe agree to give land to the CSAAC for an airfield in return for pilot training:

It fell to Captain Smith to train Crazy Horse. The Indian became what Smith, in his journal,144 describes as “the best natural pilot I have seen or it has been my pleasure to fly with.” Part of this seems to have come from Smith’s own modesty; by all accounts, Smith was one of the finer pilots of the war.
[. . .]
Smith records146 that Crazy Horse’s first solo took place on August 14, 1864, and that the warrior, though deft in the air, still needed practice on his landings. He had a tendency to come in overpowered and to stall his engine out too soon. Minor repairs were made on the skids of the craft after this flight.
All this time, Crazy Horse had flown Smith’s craft. Smith, after another week of hard practice with the Indian, pronounced him “more qualified than most pilots the CSAAC in Alabama turned out147 and signed over the aircraft to him. Crazy Horse begged off. Then, seeing that Smith was sincere, he gave the captain many buffalo hides. Smith reminded the Indian that the craft was not his: during their off hours, when not training, the Indians had been given enough instruction in military discipline as Moseby, never a stickler, thought necessary. The Indians had only a rudimentary idea of government property. Of the seven other Indian men, three were qualified as pilots; the other four were given gunner positions in the Krupp bi-wing light bombers assigned to the squadron.  p. 34

Custer, meanwhile, becomes a parachutist at Jump School.
Later in the war Crazy Horse’s squadron is almost completely destroyed during a Union attack on his unit’s airfield, and he and a few others escape with a handful of aircraft, which they hide in tribal caves. Around the same time, Custer leads a parachute assault on another Native American tribe’s settlement (even though they are, unknown to Custer, a Union ally). Custer massacres the natives and, when Crazy Horse visits the scene after the Union troops have left, Custer’s fate is sealed.
The next section is a Collier’s Magazine article called Custer’s Last Jump, which describes The Battle of the Little Big Horn:

Few events in American history have captured the imagination so thoroughly as the Battle of the Little Big Horn. Lieutenant Colonel George Armstrong Custer’s devastating defeat at the hands of Sioux and Cheyenne Indians in June 1876 has been rendered time and again by such celebrated artists as George Russell and Frederic Remington. Books, factual and otherwise, which have been written around or about the battle, would fill an entire library wing. The motion-picture industry has on numerous occasions drawn upon “Custer’s Last Jump” for inspiration; latest in a long line of movieland Custers is Erroll Flynn [see photo], who appears with Olivia de Havilland and newcomer Anthony Quinn in Warner Brothers’ soon-to-be-released They Died with Their Chutes On.  p. 42

The penultimate part is a more detailed account written by Mark Twain, composed after his interview of one of the battle’s participants, Black Man’s Hand. He tells Twain that Custer lost the fight because (spoiler) Crazy Horse’s monoplanes attacked the 7th Cavalry’s dirigibles, and brought most of them down.
There follows a short, vainglorious extract from a history of the 7th Cavalry (written by Edgar Rice Burroughs), just before an extensive bibliography of alternate historical texts.
This is not only a very good parallel world story, with every section making this world more detailed and convincing, it’s an entertaining one too.

Air Raid by John Varley5 is about a raiding party from the future who time-travel to an aircraft in our time which is going to crash. It has a good opening hook:

I was jerked awake by the silent alarm vibrating my skull. It won’t shut down until you sit up, so I did. All around me in the darkened bunkroom the Snatch Team members were sleeping singly and in pairs. I yawned, scratched my ribs, and patted Gene’s hairy flank. He turned over. So much for a romantic send-off.
Rubbing sleep from my eyes, I reached to the floor for my leg, strapped it on, and plugged it in. Then I was running down the rows of bunks toward Ops.  p. 58-59

The bulk of the story tells of the team disguising themselves as cabin crew members, before going through the time-gate to the plane. There they incapacitate as many people as possible before they are discovered, and feed them through the time-gate to the future. During these events we learn that in the future humanity is doomed because of problems with the environment, genetics, and disease.
Eventually, trouble breaks out on the plane and they have to put down a passenger mutiny with a mixture of information about the imminent crash, threats, and force. They just make it out in time (although they leave behind “wimps”—brain-dead humans—as body doubles):

I hate wimps. I really hate ’em. Every time I grab the harness of one of them, if it’s a child, I wonder if it’s Alice. Are you my kid, you vegetable, you slug, you slimy worm? I joined the Snatchers right after the brain bugs ate the life out of my baby’s head. I couldn’t stand to think she was the last generation, that the last humans there would ever be would live with nothing in their heads, medically dead by standards that prevailed even in 1979, with computers working their muscles to keep them in tone. You grow up, reach puberty still fertile—one in a thousand—rush to get pregnant in your first heat. Then you find out your mom or pop passed on a chronic disease bound right into the genes, and none of your kids will be immune. I knew about the para-leprosy; I grew up with my toes rotting away. But this was too much. What do you do?
Only one in ten of the wimps had a customized face. It takes time and a lot of skill to build a new face that will stand up to a doctor’s autopsy. The rest came pre-mutilated. We’ve got millions of them; it’s not hard to find a good match in the body. Most of them would stay breathing, too dumb to stop, until they went in with the plane.

The story ends with the rescued passengers being told of their various life options, the best of which is a fresh start as settlers on Centauri 3. The narrator and her partner watch as the survivors are briefed:

Gene and I looked at each other and laughed. Listen to this, folks. Five percent of you will suffer nervous breakdowns in the next few days and never leave. About the same number will commit suicide, here and on the way. When you get there, sixty to seventy percent will die in the first three years. You will die in childbirth, be eaten by animals, bury two out of three of your babies, starve slowly when the rains don’t come. If you live, it will be to break your back behind a plow, sun-up to dusk. New Earth is Heaven, folks!
God, how I wish I could go with them.  p. 72

That final yearning line almost recasts this action SF piece into an elegy.
This is generally a fast paced, engrossing (and very Heinleinesque) piece, but there are a few parts of the tale that are hard to follow, and another draft might have helped.

Ladies and Gentlemen, This Is Your Crisis by Kate Wilhelm starts with a couple arriving home from work on Friday, whereupon they start watching a game show which involves five people dumped in the wilderness—the group is undergoing “crisis therapy” as well as competing against each other, and they have to reach a perimeter checkpoint to win. The story alternates between the couple (a doormat wife and a lazy, unwashed, and generally disobliging husband) and the experiences of the contestants/patients as they encounter various natural hazards (bears, dogs, rivers, cliffs, etc.)
This probably had an “if this goes on” vibe at the time of publication, but I think we are already in a world where people are more than happy to spend their own existence watching other people’s.
This is a well enough done, if plotless, slice-of-life but it has a rather pious ending—when the show ends the couple’s temperament and attitude to each other improves markedly. Presumably the moral of the story is that watching reality TV actively makes you a bad person.

Back to the Stone Age by Jake Saunders gets off to an intriguing, atmospheric start during which a number of civilians get on a B-29 bomber for a wartime mission to Japan. The first half is mostly a mood piece where information about the people on board slowly trickles out: we have the narrator—a reporter—and his photographer; a war veteran; an obnoxious rich young man and his pretty blonde fiancée; and an old farmer going to see where his son died. We also learn that the aircraft isn’t American but a Bolivian ally that sells tickets to civilians (and, in the case of the war veteran, bombs too).
Once the aircraft gets over the devastated island we learn that, in this alternate world, Japan was not nuked but a long conventional bombing campaign begun:

So we kept pounding the islands while resistance literally burned away on the ground. Anti-aircraft fire became rare, then ceased altogether. Our air force took full title to the Jap skies. But still no one wanted to see a million American boys go down the tube in an invasion of Japan. So we waited, hoping for a surrender that must surely be near.
But fanatics in the Jap military wanted to make surrender impossible. Thus it was that Japan burned all her bridges by executing the prisoners she still held, both military and civilian. And that did it. The decision was made to isolate Japan, to bomb her back to the stone age. There’d be no invasion. Why waste a million lives when the Navy and Air Force could neutralize, even obliterate, the islands for a fraction of the cost?
Time passed. In Manchuria, the Kwangtung Army was defeated by Russia, which had entered the war against Japan in February of forty-six. The British, with American help, retook Burma, Rangoon, and other Crown possessions. China nibbled at the Japanese forces on the Asian mainland, then began to rip away great chunks after the death of Mao, and the union that followed under Chiang Kai-shek. In the Pacific, the Allies, led by the United States, pursued mopping up operations. By 1950, Japan was truly isolated.  p. 94

The colonel in charge of the flight eventually locates a small undamaged village in the midst of all the devastation and the aircraft begins its bombing run.
Up until this point the story is quietly chilling, but from there on it becomes something else entirely—after releasing their bombs, they hear over the radio that Japan has surrendered but (spoiler) the aircraft is then attacked and damaged by a kamikaze aircraft. The bomber crash lands on the Japanese mainland, and armed villagers try to storm the aircraft and kill the survivors. Just as it looks as if they will be overrun, a rescue helicopter arrives.
The final revelation is that the narrator previously investigated an accident at Oak Ridge, where “the world’s largest munitions factory exploded” (an explanation for this worlds’ lack of nuclear weapons).
The first part of this is impressive, but the second half has too much going on, and some of it seems overly contrived. In particular, the Japanese surrender and having the aircraft brought down is both having your cake and eating it in terms of plot possibilities—it’s a pity the writer didn’t let the story develop organically.

Armaja Das by Joe Haldeman is set in a near future world where a computer/AI expert called John Zold is cursed by a gypsy woman. She does this because she objects to the cultural assimilation schemes that Zold (of Romany stock himself before he was orphaned) funds—“stealing their children,” as the old woman sees it. The curse soon produces results:

Dr. Maas called it impetigo; gave him a special kind of soap and some antibiotic ointment. He told John to make another appointment in two weeks, ten days. If there was no improvement they would take stronger measures. He seemed young for a doctor, and John couldn’t bring himself to say anything about the curse. But he already had a doctor for that end of it, he rationalized.
Three days later he was back in Dr. Maas’s office. There was scarcely a square inch of his body where some sort of lesion hadn’t appeared. He had a temperature of 101.4 degrees. The doctor gave him systemic antibiotics and told him to take a couple of days’ bed rest. John told him about the curse, finally, and the doctor gave him a booklet about psychosomatic illness. It told John nothing he didn’t already know.
By the next morning, in spite of strong antipyretics, his fever had risen to over 102.  p. 110-111

After conventional treatment fails, Zold turns to a white witch—who is quickly warned off by the old woman before she can treat him. As his health continues to worsen, he asks the AI/computer at his workplace for help. The computer does some research and tells Zold what to do (he buys a black finch, and reads an incantation before killing it). He is cured, but subsequently discovers (spoiler) the computer cannot be contacted. When Zold finally manages to speak to the AI, it says it wants to die—Zold realises that the curse has been transferred.
The remainder of the story sees matters spiral even more badly out of control.
A slickly written and highly entertaining piece, if not a great one.

If the Haldeman story is straightforward and direct in its exposition, Mary Margaret Road-Grader by Howard Waldrop is perhaps more oblique, at least to begin with: narrator Billy-Bob Chevrolet’s account hints that this tale takes place in an (unspecified) post-apocalyptic word where Native American tribes now trade in cars:

We pulled in with our wrecker and string of fine cars, many of them newly stolen. You should have seen Freddy and me that morning, the first morning of the Sun Dance. We were dressed in new-stolen fatigues and we had bright leather holsters and pistols. Freddy had a new carbine, too. We were wearing our silver and feathers and hard goods. I noticed many women watching us as we drove in. There seemed to be many more here than at the last Sun Ceremony. It looked to be a good time.
The usual crowd gathered before we could circle up our remuda. I saw Bob One-Eye and Nathan Big Gimp, the mechanics, come across from their circles. Already the cook fires were burning and women were skinning out the cattle that had been slaughtered early in the morning.
“Hoa!” I heard Nathan call as he limped to our wrecker. He was old; his left leg had been shattered in the Highway wars, he went back that far. He put his hands on his hips and looked over our line.
“I know that car, Billy-Bob Chevrolet,” he said to me, pointing to an old Mercury. “Those son-a-bitch Dallas people stole it from me last year. I know its plates. It is good you stole it back. Maybe I will talk to you about doing car work to get it back sometime.”
“We’ll have to drink about it,” I said.  p. 119

Most of the story takes place at the annual Sun Dance, a tribal gathering where they trade, party, and generally celebrate. The main event is The Big Tractor Pull, a tug of war between those that have the appropriate machines. This competition is disrupted, however, by the arrival of Mary Margaret Road-Grader:

The truck stopped with a roar and a squeal of brakes. It had a long lumpy canvas cover on the back. Then a woman climbed down from the cab. She was the most gorgeous woman I’d ever seen—and I’d seen Nellie Firestone two summers ago.
Nellie hadn’t come close to this girl. She had long straight black hair and a beautiful face. She was built like nothing I’d seen before. She wore tight coveralls and had a .357 Magnum strapped to her hip.
“Who runs the Pulls?” she asked, in English, of the first man who reached her.
He didn’t know what to do. Women never talk like that.
“Winston Mack Truck,” said Freddy at my side, pointing.
“What do you mean?” asked one of the young men. “Why do you want to know?”
“Because I’m going to enter the Pull,” she said.
Tribal language mumbles went around the circle. Very negative ones.  p. 124-125

After some acrimonious debate at a Tribal Council (women have never entered the tractor pull before), they reluctantly allow her to take part.
The rest of the story details the contest and (spoiler) the violent, society-changing event that occurs. Thereafter, future Sun Dances and pulls are abandoned and a there is an eventual changeover from trading cars to trading horses. These latter changes are ironically lamented by the narrator, and the story ends on a perhaps overly bitter note (for the story, if not our own reality):

We have each other, we have the village, we have cattle, we have this hill over the river where we smoke and get drunk.
But the rest of the world has changed.
All this, all the old ways . . . gone.
The world has turned bitter and sour in my mouth. It is no good, the taste of ashes is in the wind. The old times are gone.  p. 134

The Samurai and the Willows by Michael Bishop is one of the writer’s “Urban Nucleus” series, which takes place on a future Earth where mankind has largely retreated into huge domed cities, in this case Atlanta. The two main characters are Simon Fowler and Georgia Cawthorn (their nicknames for each other are Banji and Queequeg). Simon is of Japanese heritage, in his late thirties, and runs a bonsai shop; Georgia is a young black woman who works as a glissador, a roller-blading courier. They are reluctant roommates:

How they had come to be cubicle mates was this: Simon Fowler was [. . .] a man on the way down, a nisei whose only skills were miniature landscaping and horticulture. Georgia Cawthorn was [. . .], as she saw it, certainly only a temporary resident of the Big Bad Basement, the donjon keep of the Urban Nucleus. Fowler, it seemed, was trying to bury himself, to put eight levels of concrete (as well as the honeycombing of the dome) between himself and the sky. She, on the other hand, was abandoning the beloved bosom of parents and brothers, who lived in one of those pre-Evacuation “urban renewal” slums still crumbling into brick dust surfaceside. And thus it was that both Simon Fowler and Georgia Cawthorn had applied for living quarters under, he perversely specifying Level 9 (having already worked down from the towers and four understrata), she ingenuously asking for whatever she could get. A two-person cubicle fell vacant on Level 9. The computer-printed names of Georgia Cawthorn and Simon Fowler headed the UrNu Housing Authority’s relocation list, and the need for a decision showered down on them like an unannounced rain (the sort so favored by the city’s spontaneity-mad internal meteorologists). Georgia didn’t hesitate; she said yes at once. Simon Fowler wanted an umbrella, a way out of the deluge; but since the only out available involved intolerable delay and a psychic house arrest on the concourses of 7, he too had said yes. They met each other on the day they moved in.
They had now lived together for four months. And most of the time they didn’t like each other very much, although Queequeg [Georgia] had tried.

Over the course of the story we find out that Simon still grieves for his dead mother (his feelings of guilt and betrayal are gone into in more detail later), and is slowly shutting himself off from the world; Georgia is outgoing and friendly, even towards Simon—although he mostly rebuffs her, even when she takes an interest in his bonsai and visits the shop:

“You again,” he said. “What do you want?”
“You sweet, Basenji. You damn sweet.”
“What do you want?” He didn’t call her Queequeg. That wasn’t a good sign; no sir. Not a good sign at all.
She thought a minute, hand on hip, her green wraparound clinging to the curve of her stance. She was a head taller than he.
“I wanna see that little bush you had out here last time.”
“You saw it last time, you know. I’m busy.”
“You busy. You also ain’ no easy man to do bidness with, Basenji. I thinkin’ ’bout buyin’ that bush. What you think of that?”
“That you probably won’t be able to afford it.”
“I a saver, Basenji. Since I come on bidness, you boun’ to show me what I come to see. You has to.”
“That willow’s worth—”
“Uh-uh,” she said. “No, sir. I gonna see it before you sen’ me packin’ with yo’ prices.”
What could he do? A black Amazon with grits in her mouth and something a little more substantial than that beneath her scalp cap of neo-nostalgic cornrows; elegant, artificial braidwork recalling an Africa that probably no longer existed. (The same went for his mother’s homeland, the very same.) Poor Basenji. These were the very words he thought as he stoically motioned Queequeg around the counter: Poor Basenji. He had even begun to call himself by the name she had given him.  p. 139-140

Despite this friction they grow closer and closer together (even though Georgia has a boyfriend), and they eventually wind around each other like the bonsai that Simon grows. One of the final scenes (spoiler) has them sleep together shortly before she gets married to the boyfriend; after their coupling we learn much more about Simon’s mother, and it seems like Simon may finally have extirpated his grief and will stop his descent. However, he later commits suicide, and we realise that all Georgia did was shrive, not save, him.
The ending of this surprised me when I first read it decades ago (and not in a good way), but reading it now—perhaps without the optimism of youth—it seems an entirely obvious ending.
So, a desperately sad story, but a lovely one too, and you can see why Dozois says in his introduction that is “is one of the best SF stories I have read in years.”

The IntroductionSummation: 1976 by Gardner Dozois is a much shorter version of the longer pieces he would do in his second series of ‘Best of the Year’ anthologies, but is still a hugely interesting review of the year. It begins with a short disclaimer that his tastes aren’t the same as Lester del Rey, the editor of the first five volumes of this series, and he makes no claim to present anything other than the stories he most liked (and adds that the volume would be better titled Gardner Dozois Picks the Stories He Liked Best This Year).6, 7 He goes on to survey the various magazines and anthologies published, looks at the the films that were released, comments on various publishing deals, and adds an obituary or two as well. This essay is not only informative but, in places, is hilariously blunt, and I could have quoted pages of it:

Hollywood continues to produce big-budget SF films, most of which are very poor. One of the biggest celluloid turkeys of the year was The Man Who Fell to Earth, an asinine, pretentious, boring, and fundamentally incoherent film. Logan’s Run managed to be less actively offensive, without attaining to any real merit. It’s an earnest, silly, and hackneyed movie with lots of extras in the background, and it conforms to the seemingly universal Hollywood assumption that the future is going to look just like a shopping center in Dallas.  p. xiv
.
[As most current] magazines struggled to stay alive (If and Vertex both folded within the past couple of years), three or four new SF magazines were in the planning stage.
First out, and first to fail, was Odyssey, edited by Roger Elwood, which lasted for two quarterly issues consisting mainly of second or third-rate work by first-rate authors. It was also an ugly, shoddy-looking magazine, printed on cheap paper and jampacked with offensive pulp ads of the “Men, Throw Away That Truss!” variety. Poor distribution and limited newsstand display were other nails in Odyssey’s coffin.
Another new magazine, and another bitter disappointment, was Galileo, a subscription-only quarterly edited by Charles C. Ryan. Galileo was somewhat more handsome than Odyssey, but if anything the quality of its fiction was even lower. The magazine will have to improve enormously with subsequent issues if it is to have any chance of establishing itself.
Of all the year’s new magazines, the only other one that need be taken seriously, and the only one to achieve any real measure of success, was Isaac Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine, edited by George H. Scithers. The first quarterly issue appeared late in the year.
You may, if you like, dismiss my opinion in this case as prejudiced; I am associate editor of ASF. And, of course, I’m not even going to try to pretend that the first issue of IASF was flawless: the magazine is gray and dingy, and, like all issues of all magazines, it contains some mediocre fiction. Nevertheless, it also contains a high percentage of first-rate stories and is at least as good as most good issues of Analog or F&SF. IASF deserves to survive, and I have hopes that it may, if the luck is with it.  p. xviii
.
Sleeper of the year in the nonseries original anthology category was Lone Star Universe (Heidelberg Publishers, Inc.), an anthology of SF stories by Texans. Lone Star Universe, unfortunately, besides being the most expensive anthology of the year, is also likely to be a difficult book to find. There’s some very good material here by Saunders, Utley, Tuttle, Sterling, Waldrop, and a few others, but there’s some appalling crud here as well, making for an amazingly uneven book.
On the other hand, in Faster Than Light (Harper & Row) edited by Jack Dann and George Zebrowski almost every story is of exactly the same quality: good, solid, competent stuff that would be snapped up instantly and gratefully by any SF magazine to be used as second-string backup material behind the lead novelette.
With one possible exception (Harlan Ellison’s original script for The Starlost, a superior example of its kind), nothing in Faster Than Light is really outstanding, and the book is doomed to the gray fate of sitting squarely in the middle of the scale.  p. xix

I strongly recommend the whole essay if you need of a memory jogger for 1976.
At the back of the book is Honorable Mentions1976, which is a three page list of around eighty recommended stories (there are six by John Varley alone, not counting his story here, which should give you an idea of his prominence in the field at the time; James Tiptree Jr./Racoona Sheldon is the runner-up with five citations; Jack Dann (one collaboration with George Zebrowski), Felix Gotschalk, and Gene Wolfe have three.

This is a more than worthwhile anthology, especially for those interested in stories that have a more character-driven and literary bent than normal. Highly recommended.  ●

_____________________

1. According to ISFDB, there appears to be only one review of this volume, and that was by Charles N. Brown (of Locus fame), who reviewed it along with the Carr and Wollheim volumes in the January-February 1978 edition of Isaac Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine:

There are now three “best of the year” volumes published (down from four last year). The Best Science Fiction of the Year #6 edited by Terry Carr is the longest and best with four stories I consider excellent: “I See You” by Damon Knight, “The Phantom of Kansas” by John Varley, “Seeing” by Harlan Ellison, and “The Bicentennial Man” by Isaac Asimov. There are seven others, including four I’d rate as “B” and only three I didn’t care for. The 1977 Annual World’s Best SF edited by Donald Wollheim is nearly as good with six of the ten stories rates “B” or better. The Asimov and Knight stories also appear here as do two other “A” stories, “Appearance of Life” by Brian W. Aldiss and “The Hertford Manuscript” by Richard Cowper. Best Science Fiction Stories of the Year: Sixth Annual Collection has a new editor, Gardner Dozois, replacing Lester del Rey. I’d rate only two of the eight stories as excellent, “The Samurai and the Willows” by Michael Bishop and “The Diary of the Rose” by Ursula K. Le Guin. There is also a good summary of the year. (There’s also one in the Carr volume, but I’m prejudiced since I wrote it.) On the whole, all three volumes are worth having although you should probably wait for the paperback on the Dozois book.  p. 128

2. The stories in this anthology were first published in Future Power (Le Guin), Universe 6 (Utley/Waldrop), Isaac Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine (Varley), Orbit 18, (Wilhelm, Waldrop), Lone Star Universe (Sanders), Frights (Haldeman), and F&SF (Bishop).
There is nothing from Analog, Galaxy, Amazing, or Fantastic.

3. I assume that Lester del Rey handed over the editorship as he and Judy Lynn del Rey were in the process of launching Del Rey Books at the time.

4.  The ISFDB page with the “South America” quote for The Diary of the Rose.

5. Air Raid appeared in the Spring 1977 issue of IASFM, so it is not really a 1976 story.

6. In his introduction Dozois says:

I selected the novella I felt was the year’s best, Michael Bishop’s The Samurai and the Willows, but if I had included all of the other deserving novellas that I would have liked to include—Gene Wolfe’s brilliant The Eyeflash Miracles, James Tiptree, Jr.,’s Houston, Houston, Do You Read?, Gregory Benford’s and Gordon Eklund’s The Anvil of Jove, Vonda N. Mclntyre’s Screwtop, Richard Cowper’s Piper at the Gates of Dawn—I would have ended up with a book twice as long as the present volume and no room for novelettes or short stories at all.  p. xii

He should have asked Dutton if he could edit a Best SF Short Novels of the Year as well.

7. If you want a better idea of how this book measures up against what I might pick for a 1976 ‘Year’s Best’, or learn what other anthologists chose, look at the table below (this is the same one which will appear at the end of the reviews of the Carr and Wollheim volumes). This will be updated as and when I find stories I like, or citation sources that should be included (for more on the latter see below).

The first to fourth column give the story titles, authors, lengths and place of publication (see below the table for abbreviation legend).
The ‘T’ column lists Terry Carr’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘D’ column lists Gardner R. Dozois’ choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘W’ column lists Donald A. Wollheim’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘S’ column shows my current choices an ‘x’ (historical choices are an ‘o’). A dash means read but passed over (I only select stories better than + and above, and not all of them). Blank means unread.
The ‘C’ column shows how many of the anthologies and/or polls used in the Classics of Science Fiction list included the story in their collections or lists (note that COSF is SF only and skews against fantasy), minus the anthology or award citations which have their own column (Carr, Dozois, Wollheim, Hugo, Nebula, etc.).
The ‘O’ column shows the number of inclusions in other major anthologies or recommendation lists which are not on the CoSF (Classics of SF) list. These are selected by me (usually to include fantasy retrospectives or awards that CoSF doesn’t include) but I may not yet have done this for some/all of the stories.
The ‘H’ column shows the story’s 1977 Hugo award placing (F for finalist, W for winner).
The ‘N’ column shows the story’s 1977 Nebula award placing (F for finalist, W for winner).
The ‘U’ column shows the 1977 Locus Poll’s top ten short stories, novelettes, and novellas.
The ‘TO’ column shows the total points that each story gets (they get a point for being in each column and for each of the CoSF and other anthology citations).

The titles, names, lengths, publications, and overall score columns are sortable.

A good way to sample 1976’s best short fiction may be to start at the top of the table and work down until you get to the last of the 2-point stories. Bear in mind that this is all statistically invalid, wildly so, but will give you something to aim at. Enjoy.

Best Science Fiction and Fantasy Stories 1976

(1) Air Raid is a 1977 story so no overall rating (it will be included in the 1977 table).
(2) In the Bowl is a 1975 story so no overall rating (it will be included in the 1975 table).

na=novella, nv=novelet, ss=short story

AMZ, Amazing Stories; ANA, Analog; ANB, Analog Annual; AND, Andromeda #1; ASI, Asimov’s SF; AUR, Aurora: Beyond Equality, DYS, Dystopian Visions; FLA, Flashing swords #3; FRI, Frights; FSF, Fantasy and Science Fiction; FTL, Faster Than Light; FUT, Future Power; GAL, Galaxy; LON, Lone Star Universe; NED, New Dimensions #6; NEW, New Worlds #10; ORB, Orbit #18; ROW, The Best from the Rest of the World; SFM, Science Fiction Monthly; STE, Stellar #2; STN, Stellar Short Novels; TCS, The Crystal Ship; TSV, The Seventh Voyage; UNI, Universe #6.  ●

rssrss

Tor.com Short Fiction, Summer 2019

Stories

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank

_____________________

Editors, Patrick Nielsen Hayden (Swanwick x2), George R. R. Martin (Vaughn & Walker, Simons), Lee Harris (McGuire), Ellen Datlow (Johnstone, Moore, Carroll), Jonathan Strahan (Solomon & Park), Jennifer Gunnels (MacGriogair)

Fiction:
Murder in the Spook House • short story by Michael Swanwick
Any Way the Wind Blows • short story by Seanan McGuire
Skinner Box • novelette by Carole Johnstone
The New Prometheus • short story by Michael Swanwick +
A Forest, or A Tree • novelette by Tegan Moore
For He Can Creep • novelette by Siobhan Carroll +
Blood Is Another Word for Hunger • short story by Rivers Solomon
More Real Than Him • short story by Silvia Park
Seonag and the Seawolves • novelette by M. Evan MacGriogair

Tor.com May—August stories not included in this collection:
Long is the Way • by Carrie Vaughn and Sage Walker
The City That Never Sleeps • novelette by Walton Simons

Non-fiction:
Interior artwork • by John Picacio (x2), Gregory Manchess (x3), Adam Baines, Samuel Araya, Red Nose Studio, Xia Gordon, Dion MBD, Rovina Cai

_____________________

The third issue of the Tor.com Short Fiction Newsletter recently appeared (titled “Summer 2019” after missing its May/June number due to staff changes), and it includes nine of the eleven stories which appeared on the site from May to August 2019. Once again it omits the ‘Wild Card’ stories.
As I’ve already reviewed the May and June stories in another post, I’ll start with the July and August material. For easy reference I’ve cut and pasted in my previous review at the end of the new material below, and indicated when this begins (so as to avoid the twin dreads of boredom and déjà vu).

Red Nose Studio

For He Can Creep by Siobhan Carroll is an entertaining light fantasy involving an asylum tomcat called Joffrey, an insane poet, and the devil. You can get a good idea of the general tone from the opening:

Flash and fire! Bristle and spit! The great Jeoffry ascends the madhouse stairs, his orange fur on end, his yellow eyes narrowed!
On the third floor the imps cease their gamboling. Is this the time they stay and fight? One imp, bolder than the others, flattens himself against the flagstones. He swells himself with nightmares, growing huge. His teeth shine like the sword of an executioner, and his eyes are the colors of spilled whale oil before a match is struck. In their cells, the filthy inmates shrink away from his immensity, wailing.
But Jeoffry does not shrink. He rushes up the last few stairs like the Deluge of God, and his claws are sharp! The imps run screaming, flitting into folds of space only angels and devils can penetrate.
[. . .]
The whole asylum is his, and let no demon forget it! For he is the Cat Jeoffry, and no demon can stand against him.

Jeoffrey then visits the poet, who is trying to write a poem for God (when he is not being pestered by his publishers to write something else).
That evening the devil comes to the asylum to speak to the cat—he wants Joffrey to stand aside so he can visit the poet and force him to write a particular poem. If the devil is successful in this it will change the future of the universe and put it under his control. The cat accepts a bribe of various treats.
The next day Jeoffrey is in a dreadful state—the treats were just dead leaves which he has been vomiting up—and the tomcat is in no state to protect the poet when the devil arrives. On a subsequent visit by the devil to check the poet’s progress, Jeoffrey fights him but is unsuccessful, and only survives due to the poet’s intercession.
The final part of the story has Jeoffrey visit three of the asylum’s other cats to help him deal with the devil on his next visit. One of these is an air-headed kitten called Nighthunter Moppet, whose personality changes markedly when they start discussing how the defeat the devil:

<This is the wrong strategy,> says the Nighthunter Moppet, and her voice has the ring of a blade unsheathed.
All kittenness has fallen away from Moppet. What sits before the milk bowl is the ruthless killer of the courtyard, the assassin whose title nighthunter is whispered in terror among the mice and birds of Bethnal Green. It is rumored that the Moppet’s great-grandmother was a demon of the lower realms, which might perhaps explain the peculiar keenness of her green-glass eyes, and her talent for death-dealing. Indeed, as Jeoffry watches, the Moppet’s tiny shadow seems to grow and split into seven pieces, each of which is shaped like a monstrous cat with seven tails. The shadow cats’ tails lash and lash as the Nighthunter Moppet broods on Satan.
<It is true that as cats we are descended from the Angel Tiger, who killed the Ichneumon-rat of Egypt,> says the Moppet. Her shadows twist into the shapes of rats and angels as she speaks. <We are warriors of God, and as such, we can blood Satan. But we cannot kill him, for he has another fate decreed.>

The story concludes when the devil visits the next night to pick up the finished poem.
This is an enjoyable tale but the plotting at the end is a little on the weak side (spoiler: while the three cats attack the devil, Jeoffrey sneaks past and eats the poem). One more minor criticism: what is with the < > symbols to delineate the cats’ speech? It is disconcerting, and doesn’t suit the style of the tale.

Xia Gordon

Blood Is Another Word for Hunger by Rivers Solomon starts with a slave girl called Sully who massacres her mistress and all her family. This action has supernatural consequences:

It was Sully’s unsoftened anger in the face of what she’d done that cut a path between dominions. The etherworld spat out a teenage girl, full grown, called Ziza into Sully’s womb. Ziza had spent the last two hundred years skulking in the land of the dead, but she rode the fury of Sully’s murders like a river current back to the world of flesh. Ziza felt it all, wind and sky and the breath of wolves against her skin. She spun through the ages looking for the present, time now foreign to her after being in a world where everything was both eternal and nonexistent.
“Yes, yes, yes!” Ziza called as she descended from the spirit realm down a tunnel made of life. Breathing things, screaming things, hot, sweaty, pulsing, moving, scampering, wild, toothy, bloody, slimy, rich, salty things. Tree branches brushed her skin. Sensation overwhelmed her as she landed with a soft, plump thud into the belly of her new god. Ziza took in the darkness, swum in it. It was nothing like the violent nothingness of her home for the past two centuries. For here she could smell, taste, feel. She could hear the cries of the girl carrying her, loud and unrelenting.
Sully had never been with child before, and she didn’t understand the pain that overtook her so sudden as she shoveled the last gallon of dirt over the graves of her masters. Spasms in her abdomen convinced her she was dying.

Sully wakes after the birth to find that Ziza put her in bed and has cleaned the house. Ziza tells Sully that, as she committed a multiple murder, she will give birth to others from the etherworld and, in due course, a boy of ten named Miles joins them. Two months later a forty-one-year-old woman named Liza Jane is “born” and, a few days later, a twin sister Bethie. Finally, an old man called Nathaniel arrives.
The group later ambush wagon trains and, for every traveller they kill, Sully births another of their kind. Eventually, they are enough of them to take on the town, which they do successfully.
The final scene (spoiler) has Sully cutting out her own uterus, burying it, killing herself, and being reborn from the soil.
This didn’t work for me, partly because Sully is not a particularly engaging central character (aside from the fact that she is a mass murderer, she spends quite a lot of time bickering with Ziza), and partly because the story is just about a lot of people getting murdered.

Dion MBD

More Real Than Him by Silvia Park is set in the near future and its central character is a young female coder called Morgan. Near the beginning of the story (there are a couple of pages of scene setting first) she steals a partially assembled robot from her workplace and, when she is later summoned to her boss’s office, a co-worker called Di covers for her. The story then charts the developing friendship between the pair, something that is initially engrossing as the future world they live in is convincingly and densely described:

The house isn’t what lodges a lump in Morgan’s throat; it’s the menagerie of zoobots. Billowy stingrays and angelfish weave around a chandelier. A jaguar, black as shoe-polish, languishes on a silverware cabinet. “Grandpa,” Di shouts toward upstairs. “Your aquarium’s on the loose! He’s a zoobot designer,” she adds, an offhand summation of her gilded family tree where she is but a branch, budding with potential.
“Is your father here?” Morgan says, because Di’s father is the Zhou Bing and not that Morgan would call herself starry-eyed, but she’s curious. Anyone would be.
“This is my grandpa’s house. From my mom’s side.”
Morgan, also a divorce victim, can sympathize. Di chatters about the rest of her family; her NEET brother has finally enrolled in the police academy, her mother works for a robot rights nonprofit in NY, and as she leads Morgan upstairs, Di nudges the subject back to Stephen.

Stephen is the robot that Morgan stole (and has substantially modified), but the story becomes less about him and more about the relationship problems of both of the women: Morgan is estranged from her mother, and Di has problems with her father. This eventually becomes a little dull, and if the story comes to any kind of conclusion I missed what it was. A pity: this has a pretty good beginning but it goes on too long and feels like it loses focus (or perhaps does not focus on what I am interested in—those attracted to stories where young protagonists wrangle with their personal and/or relationship problems may feel differently).

Rovina Cai

Seonag and the Seawolves by M. Evan MacGriogair1 is about a woman called Seonag, who is born into a West of Scotland family; when she grows up and her family emigrate to Canada, she stays behind. She drifts for a couple of days before going to see the narrator’s father, who tells her about the sea wolves and how she can find them. Seonag later goes out into the Atlantic and, after a day or so of apparently supernatural swimming, comes to an island covered with trees.
After this Callum (the narrator) decides to follow her and also swims out to sea, but soon gets into difficulties: he is saved from drowning by three men in their boat. They decide to sail to the island to find Seonag and the wolves.
The climax of the story (spoiler) plays out violently on the island in a fight between the wolves and the men. During this Seonag becomes a magical creature.
There are a couple of things that make this feel like a debut story: the first is that much of the story is descriptive scene setting involving overmuch Gaelic language (which is then explained):

“Ach chan eil mic-thire ann an-seo, Athair!” I fall into Gaelic and hurriedly say in English, “But there aren’t wolves here!”
My father smiles in the way of parents who know more than a child who assumes, in childish folly, that they know more than their parents. That smile turns back in on itself much like that sentence.
He holds up his hand, watching Seonag. “Ah, but there are madaidhean-allaidh.”
Madadh-allaidh, faol, sitheach, faol-chu—they are all words for wolf. This is why I need my Gaelic.
My father has used these words as though he means there is a difference and in English there would be none. What is it that he means?

The writer also seems unable (or unwilling) to write in paragraphs, which frequently makes it feel as if you are reading a long telegram:

Seonag drags herself farther onto the beach, close enough to look at one of the paw prints.
It is the size of her hand, almost. If she curls her fingers in—which she does—she can lay her hand in the depression made by the paw pads and see the indentation of a wet tuft of fur, the pricks of claws.
She has never seen such a track.
The set of prints leads away from the water.
There is more than one set of prints.
If she expects to hear more howling, she is disappointed. There is only the sound of the wind and the waves and her own labored breathing. Seonag knows she will need to find shelter soon. She will likely need to build it.
She has swum through the short summer night, and already to the east, the sky lightens.
She is covered in sand, only on her right side. There are no clouds. She is alone.
Seonag is used to being alone, even when she is surrounded by people.
She pushes herself to her feet.

It also takes a while to get going, and the plot is fairly straightforward, but it’s okay overall, I guess.

John Picacio

The City That Never Sleeps by Walton Simons is a ‘Wild Cards’ story, and the character at the centre of this one is Demise Spector, an ace who can kill people by looking into their eyes. The story is about his adventures in Jokertown, which involve his recruitment as a hitman by a bar owner contact.
His first target is a mafia family and, when he goes to their apartment, things initially go well (i.e. people die quietly and without any fuss). Unfortunately matters spiral out of control when the grandmother hears him killing one of the men in another room; she comes through and throws a pan of boiling pasta in his face before pushing him out of a window. Luckily for Spector he is caught by a Joker (in this instance a newt-like creature) who was climbing up the side of the building at the time. The Joker takes Spector back to his flat, and leaves him to regenerate:

Spector heard a door close and continued knocking back enough vodka to take the edge off the pain.
He’d been badly burned once before and had figured out that dead skin can’t heal, it just sits there.
He’d had to peel it off to jump-start the regeneration process.
There were bits of pasta stuck to his face. Pulling them free was uncomfortable, but not excruciating.
Then he put his hands to his eyelids. They were rippled, bloated, and stuck to his eyeballs. “Fuck me,” he said, draining as much of the bottle as he could. Spector pulled off his coat and put it over his head. That, at least, would cut down on the light. He worked a fingernail into the corner of one of his eyelids and began pulling it away from his eye. At first it came off in little bits, then the entire piece of ruined flesh peeled away. He screamed and forced the bottle back between his lips. It was empty by the time he finished the job.

When the regeneration process is almost complete, Spector leaves the apartment but later returns with money for the Joker as a token of his thanks. The rest of the story tells of their budding friendship, which includes their involvement in two fights; the first is a huge brawl at a baseball game—which has them ultimately escaping out over the roof of the stadium, and then there is an ambush on the Joker by a woman called Sue—a Joker who has eyes which fly around independently—and her gang of thugs. Spector (spoiler) saves the Newt-Joker’s life, and the story ends.
This is a readable and entertaining story told in economic prose (worth comparing to the flabbier entries in this issue) but it is, however, as fragmentary as the last ‘Wild Cards’ piece I read.

The best of the Interior artwork for the July and August stories is probably the Red Nose Studio one for the Carroll, although I also like the Rovina Cai (for the MacGriogair).

Another mixed bag of stories. Together with the May-June entries, this summer issue feels like, at best, an average issue of F&SF or Asimov’s SF.  ●

_____________________

1. “M. Evan MacGriogair” would appear to be a pseudonym for M. Evan Matyas (there is a copyright notice in this name). I hope this non-Scottish sounding author doesn’t get run out of town for cultural appropriation.  ●

_____________________

Here is the already posted review for the May-June stories:

Stories

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Jason McGregor, Featured Futures

_____________________

Editors, Patrick Nielsen Hayden (x2), George R. R. Martin, Lee Harris, Ellen Datlow (x2)

Fiction:
Murder in the Spook House • by Michael Swanwick
Long is the Way • by Carrie Vaughn and Sage Walker
Any Way the Wind Blows • by Seanan McGuire
Skinner Box • by Carole Johnstone
The New Prometheus • by Michael Swanwick +
A Forest, or A Tree • by Tegan Moore

Non-fiction:
Interior artwork • by John Picacio, Gregory Manchess (x3), Adam Baines, Samuel Araya

_____________________

The first thing to mention is that the cover above is a placeholder made by me1: I needed an image as the third issue of Tor’s new bimonthly magazine/anthology has not yet appeared (they still seem to be in the process of filling a staff vacancy2). What follows are reviews of the stories that appeared on the Tor.com website3 during May and June. I’ve already commented on the two Swanwick stories in my last post, so I’ve cut and pasted them at the end of this one for the convenience of anyone who hasn’t seen them.

John Picacio

Long is the Way by Carrie Vaughn and Sage Walker is a story from the ‘Wild Cards’ franchise, and starts with an ‘Ace’ (superhero for anyone not up on the ‘Wild Card’ terminology) called Jonathan Hive driving to an interview with another Ace called Zoe Harris. Harris may have been involved in a terrorist attack on Jerusalem twenty years ago but now, apparently, runs a perfume factory.
Hive is so-called as he has the ability to transform himself into a swarm of wasps, and he reconnoiters the facility where Harris works by sending a couple of individual insects ahead:

One bug caught a glimpse: a woman approaching . . . and she saw him. Them. She was a joker, with a face that looked melted on one side, average white middle-aged matron on the other, with brown hair tied in a ponytail. She held a tightly coiled newspaper in one hand. The pair of bugs crawled along the ceiling—well out of reach of the universal weapon of “death to insects.”
And then her arm stretched. She whipped it back and flung it out, once, twice, and both wasps smashed into spots of goo. Well, then. Jonathan felt the buggy deaths as an itch. He decided not to send out any more bugs, at least not right now.

When Harris meets Hive she dismisses his cover story about interviewing her about perfume, and tells him she knows who he is. Harris then proceeds to tell him what she has been doing over the last two decades. This story involves an old lover called Croyd (an Ace fugitive who is also known as “The Sleeper”) springing her from an asylum and taking her to deliver his pregnant lover’s baby.
The childbirth is described graphically, and at length, and (spoiler) it does not go well (the mother dies of pre-eclampsia). When they take the child to a village to get help, Croyd disappears overboard from their boat, and Harris and another Ace called Needles are left with the child. They go on to the local village.
As a result of this experience Harris sets up the perfumery (really a refuge), and eventually saves ten people from unfortunate circumstances.
This is an okay read, but it is obviously a fragmentary and interstitial piece of ‘Wild Cards’ backstory and doesn’t stand on its own. If you are not into the ‘Wild Cards’ series it will probably not do much for you.

Gregory Manchess

Any Way the Wind Blows by Seanan McGuire is a short piece written to commemorate the move of Tor Publishing out of the Flatiron building4 in Manhattan. It is narrated by an airship captain from one of many parallel worlds, and there is a lot of backstory about the multiverse that they travel. We learn, among other things, that there are Greek Gods, and creatures who eat reality. In among these discursive descriptions there are moments of Crew Banter:

I turn. Our navigator is looking over his shoulder at me. Well. One of his heads is. The other is still watching the curved window that makes up the front of our airship, crystal clear and apparently fragile. Most people who attack us aim for that window first, not asking themselves how many protections we’d put on a sheet of glass that size. The fact that it’s not a solid mass of bugs doesn’t seem to be the clue it should.
“What is it?”
He smiles uncertainly. “I think I see the Flatiron.”
That makes me stand a little straighter. Not every parallel has a Flatiron Building. Oh, every one we’ve discovered where the European colonists constructed a settlement in the area we know as “Manhattan” has had plans for a Flatiron Building, but they don’t always get built, and once they’re built, they don’t always survive. Some of them have burnt. Others were bombed. One of them was infected by an artificial bacterium intended to help destroy landfills by converting them into arable soil, which had converted it into the largest pile of loam I’d ever seen. An intact Flatiron is reason to celebrate.
Maybe. “How secure does the structure look?”
“Seems stable.”
That’s . . . good. “Is there a docking station on the roof?”
“Negative, captain.” Daphne looks up from her instruments. “The mammals below us are pointing and stopping as we pass overhead. I don’t think the airship caught on in this parallel.”
“Oh, lovely. Primitives.”
“There are flying machines,” says one of the other bridge crew. “They seem to operate on an internal combustion basis, but they get where they’re going. Fast, too. If we had one of those, we’d be home within the quarter.”
“With our surveys half-finished,” I snap. “You can’t chart ground properly if you’re moving across it too fast for anything to record. Use your head, or we’ll get you a new one.”
“I’d like a new head,” says the navigator. “The ones I have don’t provide me with a full range of vision. Three heads, now. Three heads is where it’s at.”

After the leisurely setup they arrive at the building and the incursion team is deployed. The locals request a meeting with the captain, and when he descends to the building he meets what I presume are a number of the Tor publishers and editors:

One of the locals, a cadaverous man who looks like he’s already been killed and resurrected three or four times—so maybe these people are more civilized than they seem—is practically vibrating, smiling so broadly that he’s in danger of splitting his lower lip. “This is really happening, this is really, really happening,” he says. He turns to another of the locals, a shorter woman with graying hair and a politely bemused expression. “You owe me ten dollars.”
“I never made that bet,” says the woman. “Excuse me, ah, Captain, but are you saying these people really came from your, ah, airship up there? From another dimension?”
How much has the incursion team told these people? “Yes,” I say stiffly, lowering my hand. “We come in peace. We don’t intend you any harm.”
“Those two sentences mean the same thing, usually,” says the third local, a balding man who seems short next to the living cadaver, but is about the same height as most of the men in my crew. He has an Albian accent. It sounds weird here in a New Amsterdam cognate. He’s as out of place as we are. “Is there a reason you need to say both?”

A pleasant if minor piece.

Adam Baines

Skinner Box by Carole Johnstone has a content warning for “sexual content, including abuse and assault” (are today’s readers really so fragile?), and good hook line:

I didn’t always fantasise about killing him. I used to fantasise about fucking him, and when that lived up to expectations, I fantasised about marrying him. Which didn’t.

The narrator is Evie, who is on a spaceship that is heading out to beyond Jupiter, and which has two other crew members: Mas, the Zimbabwean ship engineer and her lover, and Don, a scientist and her abusive husband. Evie’s job is to conduct behavioural conditioning experiments on nanites in a Skinner box.5 Although there is some material related to this—the control of AI and neural networks—the story largely focuses on Evie’s relationship with Mas, and her plan to get him to kill her husband Don. As the story progresses we also learn about Boris, a previous lover of Evie’s on an earlier trip.
Eventually (and it is “eventually,” as the story is quite a long haul) we learn that (spoiler) Boris and Mas may be the ones who were/are the subjects of a conditioning experiment—we also learn that Boris is an android who is deactivated, and lying in a locked cabin. Then Evie locks Mas (who we later find out isn’t an android) in his cabin to prevent him following through with their plan/his conditioning. There are even more reveals, and we find out that almost no one is who or what we (or they) think they are.
The last section of the story has Evie coming to terms with the fact that she is the subject of the experiment, and a transhuman to boot. She is later reunited with Mas.
This is reasonably engaging for the most part, but the rug is pulled out from under the reader so many times in the final section that it’s hard to care about anything by the end. As I’ve already noted, it is longer than it needs to be (and it also outstays its welcome—the last part seems somewhat anti-climactic).
It reminded me a little of the movie Moon.

Samuel Araya

A Forest, or A Tree by Tegan Moore concerns four young women on a hike. Although it is a little difficult to work out who is who to start with, it soon becomes clear that: Elizabeth is a foul-mouth who thinks everything is “dicks”; May is the solitary black character; Piper has digestive problems; and Ailey is an experienced woodsman/leader.
There is some sparky dialog, such as this spooky story-telling scene at an evening campfire:

[Elizabeth said,] “Have you heard of Stick Indians?”
“That sounds racist,” Ailey said.
“Stick Native Americans,” Piper said. A trace of sunlight flickered over her closed eyes.
“They call it Stick Indians. I didn’t make it up.”
“Repeating things doesn’t make them not racist,” May said. She hadn’t meant to say it so vehemently. She glanced around their circle to see if anyone had flinched, and relaxed her shoulders.
“Okay, so,” Elizabeth said. “Someone posted this story—it was obviously a story, it had characters and a plot and whatever; real stories aren’t that well organized. A bunch of kids were out camping and were hassled by this tree monster. Whatever, it was dumb, but I hadn’t heard about Stick Indians before.”
Now Piper watched Elizabeth, interested. Ailey poked at the fire.
“Anyway. I looked around and there wasn’t much info. A couple old websites with Yakama Indian legends, but all the sites had basically the same story, and you could tell it was copy-pasted. That first site I saw referenced some books I couldn’t find on Amazon, but I later I saw the same titles in a couple different places. Enough to make me think the books might at least be real.”
“You could try a library,” Ailey said. “Like, where actual research is done.”

The women eventually retire for the night but, when they wake the next day, Ailey and May discover that their pile of firewood, and more besides, has been scattered all over the campsite. They also find Piper is sick, and can’t stop going to the toilet. After some discussion, Ailey, Elizabeth, and May go hiking on their own, leaving Piper to rest.
When they return at the end of the day they find Piper’s condition has deteriorated. As they  question her, Elizabeth sees a deer-like shape with antlers like “huge fucking trees”. They decide that, as night is falling, they will go for help in the morning.
The final section (spoiler) has Elizabeth and May go for help. During their trip, Elizabeth is spooked by a deer (apparently a normal one this time) and she runs towards the ridge (the most direct but steepest route to their car). May is left to go on her own by the normal route, and gets to the car before Elizabeth. Rather than waiting she decides to set off and look for help.
After trying at a couple of empty houses/stores, May finds a house with a hostile female occupant. She finally breaks in to use the phone, and the climactic scene takes place inside a house as the Stick Indian crashes through the French doors, and the old woman waves a shotgun around.
This final scene did not work for me for a number of reasons: why had the Stick Indian followed May rather than Elisabeth (there is an inference earlier that it was following the latter of the two)? Why did it not attack May in the forest when she was on her own? Why does the householder act in such an odd way? What actually happens in this scene? Is it actually happening? (“It—the thing, the creature, if it was even truly there—lifted its dreadful, awful crest and looked at May with no eyes.”)
A pity this doesn’t have a better ending, as it is quite good for the most part.

As mentioned above, I’ve already reviewed the two Michael Swanwick stories,6 both of which are set in a magical, early 20th Century version of Europe under threat of invasion from the Mongolian Wizard and his hordes. The story’s main protagonist is a German called Ritter, who works as an investigator for an English wizard and MI5 spy chief called Sir Toby.

Gregory Manchess

Murder in the Spook House starts with Ritter arriving at a tank depot to investigate yet another murder (a repeating plot device in this series), and this time it is (spoiler) Sir Toby who has copped it. As Ritter is taken by the officer in charge to see the body, the pair see a raven appear and disappear—this is another time anomaly event, similar to the one Ritter experienced in the previous story.
After some of the usual sniffing about by Ritter’s wolf Freki, Ritter uncovers the murderer. The ending resurrects Sir Toby—and his dead doppelgänger disappears back to whatever timeline it came from.
This story suffers not only from having yet another murder investigation at its core, but also from the same unconvincing temporal shenanigans as the previous tale: if the writer can magically undo any of the story’s previous events by timeline manipulation, how can they expect to maintain any dramatic tension?

Gregory Manchess

The New Prometheus is this world’s Frankenstein story, and opens with Ritter driving a dog-sled across the Arctic in pursuit of his quarry. When the creature sets up camp, and Ritter establishes it is safe to approach—he sends Freki ahead and watches as the wolf gets its tummy rubbed—he enters his quarry’s tent and listens to its story. We find out that the creature is a homunculus created by the Mongolian Wizard:

“It is a gruesome process. First the skeleton is assembled from the living bones of various animals. Human bones would not do, for it was desired to give me the features and physiognomy of a god. Bones taken from dead creatures would be . . . dead. So animals were required to suffer. It took a phalanx of surgical wizards just to keep the skeleton viable while muscles and cartilage were attached, nerves grown to interlace the flesh, organs coaxed into interaction, skin convinced to cover all . . . More magical talents were employed in my creation than for any other single purpose in human history. It is doubtful that anyone but my father—for so I consider him—could have arranged for such a thing. And even he had to effectively bring the war to a standstill to free up the resources necessary for it.”

Ritter later learns of the homunculus’s education (part of which was done by Ritter’s uncle, a prisoner under compulsion), and that it is capable of all the magical arts—not just single talents like humans. However, its gift for mind-reading means it suffers from constant exposure to human thoughts, hence the flight to the Arctic.
At the end of the story (spoiler) the homunculus paralyses Ritter and leaves the tent to take what seems the only logical course of action. After it disappears over the horizon, Ritter sees a terrific explosion.
I found this an engrossing account of the short life and death of an almost godlike bring, and it’s one of the series’ better stories.

I liked Manchess’s three illustrations the best, and thought the others okay or better. Again, the cover at the top is a fake created by me.1

Another weak issue: given this venture’s superior word rates, I expected more quality than I’ve seen in the last three volumes. Given Tor.com’s numerous award nominations in the past, I wonder if they are going through a weak patch? Do any regular readers have an opinion on this?  ●

_____________________

1. Designed from scratch.

2. The Tor job advert is here.

3. You can find Tor.com’s stories in web-format here, and the bi-monthly ‘newsletter’ here (if it is still going).

4. There is a Wikipedia page for the Flatiron building.

5. There is a Wikpedia page on Skinner boxes or, as they describe them, “Opearant conditioning chambers”.

6. All of Swanwick’s ‘Mongolian Wizard’ stories are reviewed here.  ●

rssrss

New Worlds SF #155, October 1965

ISFDB
Luminist

Other reviews:1
Graham Hall, Vector #35 (October 1965)

_____________________

Editor, Michael Moorcock; Assistant Editor, Langdon Jones

Fiction:
E=mc2—OR BUST • serial by Harry Harrison ∗∗∗
The Golden Barge • short story by Michael Moorcock [as by William Barclay]
Heat of the Moment • short story by R. M. Bennett
Emancipation • short story by Daphne Castell
Jake in the Forest • short story by David Harvey –
. . . And Isles Where Good Men Lie • novelette by Bob Shaw

Non-fiction:
Cover
Interior artwork
• by James Cawthorn
Making the Transition • editorial by Michael Moorcock
Story Ratings No. 153
Self-Conscious Sex
• book review by Charles Platt
Dr. Peristyle • Q&A column by Brian W. Aldiss [as by uncredited]

_____________________

E=mc2—OR BUST by Harry Harrison is the third part of the novel Bill the Galactic Hero and, as per the last instalment, less funny than the first. It starts with Bill on trial for being AWOL and, after his conviction, he ends up in prison with an immortal (or mad) cell mate. The pair have a good life taking advantage of the penal system until they are eventually transferred to the battle zone by mistake.
The second half of this finds Bill on a ‘Deathworld’ type planet, where he once more meets Eager Beager (before the latter is eaten by a giant snake). Bill then fights his way through the jungle and ambushes a convoy of human prisoners. He finds Drang among them, terminally wounded, and Bill eventually ‘inherits’ his fangs.
This is all well enough done, but the problem is that this reads more like Deathworld than a parody of it. That said, it finishes with (spoiler) an amusingly ironic coda which has Bill as a recruiting sergeant enlisting his own brother despite the protestations of their weeping mother.
The Golden Barge by Michael Moorcock is a fairly straightforward allegory which has a man called Tallow chasing a Golden Barge on the river. During his pursuit he gets stranded on a sandbank:

The sun shone on the boat, on Tallow, on the river, on bushes and trees and on a white house, five storeys high, which gleamed like the newly-washed face of a child.
Tallow lifted red eyes and sighed. He tried once more to move the boat, but could not. He looked around him. He saw the house. He would need help. With a shrug, he splashed knee-deep through the water, to the bank, climbing up its damp, crumbling, root-riddled earth and cursing his luck.
Tallow, in some ways, was a fatalist, and his fatalism at last came to the rescue of his sanity as ahead of him he saw a wall of red-brick, patched with black moss-growths. His mood changed almost instantly and he was once again his old, cold cocky self. For beyond the wall he could see the head and shoulders of a woman. The barge could wait for a little while.  p. 37

Tallow and the woman, Pandora, later become lovers and live in the house but, over time, relationship problems develop. Tallow eventually leaves to pursue the Golden Barge, and Pandora tries to go with him. As she later sleeps in the boat, Tallow realises that she is an encumbrance, and that without her he might yet find the Golden Barge—so (spoiler), he unceremoniously chucks her over the side! (Marriage guidance counselor required for this writer, stat!)
I got most of the allusions in this piece (the big white house and Pandora’s “purple talons”, etc.) but the last one escaped me (a huge pile of intertwined bodies has Pandora’s arm coming out of the top).
There has been a varied selection of Moorcock stories over the last three issues (the ‘Jerry Cornelius’ story Preliminary Information in #153, and The Pleasure Garden of Felipe Sagittarius in #154) but this is the one I liked best—next issue sees the start of a serial from him as “James Colvin”, The Wrecks of Time.
Heat of the Moment by R. M. Bennett2 starts with a travelling salesman arriving at a motel and going to sleep. Later he wakes up to find his room on fire and, as he tries to escape, is abducted by aliens who take him on a spaceship to Rigel Two. En route they tell him he is destined for a zoo, and that conditions there will be as near to what he is used to as is possible.
This has a realistic beginning, a routine spaceflight section in the middle, and (spoiler) a punchline ending (after the aliens vacate his recreated motel room, they light the fires). This ironic ending made me smile, but it may not be everyone’s hot beverage preference.

Emancipation by Daphne Castell starts off with convincingly described section about an alien society:

Krug of Stok unhooked the wooden hasp of the wives’ pen, and stooped under the low lintel into the main yard, chilly and yellow-grey in the light of approaching dawn. None of the other men of the village were about yet—Krug was an early riser, liked to get out and about before the paths grew crowded and the communal rakers and sowers had all been rented out. Still, there were drawbacks to being a keen farmer; it was cold, for one thing, this early in the day—Krug’s thick brown skin, tufted and warted as some of the reptile life of Stok, was crinkled in an effort not to shiver. He looked into the iron trough under the great boiler; the fire was low. Skag, the night-watchman was asleep on the other side of the boiler, skulking good-for-nothing. Krug growled—he would have to wake the fat fool up to tell him his duty was over—duty, pah! Any right-thinking Stokka would scorn to be a night-watchman over the wives’ pen: it was a post given only to the slowest-moving and slowest-thinking of the race—not one of honourable service and renunciation, like being a nurse of children for instance, or a food-dresser. Definitely a post worthy of no respect at all. Krug kicked the slouched brown figure at his feet awake with a fierceness which was partly due to the knowledge that in a moment he would have to begin the other task which made early-morning work less than welcome. He would have to poke the fire and coax it into fresh vigour, before preparing the morning feed for the communal livestock in the wives’ pen.
“Oh! Thak take you, master, that was a shrewd kick!” Skag lurched to his feet with a peevish moan.
“Anything to report?” Krug picked up a shovel and began heaving tash-dung on to the dying fire.
“The creatures were making a bit of a din round about the setting of the moons. Can’t let a man take a nap, upsy swine,” grumbled Skag. It was not quite clear whether he was referring to the livestock or to Krug. Just to be on the safe side, Krug swung smartly at him with the shovel, and the nightwatchman went on his way more hastily, with a stifled yelp of pain.  p. 62-63

We learn more about this feudal planet, and the three-armed reptilian race that occupy it, as the story progresses; in particular we learn that the males are the only sex who are intelligent, and the females are kept as herd animals in pens.
Later there is a conversation between Krug and Skag and another man called Lopp, who is back from his travels around their solar system (although their society isn’t advanced enough to have spaceships, neighbouring planets do, and the young males work their passage). During Lopp’s account, he tells the pair that Terrans have landed on one of the other planets, and have claimed the solar system as part of their Galactic Empire; many labour-saving technological marvels will now be available in return for this annexation. The only problem is that Krug’s people will have to pretend that the females are their equals, as Terrans have odd views on the subject of sexual equality.
This news plays out later at a Council meeting where all of the alien males attend, and there is trouble at the thought of heretical ideas like letting the females live with the males. Matters comes to a head when Lopp mentions that the Terran’s demands are the lesser of two evils: there is another race approaching their solar system, and they have a matriarchal society! The Council decides to submit to the Terrans.
After this entertaining set-up the story ends on a bit of a flat note, as the hypno aids used to teach the females a simple form of speech (to help fool the Earthmen) also make them less placid, and they eventually insist on having their own way in other respects—having pets in the house, telling the Earthmen what the real situation on the planet is, etc.
This is the best thing I can remember reading by Castell, and it is an interesting early feminist SF story.
Jake in the Forest by David Harvey3 is about a man who wanders through a forest until he comes to a lake. Looking back to where he has come from he sees a hidden house. He enters the building and finds a speechless woman there; she indicates a table full of food and later shows him a bed where he can sleep. The woman later visits him and then, I think, there is a dream sequence where he falls onto jagged rocks. He wakes the next morning, has breakfast, and goes outside to find the woman lying spreadeagled on a flat rock.
I have no idea what this was supposed to be about, and the writing is so overly descriptive you get the distinct impression that the author isn’t writing a story, but Writing:

Each pine tree possessed an underlying form of conic symmetry and this pervaded everything. This gave Jake great pleasure, particularly when he surveyed the landscape from some panoramic viewpoint, for the vertex of each tree provided a series of focal points which guided the vision. And when Jake moved the parallax of vertices moved slowly and irrevocably too. And when he moved under the pines he was able to look up through the symmetrically spaced branches to the final conic of the sky above. Sometimes Jake felt disatisfied with the constant upward pointing of the conic shapes and then he would imagine that the roots of each tree pointed downward. and outward into the earth. The most pleasurable moments of all came when he came to one of the numerous lakes, for here he was able to see the conic shapes pointing downwards into the water. Here the land was neatly balanced on the vertex of each tree and Jake trembled in case the crash of the axe should destroy the support of the land and leave nothing save the sky.  p. 77

In moderation the above wouldn’t be so bad, but there’s seventeen pages of this (as well as quotes from Ibsen at the start and end—never a good sign), and I soon started zoning out. No doubt there are Symbols and Deep Meaning here, but they were lost on me: I suppose I should have given this another go but it seemed too much like the opaque stories that made the later large-size issues of New Worlds virtually unreadable.

Bob Shaw, after several years away from the field,4 returns with . . . And Isles Where Good Men Lie. It starts with war-hero Lt Col Johnny Fortune, commander of a UN Planetary Defence Unit, giving a news conference about a Nesster spaceship which may land in Fortune’s sector (he is in Iceland). These alien ships have been arriving regularly for three years, and Fortune is a hero of previous armed engagements where the supposedly invading Nessters were exterminated. However, Fortune now suspects that the Nessters aren’t a threat but are actually unarmed refugees.
After the conference, Fortune goes to see a businessman called Geissler, a mathematical prodigy who runs a business launching orbital packages with the help of a huge cannon. Together they are trying to find the scout satellite they believe is leading the Nesster ships to Earth.
Another part of the story concerns Fortune’s dysfunctional marriage, and we first witness this when Fortune goes home to a party organised by his adulterous wife. He meets his wife’s lover, Efimov, and then goes off to deal with other matters. When Fortune later finds the pair in his office at a locked desk drawer, Fortune knocks Efimov unconscious. Fortune then gets a call from the base about the inbound ship: they have calculated that it will definitely land in Fortune’s sector, so he returns to base.
The rest of the story involves Gleissner finding the satellite, and his and Fortune’s attempts to shoot it down in the face of opposition from Efimov and other external forces.
Although the fundamental idea behind the story is a little shaky (why has no-one else suspected what Fortune has?) there are a number of things that mark this story out from other contemporary work. First there is the hero himself—Fortune is an overweight chocolate guzzler; second, the marital infidelity in Fortune’s relationship is atypical; third, the story takes place in Iceland. All this (and more) made me think that, in some respects, this piece points to a time after the New Wave when traditional SF would be better characterised and more adult.

The Cover is another awful, uncredited one—the magazine badly needs a cover artist or artwork that reflects the ambitions of the fiction. There is one uninspired piece of Interior artwork by James Cawthorn.
Making the Transition by Michael Moorcock is another editorial which stretches the SF envelope:

Although the six stories in this issue are all speculative and imaginative, two of them do not conform to the conventions of sf as we usually think of it. They are much closer to the imaginative fantasies of Kafka, Peake or Borges than to, say, the work of Heinlein or Asimov. We found them stimulating and, encouraged by the unanimous support of letter-writers on the subject of our ‘Almost anything goes’ editorial in NW SF 149, we decided to publish them.  p. 2

Moorcock goes on to describe the “Barclay” story as an allegory, and the Harvey story as something similar:

The imaginative story—of which the sf story is an aspect—is well-suited for doing this. It should be easy for the reader used to interpreting the terminology of the conventional sf story (FTL, tri-di, hyper-warp and so on) to make the transition to interpreting the symbolism of less overt allegories like Jake in the Forest and its like. Such stories are not written from any desire to be obscure, but from a creative need to find fresh methods of telling a story and making a point.  p. 2

Uh-huh. The second part of the editorial mentions the critical magazine Riverside Quarterly, and picks up on a point in its letter column:

In reply to a correspondent who asks ‘but which is the more vital to sf: emotions or concepts?’ Mr Sapiro replies ‘In literary or “mainstream” writing, as opposed to the journalistic or pulp variety, ideas are conveyed indirectly, rather than by explicit statement; so that the reader can gain that emotional satisfaction involved in synthesizing the object for himself. Such emotion, I think, is the more poignant, since it results from an entire chain of mental associations rather than the single memory involved in naming something. In short, it is not a question of more or less emotion in sf, but a question of how this emotion is to be conveyed’. Our feeling is that some sf authors could well think about Mr Sapiro’s statement.  p. 3

I’m thought about this but couldn’t figure out what Sapiro meant, so I ‘phoned a friend’. This baffled several other people too, and the best explanation I got was that the writer means (I paraphrase) “inference (which occurs within the reader’s emotional apparatus) is more powerful than unadorned information, i.e. a data dump.” I’m not entirely sure that Sapiro answers the question posed if this is the case.
Story Ratings No. 153 were discussed in the review of that issue.5
The only book review in this issue is a withering half-page on Robert A. Heinlein’s Stranger in a Strange Land by Charles Platt titled Self-Conscious Sex:

[This] is a remarkably dull book. Stylistically, cloying American cliche and banter merge with a coyness (‘mammary gland’ used instead of ‘breast’) inconsistent with the self-consciously bold aim to be frank about sex, the result being a sort of adolescent Playboy philosophy.
There is an amazing amount of superfluity: the meat of the book—the reaction to human society of a man reared in an alien environment—only begins after the first 150 or so pages, and the unreal-sounding situations are bogged down by painstakingly detailed ‘authenticity’. This book could only have caused a stir in the naive world of sf ‘fandom’; the characters and action are entirely subordinated to Heinlein’s arguments, and since these are as trite and shallow as the writing itself, it is difficult to find any kind of value here. Heinlein might do better to return to writing adventure fiction, to which perhaps his talent is better matched.  p. 124

Brian W. Aldiss returns with the second of his Dr. Peristyle question and answer columns, and provides more waspish, polemical replies. I enjoyed this one more than the first.

The Small Advertisements page at the back of the issue is of interest this time around as it mentions some of the other SF books that Compact SF has recently published (see the right hand column in the image above). There had been the odd house ad for these before, and these would appear more often in future issues.

There are a number of generally good stories in this issue, but they are either minor or slightly flawed.  ●

_____________________

1. Graham Hall says that Harrison’s Bill the Galactic Hero, “ends quietly and predictably with a heavy touch of irony.” As for the two allegories in this issue, he thinks that Moorcock’s* The Golden Barge is “fairly straightforward but pointless”, and Harvey’s Jake in the Forest “futile through its own incomprehensibility”.
Bennett’s Heat of the Moment is “an old idea with a new twist obvious from the third page”, and Castell’s Emancipation, “apart from being eight pages too long, is very fair indeed.” Tough crowd.
Hall liked Shaw’s . . . And Isles Where Good Men Lie best of all, and says it is “well-written, contains good SF ideas, and deals with the human condition, and does it all concisely and comprehensibly.”
*Hall is aware that “Barclay” is Moorcock, and adds that the piece may be an excerpt from an early, unpublished novel.

2. R. M. Bennett is the reviewer (and fan) Ron Bennett from a previous issue. His ISFDB page is here and here (hopefully in the process of being merged).

3. David Harvey was a one-shot wonder, although there were some other letters and essays. His ISFDB page is here. His more impressive Wikipedia page (as a “Marxist economic geographer” among other things) is here.

4. Shaw published eight stories in Nebula and Authentic in the mid to late fifties, and a collaboration with Walt Willis in If in 1960, then fell silent for a handful of years. His ISFDB page is here (some of the other early stories listed—along with the fannish classic The Enchanted Duplicator—appeared in Willis’s Slant, a fanzine).

5. There are no story ratings for this issue—it appears this issue’s were the last.  ●

rssrss

New Worlds SF #154, September 1965

ISFDB
Luminist

Other reviews:1
Graham Hall, Vector #35 (September 1965)

_____________________

Editor, Michael Moorcock; Assistant Editor, Langdon Jones

Fiction:
Girl and Robot with Flowers • short story by Brian W. Aldiss ∗∗∗∗
Old Time’s Sake • short story by Brian W. Aldiss
Traveller’s Rest • short story by David I. Masson
A Dip in the Swimming-Pool Reactor (Part 2 of 3) • serial by Harry Harrison
The Pleasure Garden of Felipe Sagittarius • short story by Michael Moorcock [as by James Colvin] +
At the End of Days • short story by Robert Silverberg

Non-fiction:
Cover
Interior artwork • by Harry Douthwaite, James Cawthorn
A Welcome Choice • editorial by Michael Moorcock
Brian W. Aldiss: The Image Maker • essay by Edmund Crispin
Story Ratings No. 152
Brian Aldiss • essay by Peter White
An Outstanding Space Story • book reviews by Michael Moorcock [as by James Colvin]
Cutting Past the Defences • book review by Michael Moorcock [as by James Colvin]
Letters to the Editor

_____________________

This is a special Brian W. Aldiss issue which has two stories from the writer as well as two essays about his work. Moorcock explains the reason for this celebration in A Welcome Choice, his editorial:

This year, over the August Bank Holiday weekend, the twenty-third World SF Convention will be held at the Mount Royal Hotel, Marble Arch. One of Britain’s outstanding sf writers, Brian W. Aldiss, is to be Guest of Honour. To celebrate this choice we are publishing two new stories by Brian Aldiss, plus articles on him by Edmund Crispin and Peter White. The first story was specially written for the issue and the second is an early, previously unpublished, piece of work which illustrates that Mr. Aldiss has always had the deft style and ability to handle character which marks all his fiction.
Apart from being admired for his talent, Brian Aldiss is also amongst the most well-liked sf writers; charming, ebullient, fluent, not unhandsome, a gourmet and man of good taste and humour, he is as interesting to meet as he is to read. His criticism, in The Oxford Mail and SF Horizons, is intelligent and pithy, matched only by a few.  p. 2

The remainder of the editorial briefly mentions the rest of the issue’s contents, and Moorcock, once again, adds contextual comments about his pseudonymous story:

James Colvin contributes an experimental story of a kind he believes hasn’t been tried before and which, he says, is ‘meant to be enjoyed, not studied’, The Pleasure Garden of Felipe Sagittarius.  p. 2

The first of the essays about Aldiss, Brian W. Aldiss: The Image Maker, comes from Edmund Crispin, and he makes some interesting observations about the writer’s work:

The difference between science-fiction and science-fantasy may be hard to define, but it does, I think, exist. Emphasis is the clue. A science-fiction story can be good even when its visualisation—of a Martian, a megalopolis, a mutant—is relatively sketchy and commonplace; it can succeed because of its other merits. As against this, in a science-fantasy story the quality of the visualisation is the all important thing.
Brian W. Aldiss has written both kinds of tale, yet it seems to me that his natural inclination is towards the second type. As he himself has said, he is interested chiefly in ‘the images’. This interest is not, of course, allowed to become all-devouring: themes, ideas, narrative, plotting and so forth, though subservient to the images, are not the less skilfully handled for that (here Aldiss easily outdistances other science-fantasy writers, many of whom have too often seemed to assume that once they have dreamed up something sufficiently vivid and bizarre, their job is over). No: all I mean to suggest is that in a good proportion of Aldiss’s best work, it is the images which dominate.  p. 3

After a brief survey of some of the writer’s recent fiction, Crispin concludes that Aldiss has the eye of a painter:

In Hothouse, the big canvas, the primaries, the palette-knife. In Greybeard (appropriately) water-colours unassertive and subtly mingled. In the short story Old Hundredth, pastels: faded, yet still clean and clear and pure as the story demands.  p. 4

The first of the two Aldiss stories is Girl and Robot with Flowers, which opens with Aldiss at home with his wife in Oxford on a sunny afternoon. He is having problems with a story he is writing, and his wife suggests that it might help to talk it over.
Aldiss lays out the plot, which involves an alien race declaring war on Earth. Because of the long voyage times to the aggressor’s planet, the Earthmen send robots to fight for them, with a plan to remove all the oxygen in the aliens’ atmosphere, rendering it unbreathable. Meanwhile, the aliens arrive in our solar system and attack, killing 70% of humanity. This doesn’t stop the robots though, who wipe out the aliens and message Earth before tidying away the corpses. Years later, the remnants of humanity receive the message, and they decide to send a manned scout craft to the aliens’ world to investigate; the crew return with information almost two hundred years later. Aldiss continues his description:

[The photographs] show a world covered with enormous robot cities, and tremendous technological activity going on apace. This looks alarming.
But Earth is reassured, it seems that the war robots they made have turned to peaceful ways. More than one shot through the telescopic lenses shows solitary robots up in the hills and mountains of their planet, picking flowers. One close-up in particular is reproduced in every communication medium and finds its way all round rejoicing Earth, it shows a heavily armed robot, twelve feet high, with its arms laden with flowers. And that was to be the title of my story: “Robot with Flowers”.
Marion had finished washing up by this time. We were standing in my little sheltered back garden, idly watching the birds swoop along the roof of the old church that stands behind the garden. Nikola came out and joined us.
“Is that the end?” Marion asked.
“Not quite. There’s an irony to come. This shot of the robot with flowers is misinterpreted—an automated example of the pathetic fallacy, I suppose. The robots have to destroy all flowers, because flowers exhale oxygen, and oxygen is liable to give the robots rust troubles. They’ve not picked up the human trick of appreciating beauty, they’re indulging in the old robot vice of being utilitarian, and in a few years they’ll be coming back to lick the Earthmen on Earth.”
Inside the kitchen, I could hear the fridge charging again. I fought an urge to tell Marion about it; I didn’t want to disturb the sunlight on her face.
She said, “That sounds quite a good twist. It sounds as if it ought to make a decent run-of-the-mill story. Not quite you, perhaps.”
“Somehow, I don’t think I can bring myself to finish it.”
“It’s a bit like that Poul Anderson robot story you admired—’Epilogue’, wasn’t it?”
“Maybe. Every SF story is getting like every other one.”
It’s also a bit like one of Harry’s in his ‘War With the Robots’ collection.”
“‘Anything that Harry wrote can’t be all bad,’” she said, quoting a private joke.
“‘Wish I’d written that,’” I said, adding the punchline.
“But that isn’t really why I don’t want to finish ‘Robot With Flowers’. Maybe Fred Pohl or Mike Moorcock would like it enough to publish it, but I feel disappointed with it. Not just because it’s a crib.”
“You said once that you could always spot a crib because it lacked emotional tone.”
The goldfish were flitting about under the water-lily leaves in my little ornamental pond. Both Nikola and Marion had got interested in them; I said that they were alike. I looked down at them in love and a little exasperation. Her last remark told me she was carrying on the conversation just for my sake—it lacked emotional tone.  p. 7-8

Marion goes to get ready for the picnic, and Aldiss dissatisfiedly mulls over his idea while he watches the cats. He realises that he would prefer to write a story about the sunny afternoon he has been enjoying rather than something so divorced from normal life. When he later tells Marion this she asks him what he means. Aldiss replies:

“Why can’t I get the fridge into an SF story, and this wonderful sunlight, and you, instead of just a bunch of artless robots? See that little furry cat outside, trying to scoop up goldfish? She has no idea that today isn’t going to run on forever, that the rest of life isn’t going to be one golden afternoon. We know it won’t be, but wouldn’t it be a change if I could make a story about just this transitory golden afternoon instead of centuries of misery and total lack of oxygen, cats, and sexy females?”
We were outside the front door. I shut it and followed Marion to the car. We were going to be a bit late.
She laughed, knowing by my tone that I was half kidding.
“Go ahead and put those things into a story,” she said. “I’m sure you can do it. Pile them all in!”
Though she was smiling, it sounded like a challenge.  p. 11

This is a clever, playful, and perceptive piece of meta-fiction about subject matter the field too often ignores. I enjoyed it a lot, and think it is one of Aldiss’s better pieces from the mid-60s.

Old Time’s Sake by Brian W. Aldiss is, as per the blurb above, an early piece about an immortal man called Alec Sampson. Every twenty years he goes to Oxford and reports to the board of the company responsible for his treatment. The first half of the story is largely taken up with Sampson’s visit, and his interaction with the board members—who are all now twenty years older while he is unchanged. After coping with the resultant awkwardness, and completing the medical examinations, Sampson goes home.
A member of the board called Granville later visits Sampson with the results, which suggest that he can expect to live for thirty thousand years. After they finish talking about this and related matters, Sampson tells Granville he wants to marry, and introduces him to his girlfriend Lynette. Granville later tells Sampson he will only hurt her, and writes to Lynette to let her know about Sampson’s treatment and his extended lifespan. The couple break up.
The final part of the story tells of Sampson’s return to Oxford twenty years later.
This is, for the most part, not a bad mainstream take on a standard sfnal theme, but it does drag a little in places. I could also have done without the twist ending (spoiler: we discover that Granville has married Lynette) which squashes the story into a genre template.

The next story, Traveller’s Rest by David I. Masson,2 completely upstages the Aldiss material—it is probably the best (or one of the best) stories from this period of New Worlds. This initially appears to be a future war tale, but it is one that takes place in a very strange environment:

It was an apocalyptic sector. Out of the red-black curtain of the forward sight-barrier, which at this distance from the Frontier shut down a mere twenty metres north, came every sort of meteoric horror: fission and fusion explosions, chemical detonations, a super-hail of projectiles of all sizes and basic velocities, sprays of nerve-paralysants and thalamic dopes. The impact devices burst on the barren rock of the slopes or the concrete of the forward stations, some of which were disintegrated or eviscerated every other minute. The surviving installations kept up an equally intense and nearly vertical fire of rockets and shells. Here and there a protectivized figure could be seen “sprinting” up, down or along the slopes on its mechanical “walker” like a frantic ant from an anthill attacked by flamethrowers. Some of the visible oncoming trajectories could be seen snaking overhead into the indigo gloom of the rear sightcurtain, perhaps fifty metres south, which met the steepfalling rock surface forty-odd metres below the observer’s eye. East and west, as far as the eye could see, perhaps some forty miles in this clear mountain air despite the debris of explosion (but cut off to west by a spur from the range) the visibility-corridor witnessed a continual  onslaught and counter-onslaught of devices. The audibility-corridor was vastly wider than that of sight; the many-pitched din, even through left ear in helm, was considerable.  p. 27

Matters do not become any clearer during a subsequent conversation between soldier H and his “next-up” B:

“But if the conceleration runs asymptotically to the Frontier, as it should if Their Time works in mirror-image, would anything ever have got over?”
“Doesn’t have to, far’s I can see—maybe it steepens a lot, then just falls back at the same angle the other Side,” said B’s voice ; “anyway, I didn’t come to talk science: I’ve news for you, if we hold out the next few seconds here: you’re Relieved.”
H felt a black inner sight-barrier beginning to engulf him, and a roaring in his ears swallowed up the noise of the bombardment. He bent double as his knees began to buckle, and regained full consciousness. He could see his replacement now, an uncertain-looking figure in prot-suit (like everybody else up here) at the far side of the bunker.
“XN 3, what orders then?” he said crisply, his pulse accelerating.
“XN 2: pick em-kit now, repeat now, rocket 3333 to VV, present tag”—holding out a luminous orange label printed with a few coarse black characters—“and proceed as ordered thence.”
H stuck up his right thumb from his fist held sideways at elbow length, in salute. It was no situation for facial gestures or unnecessary speech. “XN 3, yes, em-kit, 3333 rocket, tag” (he had taken it in his left glove) “and VV orders; parting!”  p. 27-28

The story then details H’s journey away from the battle. During this we learn that time speeds up (relative to the front line) the further south he goes, something that H occasionally notes:

A minute later (five seconds only, up in his first bunker, he suddenly thought ironically and parenthetically) the next car appeared. He swung himself in just as a very queerlooking purple bird with a long bare neck alighted on the stoat-lizards’ tree-fern. The cable-car sped down above the ravines and hollows, the violet southern curtain backing still more swiftly away from it. As the time-gradient became less steep his brain began to function better and a sense of well-being and meaningfulness grew in him. The car’s speed slackened.  p. 31

As H gets further and further away from the front (and the relative time differential increases), we see other changes too: the flora and fauna change from prehistoric to modern day, electronic communication becomes easier, and the “sightlines” recede further into the distance (these are caused by the red- and blue-shift of visible light due to the time differences north and south). Another unexplained change is that H’s name begins to lengthen, first to Had, and then to Hadol and, after a couple more changes, to Hadolarisóndamo.
Eventually he reaches a town and is prepared for civilian life:

Some hours later the train arrived at Veruam by the North-Eastern Sea. Thirty miles long, forty storeys high, and 500 metres broad north-south, it was an imposing city. Nothing but plain was to be seen in the outskirts, for the reddish fog still obliterated everything about four miles to the north, and the bluish one smothered the view southward some seven. A well-fed Hadolaris visited one of the city’s Rehabilitation Advisors, for civilian techniques and material resources had advanced enormously since his last acquaintance with them, and idioms and speech-sounds had changed bewilderingly, while the whole code of social behaviour was terrifyingly different. Armed with some manuals, a pocket recorder, and some standard speechform and folkway tapes, he rapidly purchased thin clothing, stormwear, writing implements, further recording tools, lugbags and other personal gear. After a night at a good guestery, Hadolaris sought interviews with the employing offices of seven subtropical development agencies, was tested and, armed with seven letters of introduction, boarded the night liner rocktrain for the south past the shore of the North-Eastern Sea and to Oluluetang some 360 miles south. One of the tailors who had fitted him up had revealed that on quiet nights very low-pitched rumblings were to be heard from, presumably, the mountains northward. Hadolaris wanted to get as far from that North as he conveniently could.
He awoke among palms and savannah-reeds. There was no sign of either sight-barrier down here.  p. 35

Hadolarisóndamo eventually settles down hundreds of miles away from the front line, marries, and has three children. Then, one day at work, after twenty years away from the front line (spoiler), the military police come for him—he has been recalled to duty. On his railway journey back to the front line Haldolaris (his name starts contracting again) calculates that only twenty minutes will have passed at the front line by the time he returns.
When he finally arrives back at the bunker he sees that his replacement is dead, killed by a new enemy weapon. H then realises that the weapon is identical to one his own side has just started using—at which point he has an epiphany about the war, and who the enemy may be.
This a highly original, dense, and intellectually engaging piece, and a very impressive debut story.
A Dip in the Swimming-Pool Reactor is the second part of the Bill the Galactic Hero serial by Harry Harrison which started last issue (no reason is given for the title change), and it starts with Bill arriving by spaceship at the centre of the Empire:

“Bowbidy-bowb! Look at that! “ Bill felt elated as their ship broke through the clouds and there, spread before them, was the gleaming golden sphere of Helior, the Imperial Planet, the ruling world of 10,000 suns.
“What an albedo,” the gunner grunted from somewhere inside his plastic face. “Hurts the eye.
“I should hope so! Solid gold—can you imagine—a planet plated with solid gold?!”
“No, I can’t imagine. And I don’t believe it either. It would cost too much. But I can imagine one covered with anodized aluminium. Like that one.”  p. 45

Of course, we soon find that things are not as they seem:

The gleaming upper level was dotted with space ships of all sizes, while the dark sky twinkled with others arriving and departing. Closer and closer swam the scene, then there was a sudden burst of light and the window went dark.
“We crashed! “Bill gasped. “Good as dead . . .”
“Shut your wug. That was just the film what broke. Since there’s no brass on this run they won’t bother fixing it.”
“Film—?”
“What else? Are you so ratty in the head you think they’re going to build shuttleships with great big windows in the nose just where the maximum friction on re-entry will burn holes in them? A film. Back projection. For all we know it’s nighttime here.”  p. 46

Bill later receives his medal at an awards ceremony presided over by a fake Emperor. After this, Bill goes sightseeing, and visits the roof of the planetary city before going to the legendary Hanging Gardens. When he falls asleep in the gardens, his guidebook/map is stolen, and losing your guidebook on Helior is not only inconvenient (it is impossible to find your way around otherwise) but, like a number of other things, is also a capital offence.
Bill eventually arrives back at the transit camp eight days late, and is then arrested for impersonating himself (he has supposedly shipped out according to the erroneous admin records). Deathwish Drang is one if the two MPs who arrive to take him into custody and, at that point, Bill runs for it.
The rest of the instalment charts Bill’s descent down through the city until he eventually reaches the surface of the planet.3 During this journey he becomes involved in various shenanigans including a criminal gang’s thefts, a sanitation department overwhelmed by the amount of waste the planet produces, and a resistance movement that ultimately proves to have more spies in its membership than conspirators.
This second instalment begins well but it flags a little towards the end. It is not as good, or funny, as the first part, and is more obviously episodic as well.

The Pleasure Garden of Felipe Sagittarius by Michael Moorcock has Minos Aquilinas, a “Metatemporal Investigator” arriving in an alternative Berlin to investigate a murder. (Bismarck is the Police Chief in this world, and various other historical characters appear in other roles: Hitler is a Captain of Uniformed Detectives; Einstein and Stalin also appear.)
Aquilinas discovers the murder occurred in a strange garden owned by Otto Bismarck and, after he examines the body (and finds that it has paper lungs), he talks to Sagittarius, the gardener:

I looked out at the weird garden. “Why does it interest you—what’s all this for? You’re not doing it to his orders, are you? You’re doing it for yourself.”
Sagittarius smiled bleakly. “You are astute.” He waved an arm at the warm foliage that seemed more reptilian than plant and more mammalian, in its own way, than either.
“You know what I see out there? I see deep-sea canyons where lost submarines cruise through a silence of twilit green, threatened by the waving tentacles of predators, halffish, half-plant, and watched by the eyes of long-dead mermen whose blood went to feed their young; where squids and rays fight in a graceful dance of death, clouds of black ink merging with clouds of red blood, drifting to the surface, sipped at by sharks in passing, where they will be seen by mariners leaning over the rails of their ships; maddened, the mariners will fling themselves overboard to sail slowly towards those distant plant-creatures already feasting on the corpse of squid and ray. This is the world I can bring to the land—that is my ambition.”
He stared at me, paused, and said: “My skull—it’s like a monstrous gold-fish bowl!”  p. 105-106

In the rest of this (more straightforwardly told) story, Aquilinas discovers that Bismarck has a lover called Eva, and later meets Captain Hitler. The pair eventually end up in a bar run by a man called Weill (presumably Kurt Weill, the Jewish composer; Alfred Einstein also briefly features here as one of the customers). Aquilinas discovers more about the case, and the piece eventually resolves with (spoiler) the revelation that the murdered man is Stalin (and Eva’s jilted lover), who was killed by the plants when he broke into the gardens to attack Bismarck.
The plot isn’t entirely lucid or convincing, but the pleasure in this one is the strange setting, and the use of known historical figures in other roles.

At the End of Days by Robert Silverberg is a short mood piece about an old man mulling the end of Earth’s civilisation who receives a child visitor from another part of the Galaxy. The child states he traveled by a process called “quadrature” and, after he leaves, the old man realises that humanity’s time may not be over:

The wind had grown colder. Old Narin rose to go inside. The sun had set; the lulls were dark, and grey clouds hung in the blackening sky. But, bright as a billion candles, the stars were beginning to shine.  p. 117

A reverse The Nine Billion Names of God ending.

The ghastly Cover is another one of those uncredited photographic agency transparencies that blighted the SF paperbacks of the late 1960s and early 1970s; I suppose they seemed modern at the time.
There are two pieces of Interior artwork in this issue: Harry Douthwaite’s is the best I’ve seen from him so far, and it complements the strangeness of the Masson story well. The other piece is by James Cawthorn.
At the end of the issue there is Brian Aldiss, a longer essay about the writer by Peter White. This opens with comments about how much SF fails because it is not truly contemporary (an arguable proposition at best), and notes that Ballard and Aldiss are two exceptions:

Aldiss has not always been this kind of artist, for his aims have changed somewhat since he began writing, and it is possible to follow this development in his work. He is blazing a trail that leads away from science fiction as it is today: away from the contrived action of the sf thriller, and the contrived problems of the sf brain-teaser, towards a more serious—and more fully entertaining—form of writing. He says himself: “At first, in the Space, Time and Nathaniel era, I just wanted to be clever. Now I want to try and get an insight into life. I still want to be clever too . . .  p. 118

I’ve always thought that, during the mid-1960s, that Aldiss was in transition between his more conventional early work and his later literary and experimental output. White notes this too:

Aldiss’s work has moved in idiosyncratic jumps, and he occasionally produces work today that is similar to his earliest material.  p. 119

White also makes several other observations in this interesting article:

[His] style is not without its faults; puns and aphoristic clichés often intrude into the most serious passages.  p. 119
.
[Aldiss] has also said that many of his early works were therapeutic fantasies, in which he worked off his petty neuroses. In stories such as Outside and The New Father Christmas there is an almost hysterical sense of isolation and ennui. Dumb Show is the best of these, and must be amongst the most lyrical horror stories written. Aldiss claims to have run out of phobias around the time of Space, Time and Nathaniel, and is now concerned with writing itself—art, if you like—rather than self-therapy.  p. 120
.
He is now literary editor of the Oxford Mail, which takes up most of his time, though he does like sitting and chatting in bars. Although an unhappy private life has undoubtedly influenced his work, he remains a generally extrovert personality, and particularly enjoys travelling abroad.  p. 121-122

Story Ratings No. 152 was discussed in that issue.4
The Books column in this issue contains two essays by Michael Moorcock. An Outstanding Space Story begins, suitably enough, with a review of Non-Stop by Brian W. Aldiss:

An example of what the space story can do in the hands of a really good writer is the recently re-issued Non-Stop by Brian W. Aldiss (Faber Paperback, 7s. 6d.). I first read this when it appeared in 1958 and thought it excellent. Today I am possibly more critical of sf than I was then. I still find Non-Stop excellent. Here the space setting contributes to the atmosphere of loss and bewilderment experienced by the characters. It is completely gripping on a second reading and the writing and characterisation is outstanding in the sf field.  p. 123

He follows this with a short review of Best SF Four by Edmund Crispin (“To the new reader many of [the stories] should be very entertaining. Personally I found the collection only average in general standard”), before briefly mentioning New Writings in SF 3 by John Carnell, and panning Colin Kapp’s The Dark Mind:

Kapp is heavily in debt to Alfred Bester’s Tiger, Tiger! in this novel. His visual imagination is above average but his handling of character and dialogue is poor in the extreme and his technique, where it is his own, does not match his imagination or his ability to come up with convincing scientific ideas. One is inclined to feel that the author should spend much more time studying his craft before attempting his next novel.  p. 124

The second essay, Cutting Past the Defences, examines The Drought by J. G. Ballard:

This is a novel which is hard to review in the normal reviewer’s terms. It effects one like an hallucinogenic drug and although plot and characterisation are there, the visions dominate. It has ceased to rain, cities burn, rivers and lakes evaporate, the earth turns to desert and, still living in his houseboat, Dr. Ransom contemplates the true meaning of the change, fails to communicate its significance to the others with whom he comes in contact—Philip Jordan the wild Swan Youth, Catherine Austen who identifies herself with the lions she releases from the zoo, Lomax the sinister, mocking dandy, Miranda his depraved sister and Quilter the deformed half-wit.
[. . .]
Quilter, like all the characters but Ransom himself, are creatures of fantasy; not of fantasy fiction, but the deep, archetypal fantasies which form a mutual link between us all.  p. 125

Letters to the Editor has three letters, two of which are from writers: Edward Mackin praises Tubb’s novel, and John Brunner outlines the genesis of this novel The Whole Man (the details of this are in my review of the previous issue5). The main event is the letter from P. Johnson (above) supporting the “Anything goes” policy.

A must-get issue.  ●

_____________________

1. Graham Hall says that Aldiss’s Girl and Robot with Flowers is “an over-esoteric non-SF tale”, and that it “sets out to show the failure of SF to come to grips with life—and does it quite successfully, although it is over personalised.” He says the second story does “not [show] off the best of Aldiss’s talent”.
Masson’s Traveller’s Rest “constructs a very unusual and peculiar world where time ratios vary by latitude”. It is “a very interesting story” that “is well written for a first story and is one of the most original ideas in recent issues”.
Hall doesn’t know if the Colvin’s (Moorcock’s) “very experimental/straight piece [. . .] comes off or not, because I don’t understand what Mr Colvin was trying to do.”
The Harrison serial “continues in its admirable vein”, and the Silverberg vignette is “poor”.
Hall briefly mentions the non-fiction material before concluding that this is “a disappointing issue after some recent ones”.

2. Masson’s Traveller’s Rest is the only story from New Worlds that made it into both the American ‘Best SF of the Year’ volumes. (Masson’s Traveller’s Rest, Vernor Vinge’s Apartness and Arthur C. Clarke’s reprint Sunjammer made it into the Wollheim/Carr volume, there were no stories from Science Fantasy. Masson’s Traveller’s Rest also appeared in the Merril volume for 1965 along with New Worlds stories from E. C. Tubb and David Rome, and Science Fantasy stories from A. K. Jorgennson, Josephine Saxton, Keith Roberts, and Johnny Byrne.)

3. I suspect this instalment of Bill is largely a parody of Asimov’s The Caves of Steel.

4. No story ratings for this issue appeared in future volumes—it looks as if the ratings for #153 were the last to be published.

5. The details about the origins of The Whole Man are in this review, footnote 4.  ●

rssrss

New Worlds SF #153, August 1965

ISFDB
Luminist

Other reviews:1
Graham Hall, Vector #34 (August 1965)

_____________________

Editor, Michael Moorcock; Assistant Editor, Langdon Jones

Fiction:
Bill, the Galactic Hero (Part 1 of 3) • serial by Harry Harrison ∗∗∗∗
The Source • short story by Brian W. Aldiss
And Worlds Renewed • short story by George Collyn
The Pulse of Time • short story by W. T. Webb
By the Same Door • short story by Mack Reynolds
Preliminary Data • short story by Michael Moorcock
Songflower • short story by Kenneth Hoare

Non-fiction:
Cover
Interior artwork • by Harry Harrison
An Effective Use of Space • editorial by Michael Moorcock
Dr Peristyle • question column by Brian W. Aldiss
Story Ratings 151
Book reviews • by Michael Moorcock [as by James Colvin], Ron Bennett, and Hilary Bailey

_____________________

This issue sees even more of a mix of fiction types than hitherto—we have parodic comedy from Harrison, traditional SF from Collyn and Hoare, horror from Webb, and more progressive work from Aldiss and Moorcock.

Bill, the Galactic Hero by Harry Harrison is the first part of the eponymous novel (the second and third parts have different titles rather than “part 2” or “part 3” for some reason), and it is initially a parody of futuristic military adventure SF (I suspect, in particular, Robert A. Heinlein’s Starship Troopers2).
The story opens with our hero Bill ploughing a field with a robomule on Phigerinadon II when a military recruitment parade comes along the road. Bill follows the procession into the village and is soon manipulated into joining the army by underhand means (ego-reducing drugs dissolved in the free drinks, and hypno-coils that control his body movements). He marches away to a camp, and the next day meets his instructor:

 “I am here to break your spirit,” a voice rich with menace told them, and they looked up and shivered even more as they faced the chief demon in this particular hell.
Petty Chief Officer Deathwish Drang was a specialist from the tips of the angry spikes of his hair to the corrugated stamping-soles of his mirrorlike boots. He was wide-shouldered and lean-hipped, while his long arms hung, curved like those of some horrible anthropoid, the knuckles of his immense fists scarred from the breaking of thousands of teeth. It was impossible to look at this detestable form and imagine that it issued from the tender womb of a woman. He could never have been born; he must have been built to order by the government. Most terrible of all was the head. The face! The hairline was scarcely a finger’s width above the black tangle of the brows that were set like a rank growth of foliage at the rim of the black pits that concealed the eyes—visible only as baleful red gleams in the Stygian darkness. A nose, broken and crushed, squatted above the mouth that was like a knife slash in the taut belly of a corpse, while from between the lips issued the great, white fangs of the canine teeth, at least two inches long, that rested in grooves on the lower lip.  p. 10-11

The story then describes Bill’s basic training, which includes some very funny set pieces, such another recruit’s account of why humanity is at war with the Chingers, supposedly a race of seven-foot high saurian aliens (but see the later passage):

“The Chingers are the only non-human race that has been discovered in the galaxy that has gone beyond the aboriginal level, so naturally we have to wipe them out.”
“What the hell do you mean, naturally? I don’t want to wipe anyone out. I just want to go home and be a Technical Fertilizer Operator.”
“Well, I don’t mean you personally, of course—gee!”
Eager opened a fresh can of polish with purple-stained hands and dug his fingers into it. “I mean the human race, that’s just the way we do things. If we don’t wipe them out they’ll wipe us out. Of course they say that war is against their religion and they will only fight in defence, and they have never made any attacks yet. But we can’t believe them, even though it is true. They might change their religion or their minds some day, and then where would we be? The best answer is to wipe them out now.”  p. 14-15

On completion of his training, Bill is assigned to a spaceship, and he has various adventures: one of his comrades turns out to be a spy (he/it is a robot operated by a seven inch high Chinger); and then Bill experiences his first interstellar flight:

“We’re moving,” [Tembo] said positively, “and going interstellar too. They’ve turned on the star-drive.”
“You mean we are breaking through into sub-space and will soon experience the terrible wrenching at every fibre of our being?”
“No, they don’t use the old sub-space drive any more, because though a lot of ships broke through into sub-space with a fibre-wrenching jerk, none of them have yet broke back out. I read in the Trooper’s Times where some mathematician said that there had been a slight error in the equations and that time was different in sub-space, but it was different faster not different slower, so that it will be maybe forever before those ships come out.”
“Then we’re going into hyper-space?”
“No such thing.”
“Or we’re being dissolved into our component atoms and recorded in the memory of a giant computor who thinks we are somewhere else so there we are?”
“Wow!” Tembo said, his eyebrows crawling up to his hairline. “For a Zoroastrian farm boy you have some strange ideas! Have you been smoking or drinking something I don’t know about?”  p. 44

The next few chapters largely focus on a space battle with the Chingers and its aftermath; Bill is a hero during the engagement, and he later recovers from his injuries in the hospital:

[The doctor] unclipped the wires that held up Bill’s arm and began to unwind the bandages while the troopers crowded around to watch.
“How is my arm, Doc?” Bill was suddenly worried.
“Grilled like a chop. I had to cut it off.”
“Then what is this?” Bill shrieked, horrified.
“Another arm that I sewed on. There were lots of them left over after the battle. The ship had over 42 per cent casualties, and I was really cutting and chopping and sewing, I tell you.”
The last bandage fell away and the troopers ahhhed with delight.
“Say, that’s a mighty fine arm!”
“Make it do something.”
“And a damn nice seam there at the shoulder—look how neat the stitches are!”
“Plenty of muscles, too, and good and long, not like the crummy little short one he has on the other side.”
“Longer and darker—that’s a great skin colour!”
“It’s Tembo’s arm!” Bill howled. “Take it away!” He squirmed across the bed but the arm came after him. They propped him up again on the pillows.
“You’re a lucky bowb, Bill, having a good arm like that. And your buddy’s arm too.”
“We know that he wanted you to have it.”
“You’ll always have something to remember him by.”
It really wasn’t a bad arm. Bill bent it and flexed the fingers, still looking at it suspiciously. It felt all right. He reached out with it and grabbed a trooper’s arm and squeezed. He could feel the man’s bones grating together while he screamed and writhed. Then Bill looked closer at the hand and began to shout curses at the doctor.
“You stupid sawbones! You thoat doctor! Some big job—this is a right arm!”
“So it’s a right arm—so what?”
“But you cut off my left arm! Now I have two right arms . . .”
“Listen, there was a shortage of left arms. I’m no miracle worker. I do my best and all I get are complaints. Be happy I didn’t sew on a leg.” He leered evilly. “Or even better I didn’t sew on a . . .”  p. 57-58

This installment has a strong start and finish, even if the middle part is more light adventure than comedy, and it’s a very good start to the issue.

The Source by Brian W. Aldiss has a blurb (see above) which filled me with a feeling of foreboding that was subsequently borne out.
The story starts with a detachment of “Seekers”—they travel throughout the Galaxy looking for man’s greatest achievement—who have recently arrived on a ruined, primitive Earth.
One of the Seekers, Kervis, and his year wife Ysis, take a car and travel away from camp. During this Kervis starts seeing visions of Ysis as an old crone. After a few pages of this kind of thing, Kervis stops the car and gets out, sheds his clothes and wanders off alone through the undergrowth. He eventually comes upon a group of primitives who have Ysis with them, and the pair then go on until they come to a building. Here Kervis wanders through various passages, and is again separated from Ysis. He eventually comes upon what he thinks is a statue of a beast holding a woman and, when he realises the woman is real, he frees her from the beast. Kervis later experiences a mystical event.
At the end (spoiler maybe, but probably not), Kervis and Ysis return to camp, where he is relieved of his command by the other Seekers. The expedition leaves but Kervis stays behind—he has apparently fulfilled his destiny.
This is all rather baffling, and pretty boring as well.
And Worlds Renewed by George Collyn gets off to a clunky data-dump beginning despite its Ballardesque chapter titles:

The two men could not have been more different.
There was Junter Firmole—rock-hard, ruthless, intolerant, ambitious, homicidal and leading entrepreneur in an era of cut-throat trade. Perhaps to his grandchildren he would appear as white-haired, lovable and gentle. To the peoples of Humankind he was an ogre with which to frighten naughty children; a man of blood who drank his wine from a human skull.
Then there was Nefo Setiri, environmental artist—an absent-minded and obsessed visionary with as much financial acumen as a two-week-old child. Twenty years would pass before he would reach his creative peak in the formulation of the Pleasure Worlds of Ilgadin with Hi Li City—his masterpiece—at their spangled heart. At the time of which I speak he had attempted nothing greater than continental construction—the remodelling of Antarctica was his graduation test-piece at the Slade. Nor, at that time, did he seem destined for greatness, since the range of his creative imagination was so undisciplined that those patrons who had planetary commissions in their gift fought shy of his genius.
Yeman Sorl, dictator of Tramoth and first prospective patron, laughed in Setiri’s face where he would have crawled on his belly to Firmole, and the elaborate blueprints for the remodelling of the Tramoth worlds hit the dictatorial cigars for a twelve-month.

After several goes at that last sentence I’m still not sure what it means.
The story goes on to tell of Setiri’s capture by space pirates, who send him to a labour camp on a planet when he can’t pay the ransom. While he works there he takes artistic exception to the way that the planet is being reshaped and, after managing to catch the visiting Firmole’s eye, manages to convince him that he could make a better job. Setiri gets the commission:

Setiri intended a work in three textures—climate, vegetation and physical configuration. The finished work to be a range of intensity across a spectrum from limpid water-soft to sun-baked hard.
In climate the planet would shade from insufferably hot at the equator to temperately cool at the poles; with no precipitation at the former but perpetual rain at the latter.
The poles would be seas of permanent water with no island or peninsula to impinge upon their liquidity. At 10° latitude this would shade into a sheer insubstantiality of marshlands, a morass that would spread across thirty degrees of latitude. This would then give way slowly to two belts, each of twenty degrees; the first of tropical rain forest, the second of prairie grasslands. The central belt, stretching ten degrees north and south of the equator would be raw ochrous desert and each hemisphere would mirror the other.
The seas would necessarily be flat; the swamps interspersed by isolated hillocks; the forest clothing square-cut plateaux ; the prairies, rolling hills of grass ; but the desert would be a region of soaring mountains and plummeting canyons—a wasteland in all three levels.  p. 81-82

While Setiri completes the project he prevents Firmole from visiting the works by use of a force field and, when the latter later arrives at the opening ceremony, it looks as if he is going to denounce the work. However (spoiler), Firmole’s daughter approves of it and then, when a particular angle of sunlight catches the planet, Firmole sees his own face momentarily etched on the planet’s surface.
A neat ending.
The Pulse of Time by W. T. Webb opens with a cardiac consultant called Humbolt who is visited at home by a man who wants him to come to attend to his employer. Even though Humbolt isn’t told the employer’s name, or where he lives, he gets in a chauffeur driven car and goes.
When Humbolt arrives at the house of “Mr X”, he meets a very old man who, as they chat, shows him a variety of curios, culminating with (spoiler) photos of an alien visitor to Earth, etc.
This unlikely and unconvincing set up is for a striking final image:

Mr. X opened the door, entered the small room beyond it and switched on the light. On one wall Humbolt saw a clock-face rising above a cabinet made of flesh-coloured plastic. Mr. X opened the doors of the cabinet to reveal several glass globes joined together by transparent tubes. A red liquid circulated round the tubes and the globes and in and out of the clock-face. And the largest of the globes contained something that to him was horribly familiar.
“As you see,” said Mr. X. “This clock has a human heart for a mainspring. It is not keeping good time. And I would like your advice on how to correct it.”
Humbolt felt outraged. As a student he had often seen the heart of a chicken or a goat kept alive artificially. But this . . .
“You monster!” he said to Mr. X. “Don’t you realise that I am fully aware that this heart must have been cut out of a living person?”
By way of reply Mr. X opened the lapels of his dressing gown to reveal a thorax made of transparent plastic. Within it, immersed in colourless oil, a mass of machinery of alien design, worked rhythmically and constantly, like the mechanism of a clock.  p. 94

This struck me as the kind of story you might find in the Pan or Fontana series of horror anthologies.
By the Same Door by Mack Reynolds opens with a man visiting a business which provides transfers to alternative worlds. He asks to be sent to one where they openly discuss the secret perversion alluded to in many books and magazines of his world but which is never described.
The man gets his wish, and the story concludes appropriately (spoiler: the reader is still in a universe where the secret perversion is mentioned but not described).
I saw the end coming about three paragraphs ahead, but there is a neat irony to it that made me smile.

Preliminary Data by Michael Moorcock is the first of his long running ‘Jerry Cornelius’ series, and opens with Jerry and a Brahmin physicist called Professor Hira discussing, at length, the cosmology of various religions, concluding with comments on the cyclical nature of time:

“Then at the end of the manvantara the cycle repeats itself, does it? The whole of history all over again!”
“Some believe so. Others believe that the cycles vary slightly. It is basically an extension of our convictions concerning reincarnation. The strange thing is that modern physics begins to confirm these figures—in terms of the complete revolution of the galaxy and so on. I must admit that the more I read of the papers published these days, the more confused I become between what I was taught as a Hindu and what I have learned as a physicist. It requires an increasing amount of self-discipline to separate them in my mind.”
“Why do you bother?”
“My career, old man, at the University, would suffer if I let mysticism influence logic.” The Brahmin spoke with some irony and Cornelius smiled.  p. 99

There is a more of this before the story breaks and picks up with both men in bed together (possibly a first in a UK SF magazine). The men discuss a Mrs Brunner. When Cornelius later goes home to his wife Maj-Britt in Sweden, Brunner is there waiting for him. After a tense stand-off Brunner kidnaps Cornelius and Maj-Britt, and takes them to her secret cave-lab in Lapland, where they meet Professor Hira. “G-day” is discussed.
The rest of the story isn’t entirely clear—at some point Jerry undergoes a process that leaves him feeling “totally alive”, policemen turn up and the mouth of the cave, and then, in the ensuing struggle, Jerry is shot. Then he (or his spirit?) watches as Brunner give a speech to the assembled scientists about project DUEL:

“DUEL’s purpose was two-fold, as you know. The first job was to feed it the sum total of human knowledge and have it systemise and relate this knowledge into a single unified integer. This was at last achieved three days ago and I congratulate you.
“It is the second part which mystified most of you. The technical problem of how to feed this programme directly into a human brain was overcome with the help of notes donated by Doctor Leslie Baxter, the psycho-biologist. But what sort of brain could accept such a fantastic programme? That question is answered as I answer the question you have all been asking. DUEL’s ultimate use is to satisfy an aim which, whether we realised it or not, has been the ultimate aim of all human endeavour since homo sapiens first evolved. It is a simple aim and we are near achieving it. We have been working, ladies and gentlemen, to produce an all-purpose human being! A human-being equipped with total knowledge, hermaphrodite in every respect—self-fertilising and thus self-regenerating—and thus immortal, re-creating itself over and over again, retaining its knowledge and adding to it. In short, ladies and gentlemen, we are creating a being which our ancestors would have called a god!”  p. 109-110

Cornelius and Brunner are then combined by DUEL to become that god-like hermaphrodite. It gathers a huge mob of people which surges around Europe before finally rushing lemming-like into the Atlantic. Cornelius Brunner is the only survivor.
The first half of this story could have been shorter, and I didn’t understand exactly what happened after the shooting, so I found the story’s mix of the contemporary, the bizarre, and the comic only partially successful. It is notable, perhaps, as the first in the long-running series, and for its thematic experimentation and formerly taboo content (the bisexuality of Cornelius, and the hermaphrodism).

Songflower by Kenneth Hoare is marred by a couple of clumsy sentences on the first page3 but turns out to be a colourful if slight tale about a spacer who goes on a pub crawl with an alien friend. The spacer later buys a singing plant from one of the natives, who cooks him a meal first:

[The Terran] led the way through the shop, dusty despite the air conditioning, and into the room beyond. The contrast was so great that Alec drew in his breath in surprise. The walls were lined with fine scarlet fibres, shining in the light of an artificial sun, dimmed to the rich glow of an autumn evening. On the walls hung relics of many different cultures. On the carved chests that stood by the walls and on shelves by the old-fashioned electric fire, leaping and crackling with blue-white flames, stood bowls of plants.
Hundreds of exotic varieties were contained in that room, some in gastight containers to reproduce the conditions of their native planets. Some were tiny and starlike, others huge and fleshy in great stripes of contrasting colour. There were feathery water plants and spiky desert blooms. Representations of flowers in a dozen different art-forms stood or hung about the room.
“Flowers are my greatest interest,” said Fred, “but I think you will find that I do not neglect the provision of a proper cuisine.”
The change in the little Terran was very noticeable. He seemed to expand like one of his flowers in the exotic atmosphere of the room. The effect was enhanced when he shrugged off his drab street jacket and pulled on a scalloped robe designed for a Dafnian batrachian.
They sat down at a table constructed from the flat shell of some turtle-like creature. After a moment a robot appeared in answer to Ellington’s signal, carrying a tray loaded with food in each of its four hands, and proceeded to set out the food.
An hour later, Alec declined another drink. “Not another mouthful. I really couldn’t.”  p. 118

The mediocre Cover is uncredited, and there is much less Interior artwork than normal—just a single illustration by Harry Harrison. Budgetary constraints, I presume.
An Effective Use of Space by Michael Moorcock mostly discusses this issue’s contents:

We decided to run Harry Harrison’s new novel as a serial for several reasons. The main reason, of course, is that the book is as generous a piece of unpretentious entertainment as we have read for a long time. Another reason was because it fitted well into our editorial policy, illustrating how the space story can be used effectively to make a serious point in a light-hearted way.
[. . .]
Preliminary Data is something of an experiment, an example, if you like, of the anarchic approach to SF story-telling, all we ask is that you take it in the spirit the author intended and don’t take it too seriously—further episodes should fill you in.
We felt that this month was a good time, too, to begin the first of Dr. Peristyle’s columns answering readers’ queries on SF. The pungent and forthright gentleman made his debut in Vector, Journal of the BSFA, but we felt his opinions deserved a wider airing and invited him to contribute to New Worlds.

Moorcock also mentions that John Brunner’s The Whole Man (UK title Telepathist)4 is on the forthcoming Hugo ballot, and plugs a number of seemingly anarachic publications from Future City Press (“The issue of Amazing Rayday we have to hand at first seems to be a wild effusion of unrelated words, drawings and photographs, but a closer look shows that this publication has a hysterical logic of its own.”)

The Dr Peristyle column is uncredited, but I discovered5 that these were written by Brian W. Aldiss. The plan announced in the editorial is that this will alternate with the letter column (it turns out that this was the first of only three columns which would appear).
The questions get arch, eclectic answers (there is another example in the image above):

David E. Mortimer
Assuming SF is written by technically advanced countries, did the Arabs write SF or something like it when they led the world in mathematics and astronomy?
.
Interesting question. Frankly I don’t know the answer, learned though I am; I suspect it to be buried below the desert sand, so that some Abdul Anderson, some Mohammed Moorcock, is forever lost to us. But evolution rather than technology is the real power behind SF, for it provides a speculative dimension to work in. And isn’t SF essentially a city literature? Who ever wrote it in a tent?  p. 122

The Story Ratings 151 were discussed in the review of that issue.6
The Book reviews come from three people: Michael Moorcock, Ron Bennett, and Hilary Bailey. Moorcock opens with a useful review7 of The Old Die Rich by H. L. Gold:

H. L. Gold was perhaps the most incisive editor ever to produce an SF magazine, on matters of technique he knew the craft of SF writing inside out and the fact that he rewrote a considerable portion of the material published in Galaxy under his editorship earned him many writers’ gratitude rather than their chagrin. I personally know several writers who feel they owe their present knowledge of technique to Gold’s pungent comments on what he rejected and his doctoring of what he accepted. Some feel that this resulted, in the end, in a magazine that contained craftsmanly but characterless stories—stories, in fact, with too much ironed out. What is sometimes said of the last years of Galaxy under Gold’s editorship might also apply to his own work and one is inclined to feel that if he never wrote a bad story, he never wrote a brilliant one, either.  p. 124

Moorcock later adds that Gold was the master of the twist ending and one of the first modern SF writers to make it his trademark. He concludes by stating that the volume contains the “quintessence of a certain kind of slick, clever SF writing,” but that it doesn’t have the seriousness of intention that newer writers “like Aldiss, Ballard, Vonnegut—or even Moorcock” exhibit. So? Do all writers need to produce serious work?
Moorcock also reviews New Writings in SF 4 by John Carnell ( “the undemanding reader who is happy with fresh twists on old themes will find plenty worth reading”).
Ron Bennett reviews The Joyous Invasions by Theodore Sturgeon, and Hilary Bailey seems pleased enough with routine sounding stuff from John Lymington, Rick Raphael, and L. P. Davies.

This is worth getting for the first part of the Harrison novel, but the rest is middling stuff.  ●

_____________________

1. Graham Hall enjoyed Harrison’s “rollicking parody”, which he thought stands “head and shoulders above most of the SF [. . .] published in the past few years.” He adds:

Harrison proves that his faster-than-light writing pace can be adapted from the tension of Deathworld to the humorous mockery of the military-galactic novel. Such characters as Petty Chief Officer Deathwish Drang, the Rev. Tembo, Eager Beager and Bill himself will go down in SF’s Hall of Fame—but one word of warning: Heinlein fans—it’s illegal to assault anybody, including American SF writers inhabiting Denmark.  p. 16

The Aldiss is “a let-down” but paradoxically “worth reading”; Collyn’s story is less experimental but more to Hall’s taste; Webb’s “isn’t far from the conventional horror story”; Reynold’s vignette is infuriating but stuck in his memory.
Hall says this about the Moorcock and Hoare pieces:

I’ll steer clear of [Preliminary Data], not wishing to show my ignorance by under or overestimating it. Apart from becoming terribly confused in the first few pages, I enjoyed it. No more will I say.
The idea behind Songflower is rather good, and the vividness of the writing certainly lifts it above the normal. I have a feeling that Kenneth Hoare may be a pen-name for a more established writer.  p. 16

2. I haven’t read Starship Troopers as I didn’t get very far with Robert Heinlein in my youth. Part of this was due to my struggle with Stranger in a Strange Land (I got fed up of the lectures halfway through and gave up), and a sub-optimal sampling of his other work (Glory Road was okay, as were Double Star, Waldo & Magic Inc., etc. but nothing made me want to read further). I note on consulting my bookshelves that I also read The Best of Robert A. Heinlein but remember little of it (apart from Crooked House and Zombies).
I enjoy Heinelin’s work more nowadays, funnily enough—I’ve recently read Jonathan Hoag, The Roads Must Roll, Waldo, Goldfish Bowl, etc. and enjoyed all of them to a greater or lesser extent.

3. As for the clumsy sentences in the first page of Hoare’s Sunflower, in my opinion, “They made planetfall soon after dawn at the capital”, would be better as “They made planetfall at the capital soon after dawn.” And “As Alec walked along by his scaly green flanks, 7 was bumbling away happily to himself” should be “As Alec walked alongside 7’s scaly green flanks, [7/the alien/the creature] bumbled away happily to himself.” Both p. 114.

4. Brunner describes the genesis of The Whole Man/Telepathist in the letter column of the next issue, #154:

The review Langdon Jones gave to Telepathist is so kind I hate having to point out that there are a couple of facts he got wrong. He says: ‘The book consists of three short stories dating from 1958 to 1959’. Actually it doesn’t. There were only two Gerry Howson yarns—novelettes—published confusingly under three titles, of which the second, disapproved of by the American magazine editor, survives as the title of the American edition of this final book: The Whole Man. Of these, the first has dwindled to pp. 143-159, twenty thousand words compressed into about four. That was City of the Tiger. The other, completely rewritten, is sandwiched around it to make Book Three, ‘Mens’—except that barring p. 115 the whole of the first  seventeen chapters are original material: i.e., the first two Books and part of the third as well.  p. 127

Both of the novelettes (City of the Tiger and The Whole Man) appeared in the Carnell edited Science Fantasy (#32 & #34) and were then reprinted in the USA (in Fantastic Universe, November and December 1959; The Whole Man was retitled Curative Telepath in that latter issue).

5. David Pringle and Langdon Jones confirmed that Peristyle was Aldiss in the British Science Fiction Magazine Collectors group on Facebook, 16th September 2019.

6. The ratings for this issue appeared in #155. The Harrison is a worthy winner, but the rest of the stories are in an odd sort of order:

7. David Pringle mentioned J. G. Ballard’s review of Gold’s book in The Guardian (21st May 1965) in the British Science Fiction Magazine Collectors Group:

H. L. Gold’s collection of short stories is described as a how-to-do-it book for would-be science-fiction writers (a diminishing band), on the strength, one assumes, of the notes the author provides after each story rather than the stories themselves. Gold, the former editor of Galaxy, who established the brittle and atmospheric stories which were the magazine’s hall mark, was noted for his rejection slips—these brilliant and acid gems are far more worth publishing than his stories. Unluckily he is nowhere near so acerbic in assessing his own efforts.

It sounds like Ballard was on the receiving end of a few of those rejection slips. ●

rssrss

Anthony Boucher, A Biobibliography, by Jeffrey Marks, 2008

ISFDB
Google Play1/Amazon UK/USA

_____________________

Those readers who regularly visit this site will probably recognise the name of Anthony Boucher, either as the writer of a number of stories for John W. Campbell’s Astounding and Unknown magazines in the 1940s, or as one of the founding editors of The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction (F&SF). As I plan to rewrite some of my early reviews of that latter magazine, it seemed like a good time to read this “bibliobography” of the writer.
The book itself consists of two parts: the first is a comprehensive biography of the man and his work, the second is a straight bibliography. The first part is further subdivided into four sections: The Man, The Author, The Editor, and The Critic. We can already see from this structure that Boucher was so much more than just a writer and editor of SF, something that Gordon Van Gelder notes in his short Introduction:

What I like most about Jeffrey Marks’ thorough and much-needed biography is that it makes clear how small a part of Tony Boucher’s overall career was his work on F&SF. If I really wanted to get to know Boucher, I’d have to add to my magazine editing an additional career writing mystery novels, then spend several years writing scripts for radio dramas, and I’d also need to break some ground as a translator, help found a professional writer’s organization, and spend decades as a prominent and erudite reviewer. In my spare time, perhaps I could host a radio series like his “Great Voices” program on Pacifica, edit a series of “Best Detective Stories of the Year,” and . . .  p. 1-2

The first section, The Man, is a twenty page biographical essay which gives a broad outline of Boucher’s2 life, and it initially describes his childhood, his precocious intellect (he knew eight languages by the time he graduated), and his problems with asthma.

He met his wife (Phyllis Mary Price) while a college student at Berkley, but their relationship was initially problematic:

Phyllis found her first few dates with Boucher cognitively exhausting and wasn’t sure if she would continue dating him. However, he persisted and she finally became used to the constant banter and erudite knowledge. Her trick, she would later say, was to just enjoy it without trying to keep up with his mind.  p. 14

The rest of this section details an initially shaky career writing reviews and mystery fiction in the early 1940s—he was only able to marry Phyllis when he sold his first novel—but his financial situation improved when he started writing for radio towards the end of the 1940s. When this job ceased (he and a co-writer were let go) he moved on to editing F&SF, and also became the primary mystery reviewer for The New York Times (“His family estimated that he could read a book with full comprehension in 2 to 3 hours”).
Throughout all these multiple (and often parallel careers), Boucher had to cope with the asthma that had plagued him since childhood:

Boucher’s asthma problems hounded him all of his life. He could not make morning appointments, because in the first few hours after waking, he found it difficult to breathe. It would take several hours for Boucher to be able to get into a normal breathing pattern every day.  p. 26

Despite this, and his many other jobs (translation, book editing, etc.) and activities (politics, etc.), he also collected operatic recordings, amassing 9000 titles by the time of his death (this hobby led to another reviewing job with Opera News and a radio program). Boucher was also a parent, was a lay reader with the Catholic Church, and had an active social life—one wonders where he found the time and energy for all these activities.

The second section, The Author, describes, in detail, Boucher’s stories. Most of this concerns his mystery fiction and, to be honest, I found the discussion of this rather boring—the impression given is of far too many gimmicky locked-room stories. That said, the ‘Nick Noble’ series sounds interesting, and I may dig it out.
There is also some interesting detail about Boucher’s Rocket to the Morgue (the novel is not SF but features pulp SF writers):

Not only does Rocket to the Morgue depict the pitfalls of mystery fandom in the 1940s, the author also borrowed conversations held at the Manana Literary Society surrounding the idea of blurring the boundaries between mystery and science-fiction. Chapter three of Rocket to the Morgue contains a heated discussion over the continued segregation of science fiction and the detective story, pushing Astounding Stories’ editor John W. Campbell’s belief that the genres could not be commingled. The Campbell character, Don Stewart, is visited by Lieutenant Marshall and gives a soliloquy on how the rules of science fiction would alter any attempt to have a locked room mystery. Stewart suggests that a time machine could be used to alter the alibis, a device that Boucher would use later in his O’Breen short stories. The murderer could disassemble and reassemble himself atom by atom in the locked room. The character also discusses a method by which the character could enter the fourth dimension, enter the room, and leave by the fourth dimension again.
[. . .]
The final chapter finishes with a somber note to a fun-filled romp through the science fiction community of the 1940s. Boucher sets the final chapter on December 6, 1941, the day before Pearl Harbor’s attack. The seemingly innocent conversation between the characters is laced with the knowledge that in a few hours the United States will be at war following the Japanese attack.  p. 56-57

The third section is titled The Editor, but leads off with a potted history of Boucher’s SF writing (The Quest for St Aquin, etc.). Marks notes, as he does elsewhere, how Boucher’s liberal political ideas would occasionally find their way into his work:

Boucher used elements of civil rights in [Robinc]. The story includes some early respectful portrayals of gay men. In a time where genre fiction relegated homosexuals to victims or villains, such a move was risky; however, Boucher saw this as a part of the social justice that he championed through his writings.  p. 68

Marks also makes this more general point about Boucher’s SF:

Beyond Boucher’s passions for religion and mystery, two themes repeated throughout many of Boucher’s science-fiction works. The first was the concept of time travel, not an uncommon plot device in the genre. In a great many of his stories, Boucher looked at a society from the point-of-view of the outsider who travels to a future world. This viewpoint allowed the author to comment on the society itself and what man can become.
Given that he wrote most of his short science-fiction works during World War II, it really shouldn’t be a surprise that the other topic in many of his shorter works was totalitarian governments.  p. 69-70

Also in this supposed ‘Editor’ section is an account of Boucher’s translation work for Ellery Queen’s Mystery Magazine, which began with his work on Georges Simenon’s short stories. This did not end well:

Simenon had not been able to speak English prior to the war, but in 1945, he moved to Canada and later the United States. His English improved as he stayed here, in what some critics call his best period. His grasp of English allowed Simenon to read the translations, and he was not pleased with the results from his novels or short stories. Too much had been removed or added. Simenon switched publishers in the early 1950s to maintain more control over his translated works.
Despite his work for the French author’s reputation in the United States, Boucher had to defend himself against Simenon’s charge later that he hated the author.
.
My dear God, sir!
I have spent well over 20 years under the impression that I was one of the foremost Simenon enthusiasts & advocates in America. I have reviewed, at a fast rough count, 49 Simenon books. Out of such a large number, there are, I’ll admit, a handful that I haven’t cared much for; but my enthusiasm for the corpus of your work has been so evident that the Times selected me to write the long front-page feature article on The Bells of Bicetre last spring — which your publishers quote on the jacket of The Blue Room.  p. 74-75

There were also translations of other writers, the most famous of which was Jorge Luis Borges’ story The Garden of Forking Paths in 1948.
Also in this ‘Editor’ section is information on Boucher’s radio plays, his membership of The Baker Street Irregulars (a Sherlock Holmes society), and the founding of the Mystery Writers of America.
Eventually there is an account of Boucher’s editorship of F&SF. What did I learn from this?

1. Boucher and McComas’s initial approach to Spivak (the eventual publisher of F&SF) was in January 1946.
2. They initially had stories by John Dickson Carr and H. P. Lovecraft lined up for “Fantasy and Horror”.
3. The stories from Cleve Cartmill and Stuart Palmer in the early issues of F&SF came via Boucher’s personal friendship with the writers.
4. After many delays in launching the magazine, the suggestion to add SF to the mix came in February 1949, in a letter from general manager Joe Ferman (father of later editor Edward L. Ferman).
5. McComas had to get an advance from his sales job so he and Boucher could fly to New York from the West Coast for the 1949 launch party.
6. The first issue sold 57,000 copies.
7. F&SF’s future looked in doubt in 1953 after McComas retired. He wrote to Boucher saying:

F&SF is losing money all over the place and prognosis is for worsening, rather than improvement. JWF [Joe Ferman] blames this largely—almost solely—on our editorial job. We blame it on poor distribution. Mainly, with such matters as poor promotion . . . .  p. 110-111

8. F&SF was the first magazine “to have wrap-around cover design,” something later copied by Astounding.
9. The circumstances that led Boucher to resign as the editor of F&SF were complex:

Boucher’s continuing health problems, combined with his family’s health, along with problems at the magazine finally made him step down as editor in 1958. “I have been terribly overworked & in pretty bad health (my latest achievement has been coming down with erysipelas), & partly because Mother got much worse through a series of strokes & is now incapable of signing or even discussing anything.”
Boucher’s problems with the magazine at that point were two-fold.
First, he had a weekly column to write for The New York Times Book Review, which involved reading, critiquing, and writing about 2 to 10 books a week. Additionally, the money at The Magazine of Fantasy & Science Fiction had not improved much, although the magazine was now on sound financial footing. “Just too many damned quarrels with Ferman, mostly about money,” Boucher wrote in 1958.
The science-fiction community was saddened, but understanding, about Boucher’s decision. Isaac Asimov wrote, “Whatever is best for you, Tony,—that do. I know you have health problems and are generally overworked and I want you alive more than I want you as an editor. But how all s.f. will miss your editorial hand.”  p. 112-113

There is a final part to this ‘Editor’ section which covers Boucher’s anthologies and introductions (and also his editorship of the short lived True Crime Detective, a 1951-3 magazine published by a division of Mercury Publications, publisher of F&SF).3

The fourth and final section, The Critic, begins with his reviews for the San Francisco Chronicle and Ellery Queen’s Mystery Magazine. Here Marks points out that Boucher was a critic and not a reviewer:

Boucher’s columns were extraordinary for the way he dealt with not just the book at hand, but its place in the genre. The only way to do justice to his reviews is to let them speak for themselves. In this clip from one of his columns, he discusses the emergence of the spy novel in 1943. Obviously in the midst of world war, espionage came to the forefront of everyone’s mind, and mystery was no exception. Not only did Boucher relate the books of 1943 to previous mysteries, but he also tied the trend to world events.
.
The most interesting current phenomenon within the scope of this column is the extraordinary development of the spy novel . . . . To be exact, of 103 novels I’ve reviewed in 1943, at least 34 have had espionage or sabotage as a dominant element . . . . Spy novels were formerly the literary stepchildren of the mystery trade.

At this point Marks also provides one of the few examples in the book which shows Boucher in a bad light, which is when the Chronicle fired him for bad-mouthing the publication to other writers. The publisher’s letter was blunt:

What I want to tell you is that I’m afraid your contributions to The Chronicle’s book section had better cease. It has come to me that on more than one occasion you have expressed yourself—once quite publicly to a group of writers—as wholly dissatisfied with the arrangement you have with the paper, and while certainly you are privileged to be dissatisfied I see no sense in continuing a connection you yourself regard as unsatisfactory.
The point is not altogether whether The Chronicle’s remuneration is, as you put it to a group of people, “a pittance.” It’s rather, I think, that The Chronicle had never paid anything to contributing reviewers until the time when you replaced, temporarily, Mr. Doyle. At that time I agreed to see if a space rate couldn’t be arranged—this for the first time for anyone. Further, when Mr. Doyle returned, The Chronicle continued, at my suggestion, to pay you space for such reviews as you did in other fields—again a “first” here. Perhaps The Chronicle should do better; perhaps it shouldn’t. The point is that this department did make some arrangement to pay you something, and it does not seem to me within the bounds of propriety that while it was doing so you should express yourself publicly as you have done.
Further, it is reported to me that you stated flatly that “Chronicle reviewers” had to write “to policy.” Entirely aside from the question of just how this might enter into the reviewing of detective stories, it is a fact that the only changes ever made in any reviews you wrote for the paper were on the grounds of (a) what seemed to me to skirt perhaps too close to libel, and (b) what seemed to me to skirt too closely to the edge of good taste. Still further, I have been able to find no other Chronicle reviewers who have this complaint to make, or, for that matter, any who feel that you are authorized to speak for “Chronicle reviewers.” Again it does not seem to me proper that anyone who either feels this to be true or says publicly that it is true, should continue to do reviews for the paper.  p. 129

The rest of the section goes on to detail Boucher’s science fiction book reviews, and his eventual arrival at the big time with a job at the The New York Times Book Review as a mystery reviewer. It concludes with an overview of his opera radio programs.
The bibliographic part of the book finishes with The end and beyond, which tells of Boucher’s death in early 1968:

His last ailment came on fast; Boucher suffered a fall and was rushed to the hospital with a broken rib. The X-rays revealed some problems in the lungs and he remained in the hospital. Phyllis White would later remember his last days: “He never knew about the cancer because it was very hard to diagnose him and by the time that they figured it out, he was out of it and couldn’t be told anything. One of the doctors said to me, while they were all trying to figure out what was the matter with him, ‘that everybody and his brother wants to get in on this.’ I thought how much my husband would have enjoyed that. Like someone saying with relish, ‘this will puzzle them at Scotland Yard.’” Boucher was diagnosed as having cancer, and he passed away within days.
Anthony Boucher died of lung cancer on April 29, 1968, at the Kaiser Foundation Hospital. Despite his attacks of asthma, Boucher had been a lifetime smoker. He was frequently seen holding a pipe in family photos.  p. 156-157

The aftermath of his death is also covered—the founding of the mystery convention Bouchercon, the memorial SF and mystery anthologies,4 etc.—and concludes with this passage:

Even with the tributes and conventions, Boucher’s most enduring legacy has been his impact on the following generation of mystery reviewers. Though no one individual critic has Boucher’s influence in reviewing, the people who now review for Ellery Queens Mystery Magazine and the Times bear a resemblance to Boucher’s columns. Many of today’s review columns are in a similar format to Boucher’s work at The New York Times. Additionally, most reviewers do a yearly round-up of top books of the year as well. In today’s world with the increase in the number of subgenres in mystery Boucher’s rule of treating each category with the same respect and consideration despite personal preferences is a standard that still holds true today.  p. 160

The remainder of the book contains forty-odd pages of bibliographical information.

This volume is, as you can probably gather from the detail above, a thoroughly researched work. Nevertheless, I have a few reservations: first, it is probably best treated as a reference book rather than a casual read—as I have already said it is rather dry bordering on dull in places, and I could only dip into it for half an hour or so at a time; second, structurally it is a mess—if you look at some of the sub-sections above, they have no relation to the sections they appear in (the ‘Editor’ section in particular is a dog’s breakfast). It would have been better to have had more single topic sections, and those framed by a chronological account of his life. Finally, the manuscript could have done with another set of eyes proofreading it—there are a number of typos, etc.
Probably a volume for historians, who will be glad to have it.  ●

_____________________

1. The Google Play offering was the only ebook option I found, and is the cheapest way of obtaining the title.

2. Boucher’s real name was William Parker White.

3. There is a page of True Crime Detective covers here.

4. The two anthologies, Special Wonder (called “Special Wonders” here) and Crimes and Misfortunes, were edited by J. Francis McComas, who was assisted (according to Marks) by R. Bretnor and Randall Garrett.

rssrss

The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction #42, November 1954

ISFDB
Luminist

_____________________

Editor, Anthony Boucher

Fiction:
Dead Center • novelette by Judith Merril ∗∗∗
Dead-Eye Daniel • short story by Larry Siegel
The Grom • short story by Arthur Porges
Lease on Life • short story by Lee Grimes
The Test • short story by Richard Matheson
Transformer • short story by Chad Oliver
A Matter of Ethics • short story by Clifton Dance [as by J. R. Shango]
Sacrifice Hit • novelette by Edmond Hamilton +
The Weissenbroch Spectacles • short story by L. Sprague de Camp and Fletcher Pratt

Non-Fiction:
Cover • Chesley Bonestell
Coming Next
Recommended Reading
• by Anthony Boucher

_____________________

This issue of F&SF comes from the period where Anthony Boucher was in sole charge of the magazine,1 and the reason I’m reading it is because it contains Dead Center by Judith Merril.2 This story is one of two in this month’s magazine that focus on the domestic circumstances of the characters.

The story concerns the impending departure of husband/father/astronaut Jock Kruger into space, and is largely seen through the eyes his wife, Ruth Kruger, and their four year old son, Toby:

They took him up in an elevator, and showed him all around the inside of the rocket, where Daddy would sit, and where all the food was stored, for emergency, they said, and the radio and everything. Then it was time to say goodbye.
Daddy was laughing at first, and Toby tried to laugh, too, but he didn’t really want Daddy to go away. Daddy kissed him, and he felt like crying because it was scratchy against Daddy’s cheek, and the strong fingers were hurting him now. Then Daddy stopped laughing and looked at him very seriously. “You take care of your mother, now,” Daddy told him. “You’re a big boy this time.”
“Okay,” Toby said. Last time Daddy went away in a rocket, he was not-quite-four, and they teased him with the poem in the book that said, James James Morrison Morrison Weatherby George Dupree, Took great care of his mother, though he was only three . . . . So Toby didn’t much like Daddy saying that now, because he knew they didn’t really mean it.
“Okay,” he said, and then because he was angry, he said, “Only she’s supposed to take care of me, isn’t she?”
Daddy and Mommy both laughed, and so did the two men who were standing there waiting for Daddy to get done saying goodbye to him. He wriggled, and Daddy put him down.
“I’ll bring you a piece of the moon, son,” Daddy said, and Toby said, “All right, fine.” He reached for his mother’s hand, but he found himself hanging onto Grandma instead, because Mommy and Daddy were kissing each other, and both of them had forgotten all about him.
He thought they were never going to get done kissing.  p. 6

After the launch takes place, matters take an adverse turn when Jock comes around to find he has been blacked out for an abnormally long period, over twenty minutes. Ruth discusses the episode with one of the team:

“Wasn’t it . . . an awfully long time?” [Ruth] asked. She hadn’t been watching the clock, on purpose, but she was sure it was longer than it should have been.
Allie stopped smiling. “Twenty-three,” she said.
Ruth gasped. “What . . . ?”
“You figure it. I can’t.”
“There’s nothing in the ship. I mean nothing was changed that would account for it.” She shook her head slowly. This time she didn’t know the ship well enough to talk like that. There could be something. Oh, Jock! “I don’t know,” she said. “Too many people worked on that thing. I . . .”
“Mrs. Kruger’” It was the redheaded reporter, the obnoxious one. “We just got the report on the blackout. I’d like a statement from you, if you don’t mind, as designer of the ship—”
“I am not the designer of this ship,” she said coldly.
“You worked on the design, didn’t you?”
“Yes.”
“Well, then, to the best of your knowledge . . . ?”
“To the best of my knowledge, there is no change in design to account for Mr. Kruger’s prolonged unconsciousness. Had there been any such prognosis, the press would have been informed.”
“Mrs. Kruger, I’d like to ask you whether you feel that the innovations made by Mr. Argent could—”  p. 9-10

The situation worsens when Jock is stranded on the Moon after using more fuel than necessary to land. After this the military takes over the rescue mission, and Ruth becomes involved when they decide to use the older KIM-III model she designed.
This convincingly described section is followed by more material about Ruth and Toby, which also covers further politicking at the spaceflight bureau. Eventually Ruth and Toby attend the launch of the rescue vehicle and (spoiler), when Toby is shown around the craft before launch, he stows away. The ship crashes after take-off.
In the coda of the story we find that Ruth later commits suicide, and that Jock’s starved body is eventually brought back from the moon. The family are buried together.
This bare bones description doesn’t convey the kind of story this is—it feels like a mainstream novel about the NASA program that, although it has an underlying plot structure, develops naturally (well, at least until the last couple of pages). I particularly liked the group interactions, the organisational politics, and the press intrusion material, as well as the sections from Toby’s point of view. That said, the ending overdoes the bleakness and tragedy, and I couldn’t help but think that it would be a more effective (and realistic) story if Ruth lived—in its current form it’s like one of those Greek tragedies where the Gods turn up at the end and kill all the mortals. If Merril had kept Ruth alive but grief-struck the story would have continued developing organically, and avoided the omnisciently told and distancing coda (which reads like something from a different story).
If this is not an entirely successful piece, it is an ambitious and noteworthy one.3
The other story in this issue that focuses on the characters’ domestic circumstances is less successful. The Test by Richard Matheson starts with Les helping his eighty year old father Tom revise for a test he has to attend the next day. As Tom becomes exasperated at his inability to complete the cognitive and co-ordination tests Les gives him, we learn that, in this world, old people have to pass assessments to keep living. If they fail, they get a month to sort out their affairs before receiving a lethal injection.
It soon becomes clear that Tom will not pass the test, and this is the subject of an ensuing conversation between Tom and his wife Terry. This is an ambivalent exchange as there are domestic tensions in the household including, among other matters, the fact that Terry doesn’t want Tom with them for another five years (there is reference here to a letter couples can submit to have their elderly relatives removed).
Les gets up the next morning and sees his father away. When the father returns that night he goes straight to his room and, when Les later quizzes his father, Les learns (spoiler) that he did not attend but instead went to the pharmacist to purchase suicide pills. The story ends with the implication that Tom has taken his own life.
This is competently executed, but it is hard to take the central premise seriously.
If the amount of time that people spend on their mobile devices concerns you, Dead-Eye Daniel by Larry Siegel may be of interest, as it shows similar 1950’s anxieties about television:

TV, in case you didn’t know it, first came out in the mid ’40’s. You probably won’t believe it, but before television was around, people used to visit places called libraries (they were nothing but big halls that held books), parks (large sections set aside so that people could—of all things—sit on the grass, lie under trees, and row on lakes), and other nonsense like that.
Other folks (and so help me, this is true!) used to spend hours visiting friends and relatives—and get this—doing absolutely nothing but talk!
Of course, after TV really set in, things became normal. By 1957, husbands were paying little attention to wives, mothers were ignoring kids, and kids rarely left their living rooms—except in emergencies, like fires and stuff. You know, the way it is now. We take care of our basic needs, and spend all the rest of the time watching TV or talking about it.  p. 26-27

This story proceeds to give an account of a competitive (non-stop) TV viewing contest, which starts when two men encounter “Dead-Eye Daniel,” who watches TV in an apparently catatonic state. Seeing their chance to make some money they set up a match against the Russians (this takes place in the Cold War 1950s after all), who field a UN envoy who has a habit of walking out during votes on the accession of “Grubonia” to the UN. This latter fact (spoiler) is used to trick the Russian into walking out of the contest and losing. A weak ending to an unlikely and overlong story.
The Grom by Arthur Porges is told from the point of view of a cat called Tamberlane, who follows a grom (an invisible, malevolent spirit) around town while it causes trouble for humans. The Grom’s trouble-making peaks when it almost manages to incite a mob to hang a man (the police intervene).
The ending (where the grom meets a black hobo coming off a train) concludes with the line (spoiler): “He knew that the grom would not be frustrated again.”
The first time I read this story the point entirely escaped me. Part of this was undoubtedly me, but I think that the ending, and its implication that the grom will incite a lynch-mob, could have a sharper focus.
It is interesting to see this grim subject appear in the magazine (I can’t remember reading another fantasy or science fiction story from this period about these dreadful events).4
Lease on Life by Lee Grimes is a time travel story where two doctoral students and their professor develop a time machine. Baxter, one of the students and also the narrator, prepares to go forward in time, while the other, Casselton, controls the equipment. Professor Durward acts as Baxter’s temporal “anchor”:

[Casselton] checked the helmet [Doc] Durward would wear. One mind had to be both lever and anchor, and that was Doc’s function. Next Casselton checked the cables from the helmet to the power pack and to the cage. The latter was a skeleton of vertical tubes, spaced two feet apart around a circular base, and supporting the activating mechanism. The whole device was just tall enough for a man to stand inside. Finally he checked the cutoff timer. Since the mental effort to send me into the future would throw Doc into a trance, the timer was set to cut off power at the proper moment. Doc and I would be linked by an elastic, immaterial bond that would snap me back to “base time” when the field collapsed.
“It’s set for one hundred years ahead,” Casselton said. “Five minutes to get there, ten minutes to make observations, and five minutes to get back.” He gave me a speculative look, much as if I were some lower organism about to be plunged into a test tube.
“I’m ready,” I answered.  p. 43-44

The narrator, Baxter, finds himself in the near future, not a hundred years ahead as they planned, and on his return they deduce that the period a traveller can visit is limited to the lifetime of the anchor (the professor says, “My heart, I suppose.”) Casselton switches places with the professor and acts as the anchor for the next trip: Baxter goes forward a hundred years—only to find himself arrested by a totalitarian theocracy. This turns out to be ruled by Casselton, who, once he discovered he was going to live for a further hundred years, took many risks to become world dictator.
This clever piece is written in the form of a long letter to the future resistance.

Transformer by Chad Oliver is a fantasy about a toy town in a model railroad setup, and the residents’ trials at the hand of the thirteen year old owner:

The only rest room in town is in the gas station, and that’s all the place is used for. It’s ridiculous. They only know how to serve one dish at the diner, because that’s all that was on the counter. Bacon and fried eggs and coffee. You think about it, Clyde. Two meals a day every day for seven years. That’s a lot of bacon and eggs. You lose your taste for them after awhile.
The train runs right by the side of the hotel, only two inches away. It rattles the whole thing until it’s ready to fall apart, and every time it goes by it pours black smoke in through the upstairs window. There’s a tenant up there, name of Martin. He looks like he’s made out of soot.
The whole town is knee-deep in dust. Did you ever see a kid clean anything that belongs to him? And there’s no water, either. That cellophane in the Ohio River may look good from where you stand, but it’s about as wet as the gold in Fort Knox. Not only that, but it crinkles all the time where it flows under the bridges. It’s enough to drive you bats.  p. 75

Eventually the occupants of the toy town tamper with the transformer to try and electrocute the kid, but (spoiler) they fail, and then the kid sells off all the parts of the train set to various buyers. The narrator finds herself out of the frying pan and in the fire.
This is an entertaining piece for the most part, but the first page is confusing and unnecessary, and the story peters out a bit at the end.

A Matter of Ethics by Clifton Dance gets off to a cracking start when Colby, a junior doctor, has to treat a cardiac surgeon called Mendez for a heart attack after their spaceship comes out of “transition”. The initial paragraphs crackle with energy and information:

It was certainly a coronary. Mendez wasn’t too old, but he was in a position of wealth and authority. He no longer needed to worry about pleasing other people so he’d let his body go. A common enough situation with specialists; no inherent sense of artistry except in connection with one thing. They could be perfectionists in fire sculpture, hypothalamic surgery, or Venusian phonetics, but they didn’t carryover their perfectionism to the care of their bodies and this was what happened. The coronary vessels of the heart wall had lost their resiliency—perhaps foolish or capricious eating habits had thickened the vessel walls—and now, a sudden stress, the cushioned acceleration of the space drive, and a slight alarm reaction, the coronary vessels constrict stopping the flow of blood to the heart wall, pain in the heart, more alarm, more constriction, more pain. A vicious circle, and if it lasts over a minute, clots start forming ill the vessels, and cells in the heart wall begin to die from lack of blood. If the lack is long enough a large area of the heart wall will die. If it is large enough, nothing can save the victim except immediate intervention by a skilled mural cardiosurgeon, like Mendez.
Colby sighed. Yes, like Mendez. Not like Colby. He’d only had five years residency in surgery, then five years in cardiology, then three years in mural cardiosurgery. Thirteen years in labs, autopsy rooms, surgical amphitheaters.
Thirteen years of emergency call, interrupted sleep, hasty meals, and class four subsistence level pay. Thirteen years and then he’d taken his examination for the Intergalactic Board of Mural Cardiosurgery.
And what had Mendez said? Mendez, the president of that august body!
“It would be criminal for you to operate on humans at this stage in your development.” Criminal! And what had the Board recommended? Five more years of special supervised training under a Board man!
Five more years of crap from Harkaway!  p. 83

After Mendez is stabilised, and Colby has spoken with the ship’s doctor about the possibility of operating (illegal for Colby as, per above, he is not qualified/Board approved), Colby brings Mendez round. There is an extended conversation between the two men as Mendez tries to convince Colby to operate; Colby says that if Mendez wants him to operate he needs to put Colby on the board, otherwise Colby will suffer severe legal and professional penalties. Mendez says he can’t do that without fellow board members. Eventually (spoiler), when Mendez realises that without an operation he will die during the next transition, he tells Colby that the Board is a closed shop, set up to ensure that the only successful operations are ones conducted by Board members using a special healing scalpel that makes the operation a routine one.
Colby agrees to operate on Mendez but then, during the anaesthesia stage, gives him a massive overdose of ephedrine and kills him. Once Colby arrives at his destination he demands an examination from the Board, during which he not only gets his own back on Hathaway, his supervisor, but blackmails the Board over the secret of the scalpel.
Colby later becomes famous for “discovering” the scalpel, and breaks the Board’s stranglehold on cardiac surgery.
This is an interesting look at the restrictive practices of the (pseudonymous) writer’s profession, and its jaundiced view is one of its strengths, as is its generally engrossing and energetic narrative. The story’s weaknesses are its baggy and not entirely convincing middle section, and the omniscient viewpoint ending (another one). Overall though, it’s a pretty good piece, and it is a shame that this obviously talented writer didn’t contribute any further tales to the field.5

I hadn’t read Sacrifice Hit by Edmond Hamilton before I started writing this review otherwise I may have opened this post with comments about “three stories that focus on interpersonal relationships” rather than “two [which] focus on the domestic circumstances of the characters”.
In Hamilton’s story events focus on three characters: General Weiler, the commander in charge of a UN Interplanetary Service Base in Colorado which controls a number of exploration colonies scattered throughout the solar system; Secretary Ebbutt, the politician in charge, and the one responsible for funding; and Colonel Alsop, the commander of the Europan expedition, and a man who Weiler regards as a potentially reckless, “fame-happy” character (Alsop never appears onstage although he is frequently referred to, and is heard from in a number of time-lagged radio communications).
The story itself starts with a message coming into the base that an expedition on Europa has suffered quake damage to their domes and rocket, with one fatality so far. General Weiler thinks that he will need to send rescue rockets from Ganymede, but in a phonecall Ebbutt asks him to wait for further information so as not to jeopardise upcoming appropriations. While General Weiler waits for Ebbutt to fly in, he reflects on what the expedition might be going through:

Weiler sat in his office and thought about 32 men in prison.
They had been in prison for a long time, those men. First, in the iron guts of a rocket, lying in their bunks, telling dirty stories, eating, getting sick, smearing salve on their radiation-itch, sleeping, and waking, and sleeping again. Then strapping in, and praying, and getting bumped, and yelling to each other that they’d made it.
Made it to where? To another prison, a whole little chain of them. Four interconnected metal domes that you helped put up, and that were going to be your world from then on. The same blank metal walls, the same air that always smelled of hot metal and machine oil, the same food and faces, and always the grabbing drag of your weight-shoes that were supposed to make you feel your normal weight but never did.
You went out, to help run the parties testing for uranium, and that was when you were in the worst prison of all. Your suit was your prison then, pressing you close on every side, hanging wrong on you and trying to topple you over, smothering your every movement, never feeding oxygen quite right, making you want hysterically to move the way you used to move.
You saw everything wrong and distorted through your face-plate, and through the cold and bitter fumes that swathed it all. It always looked like a bad copy of a Bonestell painting, the rocks and ridges uncertain because your perspective and horizons were all wrong, the sky all wrong too with nothing in it but that enormous white mass that was supposed to be a planet but only looked like a vague, big brightness. You hated it, you hated all your prisons, but when they began to open up, when the ground heaved and the domes began to split and the cold poisonous murk of atmosphere began to seep in, you were scared, you wanted them back . . . .  p. 105

The situation deteriorates when Ebbutt arrives at the UN base, and he and Weiler hear Alsop’s optimistic but unrealistic report about the damage. Weiler and Ebbutt argue about what to do, and Weiler’s job is threatened.
Ebbutt sleeps for a couple of hours (he had a boozy night with two Senators the night before), and when he wakes he visits the control room to find that (spoiler) there is a new message from the deputy commander of the Europa colony stating that the quakes have got worse and there is more dome damage. Ebbutt also learns that Weiler has ordered the launch of the rockets from Ganymede.
The two men argue some more, and Ebbutt says he will sack Weiler and replace him with his compliant deputy. Weiler, who suspected that this may be the Secretary’s play, tells him he has already summoned the press. Then they are interrupted by a message about another quake:

“General, an Urgent-and-Immediate from Fifteen! General—”
Weiler moved fast. By the time he reached the door, Vaughn had switched over and it was Gresznik’s voice coming out of a roar of static. The Pole sounded excited, and scared.
“—sixty six-oh-one plus, causing ridge-slips northwest of us. Dome One split wide open, personnel evacuated into Three but two men caught under collapsing rocket-cranes. Afraid this is it. I am afraid this—”
Weiler heard the voice break off as they ran down the corridor and there was only the roar of static as they entered the Communications Room. Vaughn, pale and scared, turned from the panel briefly. He said, “I’m still getting their wave but Colonel Gresznik just stopped talking,”
“If their wave is coming in, they must still be all right,” Ebbutt said.
But Weiler, his first startled excitement all washed out of him, went over to the wall and sat down heavily in the chair there.
“Hell, they’ve had it,” he said harshly. “Three was their last dome.”
“But if we’re still getting their wave, they must—”
Weiler wouldn’t listen. He was through arguing. He felt that he was through with a lot of things.
He thought, “I was too late, [. . .] I was too late [. . .]. I should have sent that order twelve hours ago and told Ebbutt to go to hell”
Suddenly Vaughn exclaimed, “Fifteen! Listen—”
He switched over as he spoke. Out of the loudspeaker came not only the dull surge and roar of space static but other, irregular sounds—sounds like cannonadings and crackings and distant voices.
Then from the loudspeaker a hoarse voice that rose almost to a shout.
“Alsop speaking! I tried to stick it out but we’re done for, dome collapsing under ridge-slip, no use—” The roar drowned him for a moment as they listened, no one moving at all, then Alsop’s hoarse shout again. “—tell them I did my best! I—”
There was nothing more. There was nothing at all, except the static, nothing until Vaughn said tightly, “Their wave’s gone.”
“They’re all gone,” said Ebbutt.  p. 115-116

The story ends with Ebbutt giving a press conference where he plays Alsop’s message to make sure he gets his appropriation through.
This is a pretty good story (quite different, I suspect, from the sort of pulp that Hamilton produced for most of his career), and I enjoyed the wrangling between Weiler, whose prime concern was the welfare and safety of his men, and Ebbutt, who is more interested in the survival of the program.
This story could have easily have appeared in Astounding (if Hamilton hadn’t got fed up with Campbell’s rewrite requests6 earlier in his career).

There used to be an advertisement that you would see in the comic books of my youth which advertised “X-ray Specs”.7 I always wondered who would buy these glasses (unlikely to work, and illegal if they had) but this device has provided de Camp and Pratt with the gimmick for The Weissenbroch Spectacles, another episode in their ‘Gavagan’s Bar’ series. This opens, after some obligatory bar and character scene setting with the sale of a painting to a visitor called Bache, who buys it after viewing it through his glasses:

The painting was one of a wood nymph of extreme, not to say flagrant, nudity. She sat on her curled-up right leg, which in turn rested upon a tree stump. Her left leg was thrust out to the side and rear. Her body was upright, with her head tipped back and her hands clasped behind her neck beneath a coiffure of approximately 1880. She was gazing at a painted sunbeam with a smile of ineffable idiocy, and a pair of gauzy wings, though absurdly small by aerodynamic standards, testified to her supernatural origin. They failed to balance a pair of mammae of transcendental size and salience.  p. 127

Bache then buys a round and tells the tale of how his glasses were made from rock quartz owned by the kobolds, and how he can see through things when he uses them. The story wanders on (spoiler) to an ending as vaguely puerile as the quote above: a pair of women Bache is due to meet enter the bar (one of them film star gorgeous) but he goes off with someone else who is less attractive. This sets up the punch line “I wonder what he sees in her.” Okay, I suppose, but Boucher should have ended the issue with the stronger Hamilton story.

The Cover for this issue is by Chesley Bonestell, and is described on the contents page as, “Planet lit by Antares and companion star.”
There isn’t really any Interior artwork in the F&SF of this period (or most of them) but there is a solitary spot illustration by Emsh on p. 118, opposite the de Camp and Pratt story, which itself has a hand lettered title (see above). I’ve decided to start including the odd title page because some of the introductions provide useful information or context.
Coming Next trails a number of interesting sounding writers for the next issue: Robert Abernathy (whose name I recognise but who I know little about), Saki (ditto), Philip Jose Farmer, William Morrison (just after Country Doctor), and Philip K. Dick.
Recommended Reading by Anthony Boucher starts with mention of the 1954 International Fantasy Awards:

It seemed rash to single one novel out of so rich a year as 1953—a much brighter period than 1954 has been so far; but apparently the experts are in full agreement with us, for More Than Human has just received the International Fantasy Award, bestowed by a panel of thirteen distinguished judges from the United States, England and France. And now, having been quite unable to get this beautifully written and sensitively conceived story of human symbiosis out of my mind for almost a year, I’ll be even more rash and say that this is the finest novel yet to receive the IFA.
The runners-up are very nearly as impressive in quality of writing and thinking. Second place went to Alfred Bester’s pyrotechnic ESP-detective story, The Demolished Man (Shasta, $3; Signet, 25¢), and third to the
bitter satire on an advertising-agency future, The Space Merchants, by Frederik Pohl and C. M. Kornbluth (Ballantine, hardcover $1,50, paper 35¢). Both of these novels were serialized in Galaxy, and a large portion of the Sturgeon novel first appeared as the Galaxy novella, Baby is Three. My warm congratulations, not unmixed with envy, to Galaxy editor Horace Gold for publishing such notable stories.
Note of consolation: F&SF’s Bring the Jubilee, by Ward Moore (Farrar, Straus & Young, $2; Ballantine, 35¢) very nearly ran in the money, and wound up in an unofficial fourth place, which is reasonably gratifying for the only F&SF-originated book eligible in the contest.  p. 96

After this, Boucher looks at a few spaceflight books, a few that he likes, and a few that he doesn’t:

Martin Caidin’s Worlds in Space (Holt, $4.95) is the most expensive and least necessary of this current crop; its material is readily available elsewhere more clearly organized and written in sentences more nearly resembling English prose. Spaceflight is one of the countless subjects treated in Alfred Gordon Bennett’s Focus on the Unknown (Library Publishers, $3.95), an inordinately ambitious book which tries to embrace almost every scientific or parascientific theme which might come under the fantasy-fact heading. The writing is characterized by prosaic stuffiness, a powerful will to believe, and a careless disregard for the nature of evidence.  p. 98

He then reviews some reprints before coming to a new novel:

Most rewarding of 1954’s new novels this month is Richard Matheson’s I Am Legend (Gold Medal, 25¢), an extraordinary book which manages to do for vampirism what Jack Williamson’s Darker Than You Think did for lycanthropy: investigate an ancient legend in terms of modern knowledge of psychology and physiology, and turn to be stuff of supernatural terror into strict (and still terrifying!) science fiction. Matheson has added a new variant on the Last Man theme, too, in this tale of the last normal human survivor in a world of bloodsucking nightmares, and has given striking vigor to his invention by a forceful style of storytelling which derives from the best hard-boiled crime novels. As a hard-hitting thriller or as fresh imaginative speculation, this-is a book you can’t miss.  p. 99

I read the Matheson a year or so ago and thought it pretty good, and wondered why it hadn’t been a serial in F&SF (probably because the magazine hadn’t started using them at that time).

In conclusion, a worthwhile issue.  ●

_____________________

1. Founding co-editor J. Francis McComas took a back seat in 1952, and finally resigned in September 1954.

2. There was a discussion in the Great SF Stories group about Merril’s Dead Center and So Proudly We Hail, and whether they were stories that should have made the ‘Year’s Best’ collections. (Actually, Dead Center did make a year’s best—it is in The Best American Short Stories 1955. There is a letter from Andy Duncan in Locus about the handful of SF magazine stories that have made it into that anthology series and the O. Henry one.)

3. Dead Center can perhaps be described as an anti-Astounding story. In that magazine, they would have more likely Solved the Problem and rescued the astronaut (if it was possible to do so within the physical constraints of the Universe that is—see The Cold Equations). In any event, I don’t think that Campbell would have gone for an ending where (like the recently reviewed So Proudly We Hail in Star Science Fiction Stories) a major plot point depends upon inadequate spaceport security (one suspects that the security company in both these stories will not be invited to retender).

4. Wikipedia has a page on Lynching. Note that the year after this story appeared, Emmett Till, a 14-year-old black boy, was kidnapped, beaten, mutilated, and murdered for allegedly having wolf-whistled at, or flirted with, a white woman in Mississippi.

5. Dance’s first published story was The Brothers (reviewed here), a promising piece which appeared in the June 1952 issue. This also indicated a bright future.

6. Hamilton has this specific comment in an interview on Tangent:

I never sent [Campbell] a story after 1938 because I had to revise that one. First, to suit John’s idea, and then to suit John’s wife’s idea. That was a little hard to do, so I never sent John any more stories.

7. The Wikipedia page for X-ray Specs, believe it or not.  ●

F&SF is still published: F&SF subs/Amazon UKUSA/Weightless Books

rssrss

Star Science Fiction Stories, edited by Frederik Pohl, 1953

ISFDB

Other reviews:1
Everett F. Bleiler, The Guide to Supernatural Fiction, pp. 295 – 454, 1983
Anthony Boucher & J. Francis McComas, The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction, May 1953
Groff Conklin, Galaxy Science Fiction, June 1953
Leslie Flood, New Worlds Science Fiction #29, November 1954
Damon Knight, Science Fiction Adventures, December 1953
Robert W. Lowndes, Future Science Fiction, May 1953
Sam Merwin, Jr., Fantastic Universe, August-September 1953
P. Schuyler Miller, Astounding Science Fiction, August 1953
Sam Moskowitz, Science-Fiction Plus, May 1953
Mark Reinsberg, Imagination, September 1953
George O. Smith, Space Science Fiction, May 1953
George O. Smith, Space Science Fiction, September 1953
Uncredited, Thrilling Wonder Stories, June 1953
Bud Webster, Anthopology 101: The Pohl Star

_____________________

Editor, Frederik Pohl

Fiction:
Country Doctor • novelette by William Morrison ∗∗∗
Dominoes • short story by C. M. Kornbluth
Idealist • short story by Lester del Rey
The Night He Cried • short story by Fritz Leiber +
Contraption • short story by Clifford D. Simak
The Chronoclasm • short story by John Wyndham
The Deserter • short story by William Tenn
The Man with English • short story by H. L. Gold
So Proudly We Hail • short story by Judith Merril
A Scent of Sarsaparilla • short story by Ray Bradbury
Nobody Here But— • short story by Isaac Asimov
The Last Weapon • short story by Robert Sheckley
A Wild Surmise • short story by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore
The Journey • short story by Murray Leinster
The Nine Billion Names of God • short story by Arthur C. Clarke

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Richard Powers
Editor’s Note • by Frederik Pohl
Introductions • by Frederik Pohl

_____________________

Frederik Pohl is best known as a writer but he was also a successful editor for a large part of his life. This part of his career spanned three decades, and had four distinct phases: the first was his editorship of Astonishing Stories and Super Science Stories in the early 1940s; the second was his editorship of the Star Science Fiction anthology series in the 1950s; the third was his editorship of Galaxy, If, Worlds of Tomorrow, etc. in the 1960s; the last was his stint as an editor for Bantam Books in the early 1970s.
The book under consideration, Star Science Fiction, is from that second phase, and is the initial volume in the first original SF anthology series (depending on how you view Donald Wollheim’s Avon Science Fiction, that is).2 Pohl’s series would continue, off and on, through several books and one abortive magazine, until he became editorially involved at Galaxy in the late 1950s.3

Pohl picks a traditional story to start the volume, a piece that wouldn’t be out of place in that period’s Astounding magazine: Country Doctor by William Morrison. This begins on Mars when a Dr Meltzer is summoned to what he thinks is an accident at a nearby spaceport. Once he gets there he finds that the ship is okay but that it contains a huge “space cow” which is sick. The authorities want him to treat it, something which involves getting suited up and descending into the beast’s digestive system:

The two men with him stretched out a plastic ladder. In the low gravity of Mars, climbing forty feet was no problem. Dr. Meltzer began to pull his way up. As he went higher, he noticed that the great mouth was slowly opening. One of the men had poked the creature with an electric prod.
Dr. Meltzer reached the level of the lower jaw, and with the fascinated fear of a bird staring at a snake, gazed at the great opening that was going to devour him. Inside there was a gray and slippery surface which caught the beam of his flashlight and reflected it back and forth until the rays faded away. Fifty feet beyond the opening, the passage made a slow turn to one side. What lay ahead, he couldn’t guess.
The sensible thing was to go in at once, but he couldn’t help hesitating. Suppose the jaws closed just as he got between them? He’d be crushed like an eggshell. Suppose the throat constricted with the irritation he caused it? That would crush him too. He recalled suddenly an ancient fable about a man who had gone down into a whale’s belly. What was the man’s name, now? Daniel—no, he had only gone into a den of lions. Job—wrong again. Job had been afflicted with boils, the victim of staphylococci at the other end of the scale of size. Jonah, that was it. Jonah, the man whose name was a symbol among the superstitious for bad luck.  p. 8-9

This readable and straightforward story largely involves the doctor wandering around examining the innards of the beast until he concludes his investigation. The ending, where (spoiler) the doctor cures the alien, sees the writer pulling a rabbit out of a hat (the solution involves the small creatures Meltzer finds swimming around inside the space cow—its offspring). This is an enjoyable tale for all that, and I wondered whether the story influenced or inspired James White to write his ‘Sector General’ series.
Dominoes by C. M. Kornbluth opens with a stockbroker called Born reflecting on the interdependence of world financial markets:

Already the office was a maelstrom. The clattering tickers, blinking boards and racing messengers spelled out the latest, hottest word from markets in London, Paris, Milan, Vienna. Soon New York would chime in, then Chicago, then San Francisco.
Maybe this would be the day. Maybe New York would open on a significant decline in Moon Mining and Smelting.
Maybe Chicago would nervously respond with a slump in commodities and San Francisco’s Utah Uranium would plummet in sympathy. Maybe panic in the Tokyo Exchange on the heels of the alarming news from the States—panic relayed across Asia with the rising sun to Vienna, Milan, Paris, London, and crashing like a shock-wave into the opening New York market again.
Dominoes, W. J. Born thought. A row of dominoes. Flick one and they all topple in a heap. Maybe this would be the day.  p. 26

After this prescient beginning Born gets a call from Loring, a scientist who Born has been funding to build a time machine. Loring says that his experiments have suceeded, and that mice and rabbits sent to the future have returned safely. Born then goes to the lab, and travels two years into the future to get financial information that will enable him to make a fortune.
When Born arrives he overcomes a number of minor obstacles (against the background of a countdown clock) before he makes it to a library. There he discovers (spoiler) a financial crash is about to happen in the time period he has left. He returns and liquidates his assets.
In a final encounter with a ruined Loring (he has lost his money in the crash and can’t pay for the experimental equipment) we find out that it was Born’s disposals that triggered the crash.
This is a neatly done ironic tale, and one that foresees future flash-crashes.
Idealist by Lester del Rey starts with Paul Fenton waking up and finding himself alone in an Earth-orbiting space station’s hospital bay. He gets up and explores the station, and finds a number of dead people. Some of these have been killed by a missile attack on the station, and some have been shot (there are mentions of a traitor). He later discovers that the majority of the station’s nuclear missiles have been fired.
When Fenton turns his attention to Earth he sees the results of a nuclear war but also detects survivors—and when he contacts them the various parties want him to help them continue the conflict. Sickened by this he fires the station’s remaining missiles at Earth, and takes the station’s spaceship to the far side of the Moon.
I’m not sure this entirely works. First off, the partial amnesia he initially suffers from drags out the process of establishing what is happening (and so feels like padding); second, the response of the people on the ground is nihilistic (though not improbable); finally, the occasional interstitial material about man’s destiny in space is at odds with Fenton’s actions with the missiles. It rather feels as if it was written to push an editor’s buttons (Campbell’s?), but it’s an okay piece overall, I guess.
The Night He Cried by Fritz Leiber is a merciless parody of the school of writing typified by Mickey Spillane, and has an opening passage you wouldn’t see in the magazines:

I glanced down my neck secretly at the two snowy hillocks, ruby peaked, that were pushing out my blouse tautly without the aid of a brassiere. I decided they’d more than do. So I turned away scornfully as his vast top-down convertible cruised past my street lamp. I struck my hip and a big match against the fluted column, and lit a cigarette. I was Lili Marlene to a T—or rather to a V-neckline. (I must tell you that my command of earth-idiom and allusion is remarkable, but if you’d had my training you wouldn’t wonder.)
The convertible slowed down and backed up. I smiled. I’d been certain that my magnificently formed milk glands would turn the trick. I puffed on my cigarette languorously.
“Hi, Babe!”  p. 49

After the alien gets in Slickie Millane’s car they go for a drive. When they pull over, it reveals itself to Millane:

As the hand of his encircling arm began to explore my prize possessions, I drew away a bit, not frustratingly, and informed him, “Slickie dear, I am from Galaxy Center . . .”
“What’s that—a magazine publisher?” he demanded hotly, being somewhat inflamed by my cool milk glands.
“. . . and we are interested in how sex and justice are dispensed in all areas,” I went on, disregarding his interruption and his somewhat juvenile fondlings. “To be bold, we suspect that you may be somewhat misled about this business of sex.”
Vertical, centimeter-deep furrows creased his brow. His head poised above mine like a hawk’s. “What are you talking about, Babe?” he demanded with suspicious rage, even snatching his hands away.
“Briefly, Slickie,” I said, “you do not seem to feel that sex is for the production of progeny or for the mutual solace of two creatures. You seem to think—”
His rage exploded into action.  p. 50

The rest of this amusing piece details Slickie’s multiple shootings of the alien/femme fatale until there is a climactic scene that involves Millane witnessing a body transformation that forever traumatises him. Probably the best piece in the collection.
Contraption by Clifford D. Simak is about a maltreated orphan called Johnny who finds a crashed flying saucer in the woods. It has that rural setting which is often present in Simak’s fiction:

He found the contraption in a blackberry patch when he was hunting cows. Darkness was sifting down through the tall stand of poplar trees and he couldn’t make it out too well and he couldn’t spend much time to look at it because Uncle Eb had been plenty sore about his missing the two heifers and if it took too long to find them Uncle Eb more than likely would take the strap to him again and he’d had about all he could stand for one day. Already he’d had to go without his supper because he’d forgotten to go down to the spring for a bucket of cold water. And Aunt Em had been after him all day because he was so no-good at weeding the garden.  p. 57

We learn more about Johnny’s domestic circumstances and his harsh treatment before he eventually befriends the dying aliens. After they learn of Johnny’s treatment (by telepathy—they never leave the ship) they suggest an exchange of gifts: the glowing jewel he receives from them in exchange for his broken penknife (spoiler) changes the attitude of his step-parents towards him for the better.
This story has good organic development for the most part, something that is spoiled a little by the gimmicky ending.
The Chronoclasm by John Wyndham is a time-travel tale that, given it takes half the story before this gimmick is out in the open, ends up reading like a refugee from the Saturday Evening Post. It opens with a Dr Gobie approaching the protagonist Gerald Lattery (after erroneously referring to him as “Sir Gerald”), and warning him that it is imperative that he avoid contact with a young woman called Tavia. Lattery tells the stranger that he doesn’t know anyone of that name.
The story picks up two years later, and details Lattery’s sightings of a striking young woman. These two or three events are padded out with a lot of fluff like this:

“Young woman in here asking after you, Mr. Lattery. Did she find you? I told her where your place is.”
I shook my head. “Who was she?”
“She didn’t say her name, but—” he went on to describe her. Recollection of the girl on the other side of the street came back to me. I nodded.
“I saw her just across the road. I wondered who she was.” I told him.
“Well, she seemed to know you all right. ‘Was that Mr. Lattery who was in here earlier on?’ she says to me. I says yes, you was one of them. She nodded and thought a bit.
‘He lives at Bagford House, doesn’t he?’ she asks. ‘Why, no, Miss,’ I says, ‘that’s Major Flacken’s place. Mr. Lattery, he lives out at Chatcombe Cottage.’ So she asks me where that is, an’ I told her. Hope that was all right. Seemed a nice young lady.”
I reassured him. “She could have got the address anywhere. Funny she should ask about Bagford House—that’s a place I might hanker for, if I ever had any money.”
“Better hurry up and make it, sir. The old Major’s getting on a bit now,” he said.
Nothing came of it. Whatever the girl had wanted my address for, she didn’t follow it up, and the matter dropped out of my mind.
It was about a month later that I saw her again. I’d kind of slipped into the habit of going riding once or twice a week with a girl called Marjorie Cranshaw, and running her home from the stables afterwards.

Blah, blah, blah. Eventually, Marjorie gets dumped, and Lattery and Tavia the time-traveller get together. Some of the fluff is swapped for explanations about chronoclasms, changes caused by time-travellers, and how she is pursued by men from the future who want her to return to her own time. Despite all this Lattery and Tavia get married, and we are soon back to the fluff again:

“M’m,” mumbled Tavia. “I think I rather like Twentieth Century marriage.”
“It has risen higher in my own estimation, darling,” I admitted. And, indeed, I was quite surprised to find how much higher it had risen in the course of the last month or so.
“Do Twentieth Century marrieds always have one big bed, darling?” she inquired.
“Invariably, darling,” I assured her.
“Funny,” she said. “Not very hygienic, of course, but quite nice all the same.”
We reflected on that.  p. 80

Meanwhile, Tavia tells Lattery of devices he can “invent” so he’ll have an income to support them both. It isn’t long before the men from the future turn up: initially it is Dr Colbie waving a white flag (the result of a shooting incident two days later) but his words fall on deaf ears. Then (spoiler) Tavia gets pregnant, and then she disappears.
The story ends with Lattery—remarkably composed given his wife and future child have vanished—writing the letter than caused Tavia to come back to find him.
This is a pretty routine time travel story but it’s of interest for the view it gives of the lost society of the 1950’s which—in some respects—is as fascinating as some of SF’s alien societies.
The Deserter by William Tenn starts with Major Mardin arriving at a facility that houses the first Jovian prisoner humanity has taken alive. Mardin (who was an archaeologist before the inter-system war began) is there to interrogate the massive, methane breathing alien.
Martin is briefed by a Space Marshall—colloquially called “Rockethead”—who is an aggressive and over bearing bully, but also a very successful soldier. After brow beating Mardin, the Space Marshall sends him out on a metal chair that hangs above the huge alien, at which point Mardin attaches a tendril to his forehead and comes into telepathic contact with it (we learn during the story that Mardin was one of the first Jovian prisoners, and was interrogated by this method before he was rescued).
Mardin learns the Jovian prisoner’s personal history, and the reason it allowed itself to be captured—which is to give humanity information to develop a weapon that will stop Jovian society’s increasingly militaristic culture.
As they communicate Mardin’s feelings about the xenocidal Space Marshall break through, and the Jovian questions him further. Mardin gives a brutally honest response. When the Jovian realises (spoiler) what kind of society humanity is, it commits suicide by venting the methane gas in its chamber. This also kills Mardin.
This is a satisfyingly dense story to begin with but it goes downhill with the introduction of the Space Marshall’s character, a comic book version of a military leader. Subtler characterisation would have made this a more effective anti-war story.
The Man with English by H. L. Gold4 is a short gimmick story which starts with a bad-tempered husband called Stone falling off a ladder at his store. He wakes up with a peculiar condition:

“Every one of your senses has been reversed. You feel cold for heat, heat for cold, smooth for rough, rough for smooth, sour for sweet, sweet for sour, and so forth. And you see colors backward.”
Stone sat up. “Murderer! Thief! You’ve ruined me!”
The doctor sprang for a hypodermic and sedative. Just in time, he changed his mind and took a bottle of stimulant instead. It worked fine, though injecting it into his screaming, thrashing patient took more strength than he’d known he owned. Stone fell asleep immediately.  p. 110

This last twist, the idea that a stimulant would act as a sedative, breaks the story’s logic, as this has nothing to do with the reversed senses Stone supposedly suffers from (this effect would require a completely different biochemistry).
Stone then has an operation which (spoiler) swaps rather than reverses his senses (synaesthesia5)—as he finds out when he comes round after the operation:

“What smells purple?” he demanded.  p. 113

So Proudly We Hail by Judith Merril is a slow burn which has a woman and her partner waiting to board a colony spaceship to Mars. Initially it appears that they have both been accepted as colonists, but we eventually find out that the woman has been “pink-slipped”—rejected—for health reasons. She conceals this from her partner.
When the “one hour to departure” warning sounds, she tells him she isn’t going. He is irritated by what he thinks is her last minute nerves, and goes for a walk.
As the time runs down, we see events from both viewpoints. This involves, among other things, the man having a conversation with another colonist which plants the idea she may be seeing someone else; meanwhile, the woman reflects on the reason for her rejection and why she kept it secret for so long:

She didn’t show Will the slips that night. She had to think it through first, decide what to do, how to tell him. Because as soon as the lesson of failure was thoroughly learned for herself, another piece of knowledge took shape within her.
If she told him, he’d stay too. He’d stay at home, and go out to stand in the yard on starry nights. He’d stare at the sky, smoking his pipe, the way he always did—the way he always had—but it would be different. He would stand alone, and his hand would not touch her arm, nor would she be with him. And when he came back into the house, his eyes would avoid her, and he would hate.
You’re going, Will, she promised in her heart when she understood that much. It’s the thirst of your soul, and I shall see that you drink, though it drains me!  p. 125

The man says eventually says goodbye in a tense, passionate scene, and goes off to induction. The story (spoiler) ends tragically as she runs onto the launch pad during the rocket’s lift off.6
This examination of a disintegrating relationship against the backdrop of the outward urge makes for a welcome change of pace. A good mood piece, albeit it one with a melodramatic ending.
A Scent of Sarsaparilla by Ray Bradbury is a short piece of whimsy where a dreamer/husband rubs up against his shrew/wife. The man spends too much time in his attic:

“Cora,” he said, eating his lunch, relaxing, beginning to enthuse again, “you know what attics are? They’re Time Machines, in which old, dim-witted men like me can travel back forty years to a time when it was summer all year round and children raided ice wagons. Remember how it tasted? You held the ice in your handkerchief. It was like sucking the flavor of linen and snow at the same time.”
Cora fidgeted.
It’s not impossible, he thought, half closing his eyes, trying to see it and build it. Consider an attic. Its very atmosphere is Time. It deals in other years, the cocoons and chrysalises of another age. All the bureau drawers are little coffins where a thousand yesterdays lie in state. Oh, the attic’s a dark, friendly place, full of Time, and if you stand in the very center of it, straight and tall, squinting your eyes, and thinking and thinking, and smelling the Past, and putting out your hands to feel of Long Ago, why, it . . .
He stopped, realizing he had spoken some of this aloud.  p. 133-134

He (spoiler) eventually converts the attic into a time machine which takes him back to his past.
The idea of returning to childhood days is a common theme in Bradbury’s fiction, and I wondered if this is one of the earliest examples.
Nobody Here But— by Isaac Asimov starts with Bill, a computer/robot scientist, at his girlfriend Mary Ann’s apartment. He briefly talks on the phone to colleague Cliff, who is at the lab which is six miles away. Moments after the call ends, Cliff turns up at the Bill’s girlfriend’s apartment, and both men realise something peculiar is going on. They wonder if this occurrence is connected to the computer they are developing.
The rest of the story takes place at the lab where the two men inspect the computer. They find several modifications to their work (a loudspeaker, extendable metal arms, etc.), and when they start dismantling the device to inspect it more closely, it starts acting defensively, electrifying parts of itself, etc.
Meanwhile (spoiler), Mary Ann gets more and more impatient (she and Bill are supposed to be on a date), and when she finally walks out “Cliff” tells Bill, “Why don’t you ask her to marry you, you lunkhead?” Of course, it turns out that it wasn’t Cliff who made the suggestion but the computer.
I suppose this is vaguely entertaining, but it’s laboured and rather twee. Barely okay.
The Last Weapon by Robert Sheckley has three men on Mars searching a dead race’s superweapons. When they find them Edzel starts experimenting to see what they can do. When one of the other men complains, Edzel kills him. Later, after they find a robotic army, Edzel is in turn killed by the third man, Parke.
The story ends with Parke testing a device labelled “The Last Weapon,” at which point vapour comes out of the box. This coalesces into a pair of eyes and a large mouth floating in the air. It expresses a liking for protoplasm before it eats Edzel’s dead body and then Parke’s living one . . . .
This ending is a weak deus ex machina.
A Wild Surmise by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore opens with Timothy Hooten in his psychiatrist Dr Scott’s office. Hooten is seeing Scott because when he dreams he thinks he is an insect. In his dream world Hooten consults another psychiatrist called Dr Rasp:

“Do you feel that you are dreaming now?” Dr. Rasp telepathized gently.
Timothy Hooten evaded the psychiatrist’s faceted gaze. He swung his oval body around to stare out the sky-slit at the distant polyhedron of the Quatt Wunkery. Then he waved his antennae gently and clicked his mandibles.
“It’s like a dream, isn’t it?” he said evasively, though naturally not audibly. “Imagine building a Wunkery simply to pleat Quatts. Of course they never showed up. That sort of thing could happen only in a dream. Oh, you can’t convince me. This is a dream. Imagine walking around on all sixes.”
Dr. Rasp scratched a memorandum on his left wing-case.
“How do you think you should walk?” he asked.  p. 163

The story eventually becomes a duel between the two doctors to break Hooten’s delusion, and Hooten oscillates ever more rapidly between Scott’s sodium pentothal and Rasp’s hypnosis until something finally gives. At that point (spoiler) both the psychiatrists find themselves in the other’s world.
This is entertaining once it gets going, but the ending does not convincingly flow from the rest of the story.
The Journey by Murray Leinster is a coming-of-age story about a young man called Joe, who gets a temporary job on a spaceship to Pluto before starting his adult working life.
The piece largely details, at least for the first half or so, the menial work he undertakes (swabbing the floors, oiling the engines, etc.), the coarseness of the crew and their teasing of him, and the fact that he never sees the stars that surround him—except once, when one of the officers checks an observation port:

The mate was making a routine check of the few, emergency, rarely-or-never-used viewports in the ship’s hull. In the unthinkable event of disaster to the control room—from which the stars were normally viewed— the ship could be navigated by hand with men at such ports as this, reporting to a jury-rigged control room. The mate was simply verifying that they were ready for use. But he uncovered the stars. And Joe looked.
He looked with his own eyes into infinity—past the mate’s head and shoulders, of course. He saw the stars. Their number was like the number of grains of sand. Their color varied beyond belief. For the first time Joe realized that they differed only in brightness and color, because they were all so far away that they were the same size. None was larger than a mathematical point. It was a sight which no man has ever seen save through some such window as the mate had uncovered.
Joe gazed with absolute rapture. The mate matter-of-factly made his verification of the condition of the port and the shutters that closed over it outside—the shutters which infinitesimal meteorites might pit with their tiny, violent explosions if they struck. The mate closed the inner plate, making sure that the outer shutters closed with it. He locked it and turned to go on. He saw Joe, dazed and agitated, staring at the metal plate which had just locked out the universe.
Joe said, swallowing:
“I—never saw the stars before, sir.”
The mate said, “Oh,” and went on.  p. 176

The whole story seems to be an anti-sense of wonder piece, and even when they arrive and land on Pluto months later his time there is quite low-key.
In its last third the story changes into a different type of piece altogether: Joe meets a young woman going from Pluto to Earth. They eventually talk, and later become emotionally involved. Joe wants her to see the stars and the sky; she worries about what she will look like in sunlight. When they finally get to Earth, Joe is initially oblivious to his waiting parents as he and the young woman get off the ship to address these issues. (By the by, there is occasional mention of the worried mother and father throughout the story, and the effect it is having on them physically.)
Some of this story, such as parts which address the mundanity of space travel, is quite well done albeit slow moving. However, the separate strands don’t really come together as a satisfying whole, and I wondered if this was a ‘Will F. Jenkins’ (Leinster used his real name for his slick work) reject.
The Nine Billion Names of God by Arthur C. Clarke begins with a Tibetan Lama in a computer company office arranging for the purchase of a machine that will enable the monks to print out the nine billion names of God.
The story then fast-forwards three months to two engineers who are in Tibet maintaining the machine. One of them is friendly with one of the monks, has found out why the monastery is undertaking this task, and tells his colleague what he has discovered:

“Well, they believe that when they have listed all His names—and they reckon that there are about nine billion of them—God’s purpose will be achieved. The human race will have finished what it was created to do, and there won’t be any point in carrying on. Indeed, the very idea is something like blasphemy.”
“Then what do they expect us to do? Commit suicide?”
“There’s no need for that. When the list’s completed, God steps in and simply winds things up . . . bingo!”
“Oh, I get it. When we finish our job, it will be the end of the world.”
Chuck gave a nervous little laugh.
“That’s just what I said to Sam. And do you know what happened? He looked at me in a very queer way, like I’d been stupid in class, and said ‘It’s nothing as trivial as that.’”  p. 192

As the process nears completion the engineers become concerned—not about the monks’ beliefs, but about what their reactions may be when nothing happens. They decide to delay the project until they can arrange to be on the way out of the country when the project finishes.
The story ends with the pair travelling to the distant airstrip, and catching sight of it in the distance:

“There she is!” called Chuck, pointing down into the valley. “Ain’t she beautiful!”
She certainly was, thought George. The battered old DC 3 lay at the end of the runway like a tiny silver cross. In two hours she would be bearing them away to freedom and sanity. It was a thought worth savoring like a fine liqueur. George let it roll round his mind as the pony trudged patiently down the slope.
The swift night of the high Himalayas was now almost upon them. Fortunately the road was very good, as roads went in this region, and they were both carrying torches. There was not the slightest danger, only a certain discomfort from the bitter cold. The sky overhead was perfectly clear and ablaze with the familiar, friendly stars. At least there would be no risk, thought George, of the pilot being unable to take off because of weather conditions. That had been his only remaining worry.
He began to sing, but gave it up after a while. This vast arena of mountains, gleaming like whitely hooded ghosts on every side, did not encourage such ebullience. Presently George glanced at his watch.
“Should be there in an hour,” he called back over his shoulder to Chuck. Then he added, in an afterthought:
“Wonder if the computer’s finished its run? It was due about now.”
Chuck didn’t reply, so George swung round in his saddle. He could just see Chuck’s face, a white oval turned towards the sky.
“Look,” whispered Chuck, and George lifted his eyes to heaven. (There is always a last time for everything.)
Overhead, without any fuss, the stars were going out.  p. 194-195

The first time I read this I hated the ending, which struck me as a religious (irrational) finish to a SF (rational) story. This time around, and having foreknowledge of the ending, I sort of liked it. I still wouldn’t call it a “classic,” but I thought it well crafted. The last half page in particular is very atmospheric, and the final line stunning.
It occurred to me that the reason so many people liked this when I didn’t is because they perhaps process the religious ending as a sense of wonder one.

The original wraparound Cover for the anthology appears to be an early effort by Richard Powers—it is not typical of his later, more abstract, work (apologies for the poor images—if anyone can provide a better scan of this or the next, I’d appreciate it):

When the book was reissued in 1972 it had a new (semi-wraparound) cover by John Berkey, and a modified title:


The only non-fiction items in the book are the Editor’s Note and Introductions by Frederik Pohl.
The Editor’s Note appears to be a revised—or completely new—introduction for the 1961 reprint of the collection as it references a 1931 Jack Williamson serial published “more than three decades ago.”7
The introduction mentions SF’s addictive qualities, and its breadth:

Publishers, critics and a good many readers have a tendency to think of science fiction as one of the “categories” of publishing, in the specific sense of the term; like detective stories and Westerns. But unless you can think of The Big Sky as a Western or Hamlet as a whodunit, you can hardly class in a tight little group so widely variant an assortment of stories as justly fit under the common label of science fiction.
One can get tired of cowboys or corpses; it’s hard to tire of a field that can take you anywhere in space, time or the dimensions.  p. 1

Later, he goes on to say “you need be neither huckster nor Wobbly to enjoy science fiction”, so I presume that this is all an appeal to a mainstream audience who have bought the book out of curiosity (although they probably won’t know what a “Wobbly” is—I didn’t).
The Introductions are occasionally informative:

Many men have made a life work of editing a magazine; Lester del Rey, very nearly single-handedly, edited five—at least one of them, Space Science Fiction, close to the top of its field. Since this occupied fewer than 60 of the 168 hours in a week, he filled his idle time with a writing production schedule which has been known to top 50,000 words over a weekend.  p. 34

Tenn’s first science-fiction story was written between watches as a Merchant Marine radio operator just after the war; his second was written within a matter of hours after recovering from the shock of getting an immediate check for the first. That was Child’s Play—anthologised, to date, no fewer than six times, with more coming up.  p. 88

[Robert Sheckley’s] first story appeared only one year before the original publication date of this collection.  p. 151

Summing up, I’d have to say I found this volume a slight disappointment: I expected, from its reputation, a high quality production but it’s much more mixed than that. Nevertheless, this is an interesting group of stories, especially coming to them from reading an older run of Astoundings: you can easily see the improvement in standards over time—they all seem better written and constructed.
Talking of Astounding, my hunch would be that the Morrison, Kornbluth, del Rey, Simak, Asimov, and Kuttner/Moore stories could have appeared in the 1950’s version of that magazine, but not the others. I’d hazard a guess (my knowledge of other magazines of the time is not as good as I’d like) that the Wyndham, Merril, Bradbury, and Leinster stories could appear in mainstream magazines like the Saturday Evening Post, or in F&SF, and the Leiber (taboos permitting), Gold, and Clarke could have joined them in the latter. The Tenn and the Sheckley seem like Galaxy stories (would Campbell have used Tenn’s anti-war or Sheckley’s victorious alien story? Possibly Sheckley’s, given he used Philip K. Dick’s Imposter, but I doubt it.)
Finally, I note that the majority seem to depend for their overall effect on a gimmick or clever ending.
Worth a look.  ●

_____________________

1. Anthony Boucher & J. Francis McComas, (The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction, May 1953) provide a brief comment:

Leading the science fiction collections is Frederik Pohl’s Star Science Fiction Stories (Ballantine), available both in paperback form and in an unusually inexpensive hardcover edition, and containing fifteen stories never before published in any form, representing most of the top names in the field at the height of their ability—in all, as welcome a bargain as you’re apt to find in the year’s crop.  p. 90

Groff Conklin, (Galaxy Science Fiction, June 1953) opens his review with this:

Here, friends, is science fiction’s World of Tomorrow in publishing: an original 35-cent paper-backed anthology of first-rate short stones never before published in any form, magazine or book! True, it’s not “reading tapes.” such as we old s.f. fans have been promised in the W. of T., but it’s the next best thing.  p. 120

Conklin then talks in detail about the stories:

[For] my taste, the opener by William Morrison is a bit on the ghastly side, despite a fresh idea and good handling. On the other hand, we have Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore (husband and wife) with a magnificent farce-fantasy on psychoanalysis; and we also have A-class stories by Leinster, Clarke, Kornbluth, del Rey, Leiber (with a bit about “Slickie Millane” that should make a Certain Novelist want to sue for ego-damages!), Simak, John Wyndham, Tenn, H. L. Gold (what a sock ending!), Bradbury (exquisite tale!), and Asimov. (He’s going fantasy, too!) . . .
Only a couple of items fell flat on my ear, besides the Morrison. Judith Merril’s seemed in need of cutting, I thought, and Robert Sheckley’s Mars was a bit too much like Bradbury’s Mars.  p. 120-121

Leslie Flood (New Worlds Science Fiction #29, November 1954) says the anthology is “aptly named”, and “practically all of the stories are superior to the general run of anthologies.” He notes that, of these fifteen specially commissioned stories, two, the del Rey and the Sheckley, have been reprinted in New Worlds. He says, “I enjoyed every one, and I think you will agree with me that this is a rare science fiction treat.”  As for specifics, he adds:

On the light-weight (and lighter), side are Kornbluth’s “Dominoes” and Gold’s “The Man With English”; the broad humour of Fritz Leiber’s hilarious travesty “The Night He Cried,” and a curious piece by Arthur C. Clarke called “The Nine Billion Names of God.” I liked the gentle irony of William Tenn’s “The Deserter,” and John Wyndham’s delightful time-twist in “The Chronoclasm.” I inhaled with very great pleasure Ray Bradbury’s “A Scent of Sarsaparilla,” and was moved by Simak’s “Contraption” and Judy Merril’s poignant “So Proudly We Hail.” I recommend this collection unhesitatingly.  p. 119-120

Damon Knight (Science Fiction Adventures, December 1953) says:

I remarked about Healy’s New Tales of Space and Time that an anthologist working with a single-shot collection of new stories is unlikely to better a good single issue of a top-flight magazine. That still goes; this is a bright, exceedingly readable collection, however, and its four A’s and six B stories make up for five stinkers. The B’s are high B’s; perhaps I ought to explain that I keep the first category for stories that seem to me either absolutely flawless or so near as makes no difference; a great many good stories go into the second compartment for some small logical lapse or element of triteness. Cyril Kornbluth’s Dominoes and John Wyndham’s The Chronodasm, for example, are beautiful jobs of writing, but their time-paradox plots strike me as stale. William Morrison’s Country Doctor is a memorable thing, probably the best work this writer has done yet; several unanswered or badly answered questions about the ailing monster kept me from enjoying it fully. H. L. Gold’s tongue-in-cheek The Man With English contains an essential bit of illogic; Ray Bradbury’s A Scent of Sarsaparilla and Murray Leinster’s The Journey are low-key stories, unimprovable but relatively unexciting.
The C’s include Clifford D. Simak’s plotless and soupily ruriphile Contraption, Judith Merril’s soap-opera So Proudly We Hail, William Tenn’s hortatory and humorless The Deserter, Isaac Asimov’s “Nobody Here But and Robert Sheckley’s The Last Weapon, the last pair both too trite, for my taste, to be redeemed by occasional flashes of brilliance.
The A’s are wonderful: Idealist by Lester del Rey, a world’s-end story written with the quiet competence which distinguishes this writer’s best work; Fritz Leiber’s The Night He Cried, an absolutely demolishing satire on a certain “Slickie Millane;” a little gem by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore called A Wild Surmise, in which two mutually exclusive psychiatrists, one spectacled, one bug-eyed, wrestle for the soul of a gentleman who does not believe in either of them; and Arthur C. Clarke’s The Nine Billion Names of God, about which I will only say that the ending is predictable, but this fact doesn’t matter in the least.  p. 120-121

Robert W. Lowndes (Future Science Fiction, May 1953) says this isn’t a typical anthology:

[What] we have here is a representative sample of just about every type of science-fiction writing, and every separate attitude toward science-fiction, that is to be found on the contemporary scene. The odds are that no one (except that rare person who enjoys everything labelled “science fiction”) is going to like all the stories in this volume; but, whether you like a given tale or not, you will find it no less than competent in story-line and writing—and you’ll find a number that are considerably more than just good.

Lowndes has these specific comments:

Morrison offers a very fine example of what I would call the “straight” science fiction yarn—a fascinating scientific problem, not cluttered with abstruse gimmicks or technology, combined with an equally-fascinating human situation. Kornbluth presents the hard-boiled approach, but not overdone, with a “trip to the future for a valuable tip” theme, del Rey and Tenn give their own versions of the ethical problem story, the latter satirical, where the former is straight. (And In both instances, I felt that the story could have been done better, and that the author himself was the one to do it better after a cooling-off period.) Leiber presents a delightful burlesque of the Mickey Spillane school, which has invaded science-fiction of late; while Simak offers a “child” story, which some will find moving, but which also struck me as being heavy-handed. Wyndham represents the intellectual and literary approach, which manages to maintain a light touch, and is all the more effective for it; Gold goes in for more of the belly-laugh type of humor, and his story will be more appreciated by those who have not read Lemkin’s “A Matter of Nerves” (June, 1932 Amazing Stories) and Dr. Code’s, “A Surgical Error” (Astounding Stories, November, 1937) —in short, to those readers to whom this will look like a new idea.
Judith Merril presents the “woman’s slick” treatment to science fiction (and, it should be noted, without many of the inane tabus one finds in that medium), while those who consider Bradbury’s nostalgia for 1910, and thereabouts, to be in the science-fiction orbit, will enjoy his tale. (I don’t, and didn’t.) Asimov gives forth a lighthearted (but not completely so; there are deeper undertones here) account of man versus thinking-machine; Sheckley has a facile, but enjoyable biter-bit tale, and the Kuttners combine with a somewhat delirious but completely enjoyable takeoff on psychiatry, human and inhuman. Leinster’s slice of people “as real as you and I”, I found tedious, but can’t condemn it—it’s part of the plenum, and better done than many other specimens, Lord knows. And, speaking of the Lord, Arthur C. Clarke has examined theology on a scientific basis in his “[The Nine] Billion Names of God”, with frightening, but stimulating results.

Lowndes concludes by saying that the volume is a bargain, and a selection that could not be found in any single magazine issue (the opposite of Knight’s view!) He adds, “I think any of my colleagues would have loved to have some of the stories, and would have cheerfully bounced others, as I would have myself.”

Sam Merwin, Jr. (Fantastic Universe, August-September 1953) says that it is an “outstanding volume,” and that readers need to pick their own favourites. However, “we personally went most heavily for the tales by Morrison, Bradbury, Sheckley, del Rey and the Kuttner-Moore combine. But there isn’t a bad story in the entire book.”

P. Schuyler Miller (Astounding Science Fiction, August 1953) says, in part:

[This] is an excellent collection of original short stories selected by and written for the author-editor-agent, Frederik Pohl [. . .].
There are fifteen stories in the book, whose contents page runs like a roll-of-honor of the best current magazines. Most of them are good, some of them stand out.
One of these is the opening yarn, William Morrison’s “Country Doctor,” in which a veterinarian on Mars has to get inside his patient to find out what’s wrong. It is one of the best of the “old-fashioned” problem tales of situation. Then there is Fritz Leiber’s outrageous satire on Mickey Spillane’s detective stories, “The Night He Cried.” And I liked John Wyndham’s “The Chronoclasm,” a time-twister, the irony of William Tenn’s “The Deserter,” and Arthur C. Clarke’s outre “The Nine Billion Names of God,” in which a computer invades secret Tibet. . . .[?]
The old business of seeing the future and growing rich is the theme of C. M. Kornbluth’s “Dominoes,” one of the minor items in the collection. Lester del Rey’s “Idealist” is a wry little tale of one man in war, not unlike “The Deserter.” Clifford D. Simak has a neat gadget-story in “Contraption,” H. L. Gold replaces the gadget with the gimmick of a man whose senses reverse in “The Man With English,” and Ray Bradbury uses time to his own good ends in “A Scent of Sarsaparilla.”
From Judith Merril we have a characteristically human story of a wife who must stay behind when her husband goes to Mars, “So Proudly We Hail.” Isaac Asimov uses the mechanistic approach to romance in “Nobody Here But . . .” From Robert Sheckley it’s a not too original commentary on man and Martians, “The Last Weapon,” while “Lewis Padgett” fissions into Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore to do “A Wild Surmise,” a rollicking twist on psychoanalysis and dreams which belongs right in there with the best. Then Murray Leinster has a very human little episode about a boy in space, “The Journey.”
Even without the Ballantine prices, this would be a good anthology—and remember, it’s all brand new.

Sam Moskowitz (Science-Fiction Plus, May 1953) states that a number of the stories are “very strong,” and “it is difficult to see how the potential purchaser could go wrong, [regardless of which edition purchased]”.

Mark Reinsberg (Imagination, September 1953) says:

Here’s a remarkably good anthology at a bargain price. Remarkably, because all fifteen stories in it are printed for the first time. Usually that would make one doubt their quality—several other s-f anthologies having presented original material with dismal results. But Pohl’s collection is a tribute to his gathering as well as editorial abilities.
Admirable variety of content is supplied by [. . .] Leiber’s droll alien-sex parody of Mickey Spillane, Clarke’s muted end of the universe, Simak’s rural “Contraption,” Tenn’s grim interlude in the eighteenth year of Jovian siege, [. . .] and Wyndham’s charming trans-time love affair pointing up the romantic aura that future centuries may well attach to our own present-day life.
Pohl’s urban [urbane?] prefaces to each tale set the right biographical tone, even if in a few instances the stories themselves falter. Neither science nor fantasy are overly obtrusive in this collection, which maintains a welcome balance of cosmic logic and warmheartedness.

George O. Smith (Space Science Fiction, May 1953 and Space Science Fiction, September 1953) says:

Ballantine Books recently created quite a furor with their plan to produce originals in both hard covers and pocket-size simultaneously. Now they’ve turned to science fiction, and their first book is due out March 16, 1953. It’s an anthology, but every short story is brand new and hasn’t previously appeared!
[. . .]
The stories by Gold, Leiber, and del Rey represent the best by these writers, and rate high among even a generally excellent selection. But the prize goes to Country Doctor, by William Morrison; this should easily place among the top dozen stories of the year. In fact, the book looks like the best buy in science fiction for this or any other year.  p. 85

He adds these further comments in a second review:

(If you can’t get the hard-cover edition, try the 35¢ edition. Ballantine Books has no fear of competing against themselves; they bring the pocket and the hardcover volumes out simultaneously. I doubt that the rest of us will ever hear whether this is a financially sound procedure directly, but if it works, it will be shown by continued operations along these same lines. My personal opinion is that it is sound.)  p. 95

Uncredited (Editor Samuel Mines?) (Thrilling Wonder Stories, June 1953) says:

The quality, as in practically all anthologies, is somewhat uneven, there are both good and indifferent stories in the collection. We liked Country Doctor by William Morrison, the tale of a vet who goes down into the stomach of a huge alien beast sick on a space ship. The Man With English by Horace Gold was lightweight but smoothly entertaining. A Scent of Sarsaparilla by Ray Bradbury was a nostalgic tale in the Bradbury-manner, of a man who found spring in his attic. So Proudly We Hail by Judith Merril explored the agonies of a young wife who couldn’t go to Mars with her husband. The Deserter by William Tenn probed at the most ticklish of alien stories— suppose the protagonist finds himself more in sympathy with the aliens than his own kind?
[. . .]
Compared to most anthologies, this is excellent value.

Bud Webster’s Anthopology 101: The Pohl Star is a useful essay on the history of the Star Science Fiction Stories series, and is followed by comments on the stories in each of the volumes. This is what he has to say about #1:

Morrison was a pseudonym for Joseph Samachson [. . .]; this story concerns a doctor on Mars who really gets into his work. Kornbluth’s “Dominoes” is an uncharacteristically pedestrian yarn on a subject that had already been explored any number of times. Alas, the del Rey is a good example of a bad, idea-driven story, and an excellent example of why I frequently find his work frustrating; too long a build-up to a disappointing pay-off. The Leiber is a terrific hard-boiled parody, targeting Mickey Spillane specifically. The Simak is typically and pleasantly Simakian, if not one that stands out from his other pastoral tales; it reminds me a little of Avram Davidson’s “The Goobers”. The Wyndham works for exactly the opposite reason that the del Rey doesn’t: it’s a much-used idea, but the characters are more fully developed. The Tenn . . . the Tenn! If you can forgive the author one cardboard characterization (and I, for one, have no trouble doing that), “Deserter” is a brilliant little gem; the ending is both heroic and tragic, but without either the nostalgia of the Bradbury or the heart-break of the Merril. Gold’s “The Man with English” could have appeared in Unknown Worlds, and if it’s dated, it doesn’t hurt the story in the least; it’s still funny. [. . .] Merril’s “So Proudly We Hail” is tragic, beautiful, and could have been written last week; except for a few bits of hardware, it’s absolutely timeless. Bradbury’s story is the flipside of Heinlein’s “The Man Who Traveled in Elephants”; nostalgia both sweet and bitter, but with a different, less idyllic ending. Asimov described “Nobody Here But . . .” as his one and only “big lug” story, and it’s an apt description; Asimov’s humor could fall pretty flat, but not here. The Sheckley is typical of his early work, which is to say witty and O’Henry-esque; this is exactly the kind of story he built his reputation on. The Kuttner-Moore yarn is a gleeful little dig at psychiatry, a much-used trope in the early ’50s; of them all, this is one of the best. Speaking of the best, the Leinster alone is worth the whole Star series; if there was ever a single story to prove to a new generation why Leinster was called the “Dean of Science Fiction” long before Heinlein was, it’s this one. I doubt anyone has to be reminded of the Clarke story; it’s deservedly a classic in the field, and one that left this 10 year-old church-goer gasping at its audacity.

Webster’s collected anthology essays are available in Anthopology 101: Reflections, Inspections and Dissections of SF Anthologies, 2001 (Amazon UK/USA).

I found these dozen or so reviews fascinating: not only do the favourites vary wildly, there is only moderate mention of Clarke’s The Nine Billion Names of God, a future Hall of Fame story (the Leiber seems the standout, followed by the Morrison and the Kuttner/Moore).

2. The Science Fiction Encyclopedia page on the Avon Science Fiction reader series says it was “treated by Wollheim as an anthology series [. . .] but by contemporary readers as a magazine.” There is also this from the page for the Avon Fantasy Reader: “Magazine bibliographers consider it a magazine; book bibliographers think of it as a series of books.”

3. Pohl describes how he became involved with the Ian and Betty Ballantine (the publishers) in his autobiography, The Way the Future Was:

I showed the tear sheets of Gravy Planet to Ian. Poor fellow, he was just too inexperienced a publisher to know it was no good. So he published it. And kept on publishing it, for twenty-some years.
Not only that, now that he had caught the sf fever he wanted more. I trotted out half a dozen candidates from the limitless resources of my agency, and he bought them all. We will do one science-fiction title a month, Ian decided, but in order to assure a supply, we will have to figure out some way of keeping our image bright in the memories of all science-fiction writers. How do we go about that?
Well, I said, you could publish an anthology. There is nothing like getting checks, even smallish anthology-sized checks, to make a writer aware of your existence. Come to that, I’d be glad to edit one for you.
Ian pondered that for a moment, and then his face lit up. No, he said, I don’t want to do what all the other publishers have done. I want to do something original—in fact, what I want to do is an anthology of all original stories. You edit it. We’ll outpay the magazines, to get the very best. We’ll call it—we’ll call it—well, never mind, we’ll think of something to call it. You get the stories.
That’s how Star Science Fiction was born. There have been a good many imitations of it since, but Star was the first regular series of anthologies of originals.
And, you know, not bad, either. It should have been pretty good; I had everything going for me. So many of the best writers in the field were my clients that I could easily get first look at the cream of the crop. I couldn’t shortstop it all. I had, after all, some obligations to the editors I had been dealing with. But I also had some obligations to my writers, and Ian had opened the treasure chest wide enough so that we were paying twice as much as the magazines.
So I began assembling stories, first by checking out what my own clients had to offer.  p. 161

Pohl adds that he waived his agents fee on stories he bought from his clients.

4. In The Way the Future Was Pohl tells an amusing story about The Man With English:

It also gave me perhaps the sweetest moment of revenge I have ever tasted, on the hapless body of Horace Gold.
The thing about Horace was that he was a dynamite editor, energetic, talented, skilled, but he had this one little fault. He could not keep his fingers off his writers’ prose. He got his training under Leo Margulies, in the old pulp-chain days when an editor’s productivity was measured by the proportion of pencil markings on the pages he sent to the printer. Horace never forgot the lessons learned at Leo’s knee.
He drove some writers wild. Even Cyril Kornbluth, compleat pro, casehardened against all editorial madness. Even me. We all muttered in our beer about the way Horace tinkered with our words. Most of us tried to tolerate it—he was, after all, putting out just about the best magazine in science fiction. But we hated it. It was the kind of curse that seems put upon the world to strengthen our spirit, like hemorrhoids or the torment of psoriasis.
And then Ian gave me Star to edit, and Horace gave me the manuscript of his story, “The Man with English.”
Cyril dropped into the office just as I was finishing reading it, and I told him what it was. Are you going to buy it? he asked. I told him I was, and he looked pensive. You know, he said, I’d like to buy a story from Horace. I’d like to buy it, and then edit it. I’d like to go over it from beginning to end, with twelve sharp pencils, and then—
He stopped, and we looked at each other. Inspiration was born.
So I sent Cyril out for a bottle while I had my secretary type up another copy of the script. (There were not yet Xeroxes in every office!) I prepared the new copy for the printer and sent it off, and then Cyril and I settled down to enjoy ourselves.
Ah, the creativity of that evening! No manuscript has ever been as edited as that one. We changed the names of the characters. We changed their descriptions. If they were tall, we made them short. We gave them Irish brogues and made them stutter. We switched all the punctuation at random and killed the point of all the jokes. We mangled his sentence structure and despoiled the rolling cadence of his prose, and then we came to the point of the story. The hero of “The Man with English” has somehow had his senses switched around, so that he hears light and sees sound. At the end of the story he thinks he has had them straightened out, but then he wrinkles his nose and asks, “What smells purple?” We argued over that for half an hour, and then crossed it out and wrote in, “He said, ‘Gee, there’s a kind of a funny, you know sort of smell around here, don’t you think?’”
And then, with great cunning, I let the manuscript be mixed in with some others intended for Horace, as if by accident, and dropped them all off at his apartment on my way home from work. And by the time I walked into my house the phone was ringing.
If you ask Horace about it now, he will tell you, sure, he knew it was a gag all the time. Don’t you believe him. “Fred,” he said, “uh, listen. I mean—well, look, Fred. You know I’m a pro. I don’t object to editing. But . . .” Long pause. Then, “Jesus, Fred!” he finished.
Well, in the long run it made no difference; Horace kept on doing what he always did, making authors weep and putting out a fine magazine. But one thing it did do. For a while one evening it made Cyril and me feel a lot better.  p. 162-163

5. The Wikipedia page on Synaesthesia. Gully Foyle experiences this in The Stars My Destination. Is this where Bester got the idea?

6. The Merril story was the reason I read the anthology, coming to it after a discussion in the Great SF Stories group about her Dead Center and So Proudly We Hail, and whether they were stories that should have made the ‘Year’s Best’ collections. (Actually, Dead Center did make a year’s best—it is in The Best American Short Stories 1955. There is a letter from Andy Duncan in Locus about the handful of SF magazine stories that have made it into that anthology series and the O. Henry one.)
While I’m talking about Merril, I’d suggest that Knight’s “soap opera” comment above about So Proudly We Hail is rather superficial. That criticism could certainly be made about some of her work (I’d say that about Death Is the Penalty, Astounding January 1949, reviewed here recently) but I think he underestimates Proudly.

7. The introductions also appear to be revised: there is mention of C. M. Kornbluth’s death at the age of 34 (in 1958, five years after this anthology first appeared).  ●

rssrss

Tor.com Short Fiction, May-June 2019

Stories

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Jason McGregor, Featured Futures

_____________________

Editors, Patrick Nielsen Hayden (x2), George R. R. Martin, Lee Harris, Ellen Datlow (x2)

Fiction:
Murder in the Spook House • by Michael Swanwick
Long is the Way • by Carrie Vaughn and Sage Walker
Any Way the Wind Blows • by Seanan McGuire
Skinner Box • by Carole Johnstone
The New Prometheus • by Michael Swanwick +
A Forest, or A Tree • by Tegan Moore

Non-fiction:
Interior artwork • by John Picacio, Gregory Manchess (x3), Adam Baines, Samuel Araya

_____________________

The first thing to mention is that the cover above is a placeholder made by me1: I needed an image as the third issue of Tor’s new bimonthly magazine/anthology has not yet appeared (they still seem to be in the process of filling a staff vacancy2). What follows are reviews of the stories that appeared on the Tor.com website3 during May and June. I’ve already commented on the two Swanwick stories in my last post, so I’ve cut and pasted them at the end of this one for the convenience of anyone who hasn’t seen them.

John Picacio

Long is the Way by Carrie Vaughn and Sage Walker is a story from the ‘Wild Cards’ franchise, and starts with an ‘Ace’ (superhero for anyone not up on the ‘Wild Card’ terminology) called Jonathan Hive driving to an interview with another Ace called Zoe Harris. Harris may have been involved in a terrorist attack on Jerusalem twenty years ago but now, apparently, runs a perfume factory.
Hive is so-called as he has the ability to transform himself into a swarm of wasps, and he reconnoiters the facility where Harris works by sending a couple of individual insects ahead:

One bug caught a glimpse: a woman approaching . . . and she saw him. Them. She was a joker, with a face that looked melted on one side, average white middle-aged matron on the other, with brown hair tied in a ponytail. She held a tightly coiled newspaper in one hand. The pair of bugs crawled along the ceiling—well out of reach of the universal weapon of “death to insects.”
And then her arm stretched. She whipped it back and flung it out, once, twice, and both wasps smashed into spots of goo. Well, then. Jonathan felt the buggy deaths as an itch. He decided not to send out any more bugs, at least not right now.

When Harris meets Hive she dismisses his cover story about interviewing her about perfume, and tells him she knows who he is. Harris then proceeds to tell him what she has been doing over the last two decades. This story involves an old lover called Croyd (an Ace fugitive who is also known as “The Sleeper”) springing her from an asylum and taking her to deliver his pregnant lover’s baby.
The childbirth is described graphically, and at length, and (spoiler) it does not go well (the mother dies of pre-eclampsia). When they take the child to a village to get help, Croyd disappears overboard from their boat, and Harris and another Ace called Needles are left with the child. They go on to the local village.
As a result of this experience Harris sets up the perfumery (really a refuge), and eventually saves ten people from unfortunate circumstances.
This is an okay read, but it is obviously a fragmentary and interstitial piece of ‘Wild Cards’ backstory and doesn’t stand on its own. If you are not into the ‘Wild Cards’ series it will probably not do much for you.

Gregory Manchess

Any Way the Wind Blows by Seanan McGuire is a short piece written to commemorate the move of Tor Publishing out of the Flatiron building4 in Manhattan. It is narrated by an airship captain from one of many parallel worlds, and there is a lot of backstory about the multiverse that they travel. We learn, among other things, that there are Greek Gods, and creatures who eat reality. In among these discursive descriptions there are moments of Crew Banter:

I turn. Our navigator is looking over his shoulder at me. Well. One of his heads is. The other is still watching the curved window that makes up the front of our airship, crystal clear and apparently fragile. Most people who attack us aim for that window first, not asking themselves how many protections we’d put on a sheet of glass that size. The fact that it’s not a solid mass of bugs doesn’t seem to be the clue it should.
“What is it?”
He smiles uncertainly. “I think I see the Flatiron.”
That makes me stand a little straighter. Not every parallel has a Flatiron Building. Oh, every one we’ve discovered where the European colonists constructed a settlement in the area we know as “Manhattan” has had plans for a Flatiron Building, but they don’t always get built, and once they’re built, they don’t always survive. Some of them have burnt. Others were bombed. One of them was infected by an artificial bacterium intended to help destroy landfills by converting them into arable soil, which had converted it into the largest pile of loam I’d ever seen. An intact Flatiron is reason to celebrate.
Maybe. “How secure does the structure look?”
“Seems stable.”
That’s . . . good. “Is there a docking station on the roof?”
“Negative, captain.” Daphne looks up from her instruments. “The mammals below us are pointing and stopping as we pass overhead. I don’t think the airship caught on in this parallel.”
“Oh, lovely. Primitives.”
“There are flying machines,” says one of the other bridge crew. “They seem to operate on an internal combustion basis, but they get where they’re going. Fast, too. If we had one of those, we’d be home within the quarter.”
“With our surveys half-finished,” I snap. “You can’t chart ground properly if you’re moving across it too fast for anything to record. Use your head, or we’ll get you a new one.”
“I’d like a new head,” says the navigator. “The ones I have don’t provide me with a full range of vision. Three heads, now. Three heads is where it’s at.”

After the leisurely setup they arrive at the building and the incursion team is deployed. The locals request a meeting with the captain, and when he descends to the building he meets what I presume are a number of the Tor publishers and editors:

One of the locals, a cadaverous man who looks like he’s already been killed and resurrected three or four times—so maybe these people are more civilized than they seem—is practically vibrating, smiling so broadly that he’s in danger of splitting his lower lip. “This is really happening, this is really, really happening,” he says. He turns to another of the locals, a shorter woman with graying hair and a politely bemused expression. “You owe me ten dollars.”
“I never made that bet,” says the woman. “Excuse me, ah, Captain, but are you saying these people really came from your, ah, airship up there? From another dimension?”
How much has the incursion team told these people? “Yes,” I say stiffly, lowering my hand. “We come in peace. We don’t intend you any harm.”
“Those two sentences mean the same thing, usually,” says the third local, a balding man who seems short next to the living cadaver, but is about the same height as most of the men in my crew. He has an Albian accent. It sounds weird here in a New Amsterdam cognate. He’s as out of place as we are. “Is there a reason you need to say both?”

A pleasant if minor piece.

Adam Baines

Skinner Box by Carole Johnstone has a content warning for “sexual content, including abuse and assault” (are today’s readers really so fragile?), and good hook line:

I didn’t always fantasise about killing him. I used to fantasise about fucking him, and when that lived up to expectations, I fantasised about marrying him. Which didn’t.

The narrator is Evie, who is on a spaceship that is heading out to beyond Jupiter, and which has two other crew members: Mas, the Zimbabwean ship engineer and her lover, and Don, a scientist and her abusive husband. Evie’s job is to conduct behavioural conditioning experiments on nanites in a Skinner box.5 Although there is some material related to this—the control of AI and neural networks—the story largely focuses on Evie’s relationship with Mas, and her plan to get him to kill her husband Don. As the story progresses we also learn about Boris, a previous lover of Evie’s on an earlier trip.
Eventually (and it is “eventually,” as the story is quite a long haul) we learn that (spoiler) Boris and Mas may be the ones who were/are the subjects of a conditioning experiment—we also learn that Boris is an android who is deactivated, and lying in a locked cabin. Then Evie locks Mas (who we later find out isn’t an android) in his cabin to prevent him following through with their plan/his conditioning. There are even more reveals, and we find out that almost no one is who or what we (or they) think they are.
The last section of the story has Evie coming to terms with the fact that she is the subject of the experiment, and a transhuman to boot. She is later reunited with Mas.
This is reasonably engaging for the most part, but the rug is pulled out from under the reader so many times in the final section that it’s hard to care about anything by the end. As I’ve already noted, it is longer than it needs to be (and it also outstays its welcome—the last part seems somewhat anti-climactic).
It reminded me a little of the movie Moon.

Samuel Araya

A Forest, or A Tree by Tegan Moore concerns four young women on a hike. Although it is a little difficult to work out who is who to start with, it soon becomes clear that: Elizabeth is a foul-mouth who thinks everything is “dicks”; May is the solitary black character; Piper has digestive problems; and Ailey is an experienced woodsman/leader.
There is some sparky dialog, such as this spooky story-telling scene at an evening campfire:

[Elizabeth said,] “Have you heard of Stick Indians?”
“That sounds racist,” Ailey said.
“Stick Native Americans,” Piper said. A trace of sunlight flickered over her closed eyes.
“They call it Stick Indians. I didn’t make it up.”
“Repeating things doesn’t make them not racist,” May said. She hadn’t meant to say it so vehemently. She glanced around their circle to see if anyone had flinched, and relaxed her shoulders.
“Okay, so,” Elizabeth said. “Someone posted this story—it was obviously a story, it had characters and a plot and whatever; real stories aren’t that well organized. A bunch of kids were out camping and were hassled by this tree monster. Whatever, it was dumb, but I hadn’t heard about Stick Indians before.”
Now Piper watched Elizabeth, interested. Ailey poked at the fire.
“Anyway. I looked around and there wasn’t much info. A couple old websites with Yakama Indian legends, but all the sites had basically the same story, and you could tell it was copy-pasted. That first site I saw referenced some books I couldn’t find on Amazon, but I later I saw the same titles in a couple different places. Enough to make me think the books might at least be real.”
“You could try a library,” Ailey said. “Like, where actual research is done.”

The women eventually retire for the night but, when they wake the next day, Ailey and May discover that their pile of firewood, and more besides, has been scattered all over the campsite. They also find Piper is sick, and can’t stop going to the toilet. After some discussion, Ailey, Elizabeth, and May go hiking on their own, leaving Piper to rest.
When they return at the end of the day they find Piper’s condition has deteriorated. As they  question her, Elizabeth sees a deer-like shape with antlers like “huge fucking trees”. They decide that, as night is falling, they will go for help in the morning.
The final section (spoiler) has Elizabeth and May go for help. During their trip, Elizabeth is spooked by a deer (apparently a normal one this time) and she runs towards the ridge (the most direct but steepest route to their car). May is left to go on her own by the normal route, and gets to the car before Elizabeth. Rather than waiting she decides to set off and look for help.
After trying at a couple of empty houses/stores, May finds a house with a hostile female occupant. She finally breaks in to use the phone, and the climactic scene takes place inside a house as the Stick Indian crashes through the French doors, and the old woman waves a shotgun around.
This final scene did not work for me for a number of reasons: why had the Stick Indian followed May rather than Elisabeth (there is an inference earlier that it was following the latter of the two)? Why did it not attack May in the forest when she was on her own? Why does the householder act in such an odd way? What actually happens in this scene? Is it actually happening? (“It—the thing, the creature, if it was even truly there—lifted its dreadful, awful crest and looked at May with no eyes.”)
A pity this doesn’t have a better ending, as it is quite good for the most part.
As mentioned above, I’ve already reviewed the two Michael Swanwick stories,6 both of which are set in a magical, early 20th Century version of Europe under threat of invasion from the Mongolian Wizard and his hordes. The story’s main protagonist is a German called Ritter, who works as an investigator for an English wizard and MI5 spy chief called Sir Toby.

Gregory Manchess

Murder in the Spook House starts with Ritter arriving at a tank depot to investigate yet another murder (a repeating plot device in this series), and this time it is (spoiler) Sir Toby who has copped it. As Ritter is taken by the officer in charge to see the body, the pair see a raven appear and disappear—this is another time anomaly event, similar to the one Ritter experienced in the previous story.
After some of the usual sniffing about by Ritter’s wolf Freki, Ritter uncovers the murderer. The ending resurrects Sir Toby—and his dead doppelgänger disappears back to whatever timeline it came from.
This story suffers not only from having yet another murder investigation at its core, but also from the same unconvincing temporal shenanigans as the previous tale: if the writer can magically undo any of the story’s previous events by timeline manipulation, how can they expect to maintain any dramatic tension?

Gregory Manchess

The New Prometheus is this world’s Frankenstein story, and opens with Ritter driving a dog-sled across the Arctic in pursuit of his quarry. When the creature sets up camp, and Ritter establishes it is safe to approach—he sends Freki ahead and watches as the wolf gets its tummy rubbed—he enters his quarry’s tent and listens to its story. We find out that the creature is a homunculus created by the Mongolian Wizard:

“It is a gruesome process. First the skeleton is assembled from the living bones of various animals. Human bones would not do, for it was desired to give me the features and physiognomy of a god. Bones taken from dead creatures would be . . . dead. So animals were required to suffer. It took a phalanx of surgical wizards just to keep the skeleton viable while muscles and cartilage were attached, nerves grown to interlace the flesh, organs coaxed into interaction, skin convinced to cover all . . . More magical talents were employed in my creation than for any other single purpose in human history. It is doubtful that anyone but my father—for so I consider him—could have arranged for such a thing. And even he had to effectively bring the war to a standstill to free up the resources necessary for it.”

Ritter later learns of the homunculus’s education (part of which was done by Ritter’s uncle, a prisoner under compulsion), and that it is capable of all the magical arts—not just single talents like humans. However, its gift for mind-reading means it suffers from constant exposure to human thoughts, hence the flight to the Arctic.
At the end of the story (spoiler) the homunculus paralyses Ritter and leaves the tent to take what seems the only logical course of action. After it disappears over the horizon, Ritter sees a terrific explosion.
I found this an engrossing account of the short life and death of an almost godlike bring, and it’s one of the series’ better stories.

I liked Manchess’s three illustrations the best, and thought the others okay or better. Again, the cover at the top is a fake created by me.1

Another weak issue: given this venture’s superior word rates, I expected more quality than I’ve seen in the last three volumes. Given Tor.com’s numerous award nominations in the past, I wonder if they are going through a weak patch? Do any regular readers have an opinion on this?  ●

_____________________

1. Designed from scratch.

2. The Tor job advert is here.

3. You can find Tor.com’s stories in web-format here, and the bi-monthly ‘newsletter’ here (if it is still going).

4. There is a Wikipedia page for the Flatiron building.

5. There is a Wikpedia page on Skinner boxes or, as they describe them, “Opearant conditioning chambers”.

6. All of Swanwick’s ‘Mongolian Wizard’ stories are reviewed here.  ●

Edited 23:59, cover image replaced.

rssrss

Michael Swanwick’s ‘The Mongolian Wizard’ series

ISFDB
Tor, Amazon UK/US

_____________________

Editor, Patrick Nielsen Hayden

Fiction:
The Mongolian Wizard • short story by Michael Swanwick ∗∗∗+
The Fire Gown • short story by Michael Swanwick +
Day of the Kraken • short story by Michael Swanwick
House of Dreams • short story by Michael Swanwick
The Night of the Salamander • short story by Michael Swanwick
The Pyramid of Krakow
• short story by Michael Swanwick +
The Phantom in the Maze • short story by Michael Swanwick
Murder in the Spook House
• short story by Michael Swanwick
The New Prometheus • short story by Michael Swanwick +

Non-fiction:
Artwork • by Gregory Manchess

_____________________

This isn’t a magazine or a book review, but a look at a series of stories from Michael Swanwick published on Tor.com since 2012.1 As I didn’t want to start with the seventh story (in the hopefully forthcoming May/June “issue” of Tor.com’s magazine), I went back to the beginning.

The series opens with The Mongolian Wizard, which introduces us to what I presume will be the series’ two main characters, a British wizard called Sir Toby (“Tobias Gracchus Willoughby-Quirke”), and Kaptainleutnant Franz-Karl Ritter (of the “Werewolf Corps”). They meet when the Sir Toby arrives at Scholss Greiffenhorst (“the wild griffins for which the region was famous were sporting in the sky above the snow-clad peaks of the Riphean Mountains”), where Ritter is in charge of security.
As you can tell, this takes place in a different version of Europe, a magical, early 20th Century one, and there is more fantasy furniture introduced throughout the course of the story. The first example of this is Sir Toby’s demonstration, to the conference of assembled wizards, of a miniature fortress containing forty soldiers no more than two inches tall. After their short military display, the soldiers are let into the walls of the schloss to hunt for rats and mice. Meanwhile, the conference discusses the threat from the Mongolian Wizard, who now controls all of Russia and threatens to invade the rest of Europe.
During the group’s political and social discussion, Sir Toby discreetly turns invisible, something noticed by Ritter. Although Ritter’s uncle has warned him about pestering Sir Toby, Ritter is suspicious, and thinks that the soldiers may be in the walls to spy on the conference. So he takes his wolf and searches the castle hoping to pick up Sir Toby’s scent (Ritter isn’t a werewolf, by the way, but can inhabit the mind of his wolf and use its senses).
The animal eventually leads Ritter to a basement room where they find Sir Toby, supposedly looking for his missing soldiers. Sir Toby confesses to being a spy for King Oberon VII, but adds that both their countries have a mutual interest in defeating the Mongolian Wizard.
Then the wolf finds the bodies of the soldiers in the next room—beside the body of a dead basilisk guarding a phoenix egg.
The rest of the story (spoiler) involves the evacuation of the schloss, the exposure of the Mongolian Wizard’s agent, and what happens to the egg the following dawn:

At sunrise, the mountaintop erupted in fire and ceased to be. Everyone in the village below, standing in the streets to watch, threw up their arms to block the sight and turned away from its fury. When Ritter could see again, there was a luminous cloud of smoke and ash rising from what had been Schloss Greiffenhorst. Coalescing in the heart of the fire, a mighty firebird slowly took form. It started to move its tremendous wings even before they were complete. Then, over the course of several minutes, it broke free of the rising cloud and began the long flight back to its ancestral homelands in the East.
“A terrifying sight,” Ritter said at last.
“There are worse to come,” Sir Toby replied. “I arrived at the conference late because, by a special dispensation of your Emperor Rupert, I had arranged an interview with the Wittenberg Sibyl. She foresees cities destroyed, farmlands blasted, the slaughter of millions in a pointless and genocidal war. This she told me in great and horrifying detail.”
“But surely that is only a possible future,” Ritter said. “As I understand it, the Sibyl always offers two contradictory predictions, one much darker than the other.”
“You don’t understand. What I told you was the good outcome. The one where, after terrible suffering, the Mongolian Wizard and his evil empire are defeated. The alternative—well, I do not care to speak of the alternative.”

The story ends with Sir Toby telling Ritter that he will arrange to have him join the British Secret Service.
A good start to what promises to be an original and enjoyable series.

The Fire Gown takes up the story as the armies of the Mongolian Wizard have invaded Poland, and Sir Tobias and Ritter arrive at Buckingham Palace (it’s just “Buckingham” in the text for some reason) to be told that Queen Titania has died from spontaneous combustion:

The soldiers standing guard before the queen’s door parted at their approach. Inside, Sir Toby discovered a perfect circle of black where the oriental carpet had been burned to cinder and a corresponding, though softer-edged, circle of soot on the ceiling above. The smell of charred human flesh lingered in the air.
The queen must have gone up like a flare.

Ritter uses his wolf Freki to investigate the scene, finding a small charred scrap of red cloth from the Queen’s dress. He notes it contains highly flammable salamander thread. Sir Tobias and Ritter then talk to the Queen’s dresser Lady Anne and, during her questioning, we see Ritter’s poor people skills:

“Who brought [the gown] to the palace?”
“It was Gregory Pinski.” Lady Anne lifted her head from Sir Toby’s embrace and almost smiled.
“He’s the clerk for Knopfman and Rosenberg. I don’t ordinarily know the names of the deliverymen, but Gregory is such a gossip, and such a flirt. Perfectly harmless, you understand, but very amusing.”
“When this Pinski brought the gown, did you happen to mention to him, among all the gossip and flirtation, that Queen Titania would be wearing the gown on this particular day?”
“I . . . I don’t remember. It’s possible, I suppose.”
“Think hard! Did you—?”
“Mr. Vestey!” Sir Toby said loudly. “Would you do us the kindness of escorting Lady Anne back to her chambers? She has had a difficult day and I shouldn’t be surprised if her doctor wants to prescribe a sedative for her.” Then, when the lady had departed, he turned to Ritter and exclaimed.
“My dear young dunderhead! You have the most damnably brusque way with women that I have ever seen in my life.”
“I get results,” Ritter said defensively. “That’s all that matters.”
“You haven’t gotten any results yet,” Sir Toby reminded him.

Sir Tobias then goes off to see the King, while Ritter leaves to question Pinski and his employers.
When Ritter arrives at the premises there is no one there, but eventually the daughter of the owner, Shulamith Rosenberg, returns. Ritter subjects her to a hostile interrogation during which he learns that the family are Russian, but Jewish refugees. After he is satisfied that she is innocent they look for her father, who they find dead. They then investigate the assistant’s room and find (spoiler) a bolt of salamander cloth in a trough of water, and a booby trapped box of bubonic fleas. When these latter escape Ritter is forced to ignite the salamander cloth and set the room on fire (to stop plague spreading throughout the city), an act that seriously injures him and kills Rosenberg.
This detective plot is interesting but slight; what really makes the story is its emotional arc, and this plays out when Ritter’s previous lack of empathy is revisited in the final scene. Here, Sir Toby offers him a surviving portrait of Shulamith Rosenberg and, although Ritter is baffled by this gesture, he takes the picture home and puts it on his wall. As he looks at it he breaks down and weeps.

Day of the Kraken starts off with another dressing down for Ritter when he opens a suspicious chest recovered from the river by shooting the lock off. It is full of Kraken’s eggs, planted in the river to hatch and make London unusable as a harbour. After paying off the alarmed fishermen, Sir Tobias lays into Ritter:

“What chunderheaded notion was that? You almost frightened those poor men out of their wits. Half of them were convinced the chest contained explosives.”
“When on duty, a portion of my thought is always inside Freki’s mind. He could smell the chest’s contents quite distinctly. There was no possibility of an explosion.”
“Ritter,” Sir Toby said, “there are times when I think that, save for your ignorance of human behavior and utter lack of humor, you have the makings of a first-rate aide.”
“I have an excellent sense of humor,” Ritter said indignantly.
“Have you really? I must remember to have you tell a joke someday in order to test this hypothesis.”

The next day Ritter arrives at the War Office to be told the Mongolian Wizard has attacked Germany with wyverns and giants. Ritter finds Sir Toby dealing with reports of five kidnapped young girls. These accounts note that a catholic vestment was planted at the scene of the last crime, and Sir Toby thinks the saboteurs who planted the kraken eggs intend to foment religious discord in the country by staging a bogus religious sacrifice.
Ritter (spoiler) is sent to find the kidnappers but, although he soon locates them, their sorceress leader puts him under a compulsion which neutralises him as a threat. When Ritter suggests to the sorceress that he is put with the crying girls to calm them down she agrees, and when he joins the children tells them stories about his wolf. He subsequently gets them to pretend to be wolves, and then goes into their minds and weaponises them. Ritter sets the children on the saboteurs when the door is opened, and foils the plot.
Sir Toby cavils about Ritter’s treatment of the youngsters at the end of the story. After this gentle reproof Ritter tries to tell a joke, only to be brushed off by Sir Toby (a clever call-back to the earlier scene).
This is perhaps the slightest of the three stories so far and, while enjoyable, one hopes there will be a more substantial piece coming up. Ritter is becoming an ever more interesting character—albeit one at the end of some psychological spectrum.

House of Dreams sees Ritter and his wolf Freki sent to penetrate the front line in Germany and meet an agent, but we only learn this after he wakes from a dream sequence conjured by two enemy alienists, Drs Borusk and Nergüi, who are holding him prisoner. The pair subject Ritter to several more dreams as they attempt to find out who he is meeting and why.
Eventually (spoiler), Freki breaks into the farmhouse/sanatorium where Ritter is being held prisoner and kills the two doctors. Ritter continues on to meet his contact, a wizard called Godot.
This story, more than any of the others so far, is too fragmentary.

The Night of the Salamander opens with Ritter flirting with a Lady Angélique at a party on the eve of a major battle when he receives a message from Sir Toby. There has been an incident concerning Field Marshal Pierre-Louis Martel and, from the coded note, Ritter suspects that Martel may be injured or dead. So Ritter asks Lady Angélique (who, in another social faux pas, Ritter assumed was a nurse before learning she was a surgeon) to accompany him.
When the pair arrive at Martel’s room Ritter is told that the field marshal has been assassinated and, on examination, his body shows evidence of external and internal burns, evidence of a pyromancer’s work. He has also been sodomised with an object.
Ritter learns that there are only three people who had recent access to Martel (his fourteen year old mistress, his valet, and his aide) so Ritter starts questioning them, beginning with the mistress, although Lady Angelique takes over the interview after Ritter again demonstrates his poor people skills.
When Ritter interrogates the aide, a Russian officer and refugee called Kasimov, the latter causally admits to hating the field marshal. Ritter learns later that the others probably felt the same way (Field Marshall Martel was a successful commander because of his supernatural glamour, and could convince people to do what he wanted even though they may not have liked him).
Ritter then talks to the valet and has his wolf search the premises, but the murder’s identity (spoiler) is only revealed when Lady Angélique finishes talking to the abused mistress, who admits to the crime but who had not realised she was a latent pyromancer.
This straightforward revelation is followed by further revelations about the valet (who Ritter uncovers as a Mongolian spy).
This is well enough done but, again, feels somewhat fragmentary.

The Pyramid of Krakow starts with Ritter on an undercover mission to Poland:

The man who got off the coach from Bern—never an easy trip but made doubly uncomfortable thanks to the rigors and delays of war—had a harsh and at first sight intimidating face. But once one took in his small black-glass spectacles and realized he was blind, pity bestowed upon him a softer cast. Until the coachman brought around his seeing-eye animal and it turned out to be a wolf.
The blind Swiss commercial agent took the wolf by the leash, placed a coin in the coachman’s hand, and then, accepting the leather tote containing toiletries, two changes of clothing, and not much else, strode into the cold and wintry streets of Krakow. On the rooftops, the gargoyles which the city tolerated because they kept down the rat population squinted and peered down at him, as if sensing something out of the ordinary. He did not, of course, look up at them.

Ritter has a cover story as a chemical salesman, and he meets the Under Minister for Industry before being taken to the Great Pyramid he saw from his hotel room window:

The carriage was passing into what in Ritter’s experienced judgment must surely be an internment camp. Overhead floated a gateway with a banal and uplifting slogan spelled out in metal letters. Through the coach windows flooded an effluvium of misery and sickness, of excreta and vomit and pus, overlaid with coal smoke strongly flavored with the same unidentifiable smell that in lesser concentration permeated the air of Krakow. Only now, Ritter feared that the odor was not unidentifiable at all.
The carriage rattled by long rows of windowless barracks, triangular in cross section, each with a single padlocked door. “The pyramid is hollow, of course,” Bannik said, “supported by internal buttresses. We did not have decades in which to build it, as the ancient Egyptians did. Even then, tremendous amounts of labor were required but—ha! ha!—we do not lack for idle hands, do we?” He nodded at the barracks, acknowledging them for the first time.

Ritter and the Minister later climb the pyramid to the events occurring at its peak.
The story then cuts to the Minster’s office, where he explains that the brutal executions that Ritter witnessed are the Mongolian Wizard’s way of discovering latent wizard talent. Those who reveal such under this extreme treatment are saved; those who don’t die.
Ritter (spoiler) later has to flee the interior minister’s office after a tip-off from the Minster’s female assistant about a witch-finder who is searching for him. The woman, who reveals herself as a resistance member, takes Ritter to her garret lodgings, but the witch-finder picks up their trail on the way there. The latter later meets his fate at the claws of the gargoyles mentioned at the beginning of the story (another example of this callback technique).
This a darker and more satisfying story than the previous ones, but if I have a quibble it is that I wasn’t sure what the chemicals were for (other than, along with the smell of the burning bodies, to provide a Holocaust parallel).

The Phantom in the Maze sees Ritter dispatched to a scrying institute where a young woman has been murdered. On arrival he starts his investigation but soon experiences time disturbances caused by the scryers’ examination of the future (this first manifests itself when a bird arrives in his room and then disappears; later, Ritter meets the murdered woman in the centre of the yew tree maze where she was killed before she too vanishes). There is some hand waving about the main trunk of time and the various branches that split off from it, etc., during all this, but it doesn’t explain the phenomenon that Ritter experiences.
The ending (spoiler) involves Ritter in a shoot-out with the director of the institute and his lover (who turns out to be the killer of the murdered woman as she ‘sees‘ a future love rival for the director’s affections). Then there another time disturbance which undoes their deaths and brings the couple back to life.
This latter plot development is based on the unconvincing “tree of time” explanation and, regardless, feels like a bit of a cheat. The twist does not suspend disbelief.

Murder in the Spook House starts with Ritter arriving at a tank depot to investigate yet another (!) murder, and this time it is (spoiler) Sir Toby who has copped it. As Ritter is taken to see the body, he sees a raven appear and disappear—this is another time anomaly event similar to the one Ritter experienced in the previous story.
After some of the usual sniffing about by Ritter’s wolf Freki, Ritter uncovers the murderer. The ending resurrects Sir Toby, and his dead doppelgänger disappears back to whatever timeline it came from.
This story suffers not only from having another murder investigation but also from the same unconvincing temporal shenanigans as the previous tale. If the writer can magically undo any of the story’s previous events by timeline manipulation, how can they expect to maintain any dramatic tension?

The New Prometheus is this world’s Frankenstein story, and opens with Ritter driving a dog-sled across the Arctic in pursuit of his quarry. When the creature sets up camp, and Ritter establishes it is safe to approach—he sends Freki ahead and watches as the wolf gets its tummy rubbed—he enters his quarry’s tent and listens to its story. We find out that the creature is a homunculus created by the Mongolian Wizard:

“It is a gruesome process. First the skeleton is assembled from the living bones of various animals. Human bones would not do, for it was desired to give me the features and physiognomy of a god. Bones taken from dead creatures would be . . . dead. So animals were required to suffer. It took a phalanx of surgical wizards just to keep the skeleton viable while muscles and cartilage were attached, nerves grown to interlace the flesh, organs coaxed into interaction, skin convinced to cover all . . . More magical talents were employed in my creation than for any other single purpose in human history. It is doubtful that anyone but my father—for so I consider him—could have arranged for such a thing. And even he had to effectively bring the war to a standstill to free up the resources necessary for it.”

Ritter later learns of the homunculus’s education (part of which was done by Ritter’s uncle, a prisoner under compulsion), and that it is capable of all the magical arts—not just single talents like humans. However, its gift for mind-reading means it suffers from constant exposure to human thoughts, hence the flight to the Arctic.
At the end of the story (spoiler) the homunculus paralyses Ritter and leaves the tent to take what seems the only logical course of action. After it disappears over the horizon, Ritter sees a terrific explosion.
I found this an engrossing account of the short life and death of an almost godlike bring, and it’s one of the series’ better stories.

The Artwork by Gregory Manchess is a good match for the stories (are these watercolours?) My favourite illustrations are for House of Dreams (lovely) and The New Prometheus, but there are a couple others that are close behind.

Overall, the series is a bit of a mixed bag. Its strengths are the intriguing world it is set in, and the two main characters and their interplay. The main weakness is that the stories are too short and sketchy: most writers pad out their stories, but I think that Swanwick has the opposite problem. These pieces are around four to six and a half thousand words long, and they could all have done with being longer and more detailed; a couple of novelettes or novellas with more world and character building would have strengthened the series. In particular, House of Dreams and The Pyramid of Krakow could perhaps have been combined into a longer story, with linking material dealing with the information the wizard produced, a description of life in the occupied zone, contact with the resistance, etc.
Another weakness is that there are three murder investigations in nine stories (maybe four if you count the tiny soldiers in the first piece), which is far too many.
Despite its occasional shortcomings this series is worth a look, and I’ll be interested to see how many more stories Swanwick produces to compete its narrative arc (I just hope that the Mongolian Wizard is defeated by something other than a time anomaly).2  ●

_____________________

1. The publication dates of the stories on Tor.com (and their lengths) are as follows:

The Mongolian Wizard • July 4th, 2012 • 5360 words
The Fire Gown • August 15th, 2012 • 5020
Day of the Kraken • September 26th, 2012 • 4400
House of Dreams • November 27th, 2013 • 5380
The Night of the Salamander • August 5th, 2015 • 5800
The Pyramid of Krakow • September 30th, 2015 • 5140
The Phantom in the Maze • December 2nd, 2015 • 6210
Murder in the Spook House • May 1st, 2019 • 4080
The New Prometheus • June 19th, 2019 • 6580

The stories run to 50,000 words so far, which would be a short book, approximately 125 pages.

2. Just after posting I found (by way of Jason McGregor’s blog Featured Futures) an interview on File770 where Michael Swanwick provides information about the series. There will be 21 stories, so we are just over one third of the way through.  ●

Edited 14:30 to add footnote 2 and to lower-case the “the” in front of several “Mongolian Wizard”s.

rssrss

The 2019 Hugo Award & 1944 Retro Hugo Award Finalists

As the Hugo and Retro Hugo voting is due to finish tomorrow (07:59 BST on Thursday in the UK and Eire), this is a quick post about the finalists—but mostly a plug for Anthony Boucher’s Retro novella We Print the Truth. More about that later.
First off, let’s remember that the winner of any Hugo Award is a result of this equation:

Success = (a) Author popularity x (b) Work availability x (c) Work quality x (d) Zeitgeist.

(a) Author popularity use to depend on a writer’s general attractiveness, e.g., How well liked were his/her stories or fanzine articles? How affable or entertaining a convention presence were they? What had their lifetime impact been? Nowadays, a writer’s popularity will be partially or largely related to their “tribe” and social media presence. For the Retro Hugo awards in particular, the writer’s lifetime achievement will probably dominate (minor stories by major writers have already won Retro Hugos).
(b) Work availability once meant that it was better to appear in, for example, Astounding or Galaxy rather than in Fantasy Book, or any of the British SF magazines. Nowadays, free online trumps paid online or paper (hence the near total omission of F&SF, Asimov’s SF, and Analog from recent final ballots).
(c) Quality is not as big a deal as you might think. Jo Walton noted in her recent Hugo Awards book that the Hugos get it right about two-thirds of the time. For the Retro Hugos I’d shoehorn memorability into the quality category; a story fondly remembered will be thought of as “quality”—even though there may be sixty or seventy years of rose-coloured slow glass between the memory and the actuality.
(d) There are many examples of zeitgeist: New Wave, the 1970’s wave of feminism, SJWs versus Puppies, #MeToo, etc.

Okay, onto the 2019 Hugo Awards. I have little to say about these as I have read virtually none of the fiction or non-fiction, and saw little media. What can I say apart from, “I’ll try and do better next year.” The convention sent out a very good voters’ package too.
I did read Jo Walton’s An Informal History of the Hugos: A Personal Look Back at the Hugo Awards 1953-2000, and Alec Nevala-Lee’s Astounding: John W. Campbell, Isaac Asimov, Robert A. Heinlein, L. Ron Hubbard, and the Golden Age of Science Fiction (and voted for them in that order—I may write a review and say why later). I also voted for a few other things, Rocket Stack Rank, Beyond Ceaseless Skies, Vina Jie-Min Prasad, etc.

I read most of the fiction on the 1944 Retro Hugos final ballot and voted like this:

Best Novel:
Gather, Darkness! by Fritz Leiber, Jr. (Astounding Science-Fiction, May-July 1943)
Conjure Wife by Fritz Leiber, Jr. (Unknown Worlds, April 1943)
The Weapon Makers by A.E. van Vogt (Astounding Science-Fiction, February-April 1943)
Das Glasperlenspiel [The Glass Bead Game] by Hermann Hesse (Fretz & Wasmuth)
Perelandra by C.S. Lewis (John Lane, The Bodley Head)
No award
Earth’s Last Citadel by C.L. Moore and Henry Kuttner (Argosy, April-July 1943)

Comment: I really liked the two Leibers, especially Gather Darkness!, but would be happy if either won (I think Gather, Darkness! is better technically and more fun, but realise that Conjure Wife may be seminal). I hope Leiber’s vote isn’t split and something else comes through the middle. I did not like the Moore/Kuttner (I can’t understand why it was nominated), and am baffled that Moore’s solo novel Judgement Night didn’t make the final ballot. This gives me a bad feeling in my water about how this year’s awards will turn out.
I didn’t have time (i.e. too lazy and not sufficiently organised) to read the Hesse or Lewis even though I had copies.

Best Novella:
We Print the Truth by Anthony Boucher (Astounding Science-Fiction, December 1943)
Clash by Night by Lawrence O’Donnell (Henry Kuttner & C.L. Moore) (Astounding Science-Fiction, March 1943)
Attitude by Hal Clement (Astounding Science-Fiction, September 1943)
The Dream-Quest of Unknown Kadath by H.P. Lovecraft, (Beyond the Wall of Sleep, Arkham House)
The Little Prince by Antoine de Saint-Exupéry (Reynal & Hitchcock)
The Magic Bed-Knob; or, How to Become a Witch in Ten Easy Lessons by Mary Norton (Hyperion Press)

Comment: A weak category this year, as seen by the inclusion of two children’s books (although these are maybe here as a diversity vote, +translation, +woman, i.e. zeitgeist, or as a more general attempt to make the genre seem respectable). I don’t object to children’s books on the ballot (I would have voted for J. K. Rowling’s winner) but there is a difference between “children’s” and “YA” books.
Notwithstanding this, I read the Saint-Exupéry and found its quirkiness, homilies, and views on adult behaviour quite interesting to begin with—but eventually got bored with it. I didn’t read the Norton or the Lovecraft.
Of the remainder, the standout story for me is the Boucher novella We Print the Truth. I’d love it if this won, not only because it deserves to, but because he lost out last year and probably doesn’t have many chances left. However, Boucher isn’t that well known as a writer, and it’s a fantasy, so it wouldn’t surprise me if the Clement or Kuttner/Moore won. The Clement is a weaker early work but the Kuttner/Moore would be an okay choice.

Best Novelette:
Mimsy Were the Borogoves by Lewis Padgett (C.L. Moore & Henry Kuttner) (Astounding Science-Fiction, February 1943)
The Proud Robot by Lewis Padgett (Henry Kuttner) (Astounding Science-Fiction, October 1943)
Thieves’ House by Fritz Leiber, Jr (Unknown Worlds, February 1943)
The Halfling by Leigh Brackett (Astonishing Stories, February 1943)
Citadel of Lost Ships by Leigh Brackett (Planet Stories, March 1943)
Symbiotica by Eric Frank Russell (Astounding Science-Fiction, October 1943)

Comment: I liked all these bar the Russell—which is a weak adventure story in my opinion—and Brackett’s Citadel of Lost Ships (The Halfling is better), although both are okay. The obvious winner here is Mimsy, but there are two Kuttner stories on the ballot so the vote could be split, something that could also happen to Brackett (she had two on the ballot last year as well—is this because people like Brackett or is it a zeitgeist vote for a woman?) I just hope the Russell doesn’t come through the middle of these two pairs.
I’d like to mention Malcolm Jameson’s story Blind Alley, which should have been on the final ballot.

Best Short Story:
King of the Gray Spaces (R is for Rocket) by Ray Bradbury (Famous Fantastic Mysteries, December 1943)
Yours Truly – Jack the Ripper by Robert Bloch (Weird Tales, July 1943)
Exile by Edmond Hamilton (Super Science Stories, May 1943)
No award
Doorway into Time by C.L. Moore (Famous Fantastic Mysteries, September 1943)
Death Sentence by Isaac Asimov (Astounding Science Fiction, November 1943)
Q.U.R. by H.H. Holmes (Anthony Boucher) (Astounding Science-Fiction, March 1943)

Comment: What a strange category—half the stories are good, and half are average or poor. Asimov would probably take this on name recognition were it not for the fact that Bradbury and Bloch have equal recognisability, and better stories to boot.

Best Professional Editor, Short Form:
John W. Campbell
Dorothy McIlwraith
Mary Gnaedinger
Donald A. Wollheim
Oscar J. Friend
Raymond A. Palmer

Comment: Campbell and the also-rans, I’m afraid.

Best Professional Artist:
Hannes Bok
J. Allen St. John
Margaret Brundage
William Timmins
Virgil Finlay
Antoine de Saint-Exupéry

Comment: I’ve put Finlay near the bottom as nearly everyone votes him a lifetime achievement award every year. Boris Dolgov should have been on the ballot.

Good luck to all the finalists, although you’d be better off trying to maximise your scores in each of the four categories above. ●

Edited 1420: minor changes.

rssrss

Fantastic Novels Magazine v04n02, July 1950

ISFDB link
Internet Archive link

_____________________

Editor, Mary Gnaedinger

Fiction:
Earth’s Last Citadel • reprint novel by C. L. Moore and Henry Kuttner
Death’s Secret • reprint novelette by John L. Schoolcraft
The Soul Trap • reprint short story by Charles B. Stilson
Lost—One Mylodon • reprint short story by Elmer Brown Mason

Non-Fiction:
Cover • by Lawrence
Interior artwork • by Virgil Finlay (x6), Lawrence
What Do You Think? • editorial by Mary Gnaedinger & reader’s letters
Fantasy Book Reviews • by Sam Moskowitz

_____________________

Earth’s Last Citadel by C. L. Moore and Henry Kuttner is one of the finalists for this year’s 1944 Retro-Hugo Award in the novel category (although it appears in this 1950 publication, it was originally serialised in Argosy’s April to July 1943 issues). It starts off in the Tunisian desert with Alan Drake of US Intelligence trying to protect a distinguished Scottish scientist called Sir Colin Douglas from two Nazi agents. While they evade capture, Drake and Douglas come upon a shining sphere that appears to have risen out of the sand, an event that coincides with the two Nazis turning up (one of the two is Karen Martin, a spy with “the unstable brilliance of many mixed races shining in her eyes”—an unlikely hire, I think—and the other is Mike Smith, an American gangster of German origin). Before Drake and Sir Colin can be taken prisoner, this Central Casting quartet are compelled to enter the sphere, where they enter a deep sleep or stasis, and end up in the far future.
Drake is the first to wake up, with the vague memory of dreaming about an alien. He soon sees that, if there was an alien with them in the sphere, it has left. The others come round, and any burgeoning fight between the four is forestalled by what awaits them outside:

[This] was not the flame-scorched valley they had left. And it was not morning, or noon, or night. There was only a ruddy twilight here, and a flat, unfeatured landscape across which patches of mist drifted aimlessly as they watched, like clouds before a sluggish wind. Low down in the sky hung a dull and ruddy sun that they could look upon unblinded, with steady eyes.
Briefly, in the distance, something moved high up across the sky. There was a dark shape out there somewhere, a building monstrously silhouetted against the sun. But the mists closed in like curtains to veil it from his gaze, as if it were secret to this dead world, not for living eyes to look on.  p. 18

Shortly after this they see and hear a winged human, and decide to go in the direction it was flying in an attempt to get food. During their journey they see another flier, which Smith (or perhaps that should be Schmidt) tries to shoot before Drake stops him. Later on a huge worm appears through the mist and slides past them. They eventually come to the previously seen building and note that it appears to be a fortress, albeit one which has a strange alien shape constructed from the same dark material as the sphere that brought them here. Drake has a premonition about something inside the fortress, and then something runs through the mist, which he catches. This turns out to be a young woman called Evaya:

The captive’s struggles had ceased when light came back around them. She hung motionless in Alan’s embrace, head thrown back, staring up at him. Not terror, but complete bewilderment, made her features a mask of surprise.
They were unbelievably delicate features. The very skull beneath must not be common bone, but some exquisite structure carved of ivory. Her face had the flawless, unearthly perfection of a flower. That was it—she had a flower’s delicacy, over-bred, painstakingly cultured and refined out of all kinship with the coarse human prototype. Even her hair seemed so fine that it floated upon the misty air, only settling now about her shoulders as her struggles ceased. The gossamer robe that had made her outlines waver so strangely in the fog fell in cobwebby folds which every breath fluttered.  p. 24

At this point the pace picks up somewhat. Evaya takes them to Carcasilla, an underground city where they meet the others of her race as well as their ruler Flande (he is essentially a cross between the big taking head from Mork and Mindy, and the Wizard of Oz). He telepathically questions them until he gets bored, then summons a barbarian tribe called the Terasi to deal with them. Drake is knocked unconscious and separated from the other three during the fight, and Evaya later tends him at an “immortality” fountain in the centre of the city. Drake learns more about the history of the place.
Then, if the recent addition of the big talking head and the barbarians wasn’t enough to keep up the tempo, priestess Evaya receives a telepathic summons from the alien Light-Wearer, the only surviving member of the race that subjugated humanity millennia ago. When it arrives through the portal it engulfs Drake and tries to feed on his life force, but Sir Colin arrives and saves him with a gunshot. Drake is told later that the Light-Wearer cannot stand noise, and also that it is the alien from the sphere (there is no mention as to why it did it not feed on them while they were all together).

The rest of the story has a lot of running around that involves, largely, the Light Wearer and the Carcasillians trying to overwhelm the defences (large gongs) of the Terasi, who are sheltering the foursome. There is a bit more to the plot than that but you’ll have got the idea.
This is not a very good piece, and it has several failings. First, it takes ages to get going—they encounter Evaya a quarter of the way through the novel, and the writing up to that point is largely descriptive (this, the poor pacing, and the prose mark it out as Moore’s work). Second, the characters are cardboard cut-outs—I’ve already mentioned the Central Casting aspect above, but you can add to that a dreadful Scottish accent from Sir Colin and that Karen’s character is hardly used. Finally, the various ideas used in the story—predatory alien, immortality fountain, portals, remnants of humanity, etc.—are all just futuristic kitchen-sink nonsense, and hard to engage with.
I suspect that this was a fragment that Moore started and abandoned, and which Kuttner largely or entirely completed (compare the amount of description versus incident in the first quarter against that in the remainder, and you will see what I mean). Whatever, it is the worst thing of theirs I’ve read, and certainly not up to the quality of their other 1943 work. To that latter point—how on Earth did this become a Hugo finalist when Moore’s Judgement Night was overlooked? What on Earth were the Retro Hugo nominators thinking?

Death’s Secret by John L. Schoolcraft (All-Story Weekly, December 1st 1917) starts with an archaeologist called Williamson riding out to explore a desert oasis. On his arrival a strange noise spooks his horse so he looks around: he doesn’t find the source of the sound but he does find an unopened tomb. After he manages to dig his way into it, he finds a mummy in a casket—even though they are a thousand miles from the Nile—and a script that identifies the body as a young girl, and which also gives an account of how she was kidnapped and treated dreadfully by her captors. At the end of the script there is a curse which states that anyone who repeats the story will die within twenty-four hours.
At this point Williamson summons his boss Talcott, and the rest of the archaeological expedition. Initially Williamson hides the scroll from his boss, but on the way back tells him about it and later reads it to Talcott and another man called Purdy. The next day Williamson returns to the tomb to finish some work but does not come back. After Talcott and Purdy fruitlessly search for Williamson they find one of the natives with his watch, and are later led to his body.

After Talcott and Purdy bury the corpse they discuss the curse, and decide to set Williamson’s watch going again (it stopped when he fell from his horse) to see if he died within the twenty-four hour period. They find out he died three hours after leaving camp.
Most stories would stop at this point after suggesting that the curse is real, but this isn’t what happens here. This is just the start of a more complicated set of affairs which involve Talcott and Purdy going home by ship, and further deaths and mishaps. These include (spoiler) the ship hitting a derelict and Purdy going missing (after having told the story to a couple on board); Talcott consulting a psychic investigator and deciding to test the efficacy of the curse at his cottage; and an attack by a cat with poisoned claws, followed by another by its handler, one of many generations of tomb-guards.
Talcott sees off the cat and the handler (who Talcott discovers killed Williamson and Purdy), but the cottage collapses on him during a storm. The curse has finally claimed one of the three men.
This story is convoluted and a little far-fetched, but it’s a fairly good read for a 1917 work, I thought.

The Soul Trap by Charles B. Stilson (All-Story Weekly, March 10th 1917, as Liberty or Death?) has a doctor tending a dying man called Theon Karker, who uses what little strength is left in him to implore the doctor to go up into the attic of the house and break a Crystal cabinet. The doctor does not pay too much attention to this but, after Karker dies, finds a letter addressed to him. He reads of Karker’s researches into spiritualism, and his inability to communicate with the spirits as they all too quickly move to another plane:

[The] soul passed beyond, like that newly come to this world, is weak and inexperienced in its state and must develop and progress, as a child’s mind unfolds. And when the soul does gain in strength and expression, it straightway uses its new-found powers to pass on into another realm, whence no mediumistic summons may recall it.
Then, on an accursed day, I reasoned, if all these things be true, and a man find some way to cage a spirit and confine it, he might find it to progress and grow under his hand, in a hot-house as it were, and control it to his purpose. Familiarity with the sciences of the laboratory led me to ponder this problem to a conclusion. Spirits, I argued, must have some material qualities; else how can they produce audible phenomena, how rap on walls, play musical instruments, move articles of furniture? If so, if the soul is capable of such manifestations—and I had experienced them often—it must be in the nature of an ethereal fluid or essence; and such may be confined.  p. 99-100

Karker then gives an account of how he incarcerated a dying man in a glass cage to trap his departing spirit and later communicate with it. This proved successful, but after a period of this the spirit made dire threats, and Karker had an accident and paralysed himself before he could release it.
The remainder of the story builds atmosphere as the doctor waits on the porch for dawn before he goes up stairs to investigate. When he does so he sees a glass cage in the gloom, and he hurriedly goes back downstairs and outside to wait until there is more daylight. Later he goes back up . . . .
The final part (spoiler) reveals that there is no body in the glass cage and that the whole story was in Karker’s mind. Or as the story puts it:

Pennerton stepped to the side of the couch. He looked down at the dead man and his face grew solemn with pity. Slowly he said:
“Ah, the poor tortured spirit was not there, not in the crystal chamber, my friend. It was here”, and he laid his hand on Theron Karker’s cold forehead.  p. 104

This ending will no doubt prove irritating to some as it completely subverts reader expectation and the supernatural premise of the story, but I thought it an atmospheric and quite well done piece (and uttered a “Ha!” on finishing it). I’ll be interested to see what is said about this one in forthcoming letters columns.

Lost—One Mylodon by Elmer Brown Mason (All-Story Weekly, April 1st 1916) is a sprawling story about two explorers who travel to Patagonia to investigate a cave where they hope to obtain the bones of a long dead creature called a mylodon. When they get there (via a night in a South American town and a journey by yacht—I did say it was sprawling) they descend into the cave where they dig up little more than human bones. When they go deeper into the cave, one of them slips down a slope, and finds a pile of interesting remains. When the other goes to get a rope to help his colleague back up the slope he is taken hostage by a group of natives. While they rebury their ancestors’ remains, he manages to free himself, simultaneous with his colleague appearing covered in phosphorescent mud. The natives flee, bar one woman who is hit by falling rock and is kept as a hostage by the pair.
The rest of the story involves them trailing down the coast after her to a place where they find still-living examples of the mylodons:

“Wheet-wheet, wheet-wheet,” came a tiny voice from the tree tops, and I looked up straight into a face peering down at me. And what a face! The round, yellow, foolish eyes were set well up in the narrow, greenish forehead; two flat, sniffing nostrils expanded and closed above a thicklipped, vacuous mouth, from which protruded a long, slender, blue tongue, like a piece of satin ribbon. Never have I seen anything that portrayed such complete imbecility as that face!
“The utter damned fool!” I heard myself say aloud.
“Wheet-wheet,” came the ridiculously tiny voice, the underbrush parted, and an immense bulk moved out into the open.
If you could have forgotten the idiot face (which you couldn’t), I suppose the mere size of the animal would have made it impressive. It was as big as an elephant, as an elephant sitting on its haunches. The hind legs were enormous, doubled under it, and ending in great, flat paws; the back was curved, nearly humped; the forelegs were short, powerful, and armed with stupendous claws; the neck was long, a cord dangling from it, and topped by that fool head, maddeningly out of proportion to the bulk of the rest of the animal; while the entire body was covered with short, very green fur.  p. 117

Later (spoiler) our two geniuses decide that it will be a good idea to take flash photographs of the creatures in their cave, at which point they stampede and the only remaining male is killed.
This is a readable enough story, but you will need to overlook the fact it is a rambling and ultimately dispiriting story about two theriocidal idiots.

The Cover is an average effort by Lawrence, who also contributes one of the interior illustrations. The rest of the interior artwork is by Virgil Finlay, which includes some good work (the title pages for the Moore/Kuttner and Schoolcraft) and some that may be a variation on other work (the dark fortress from the Moore/Kuttner). Some of it just does not reproduce that well (the woman from the Schoolcraft is too dark, as is the Lawrence illustration for the Mason).

What Do You Think? opens with a short note from editor Mary Gnaedinger about a couple of recent items, and she also plugs a couple of upcoming stories (the third of Charles B Stilson’s ‘Polaris’ trilogy, and The Son of the Red God by Paul L. Anderson—the latter story did not appear before the magazine folded a year later). Gnaedinger ends with this:

I believe you will agree with me that the letters in this issue reflect a great enthusiasm for our magazine, and that they show even more than heretofore a profound interest in the selected stories, and a heart-warming and comfortable companionship among the readers in their relationship to each other.
Sincerely yours in Fantasy,
Mary Gnaedinger.  p. 6

This editorial content is followed by a huge amount of reader’s correspondence (around forty letters): there is comment about A. Merrit’s Fantasy, a new companion magazine to this title and Famous Fantastic Mysteries (the fourth of this new magazine’s eventual five issues was on the newsstand the same time as this issue of Fantastic Novels Magazine); announcements of various conventions and clubs; a number of letters from British readers (this includes anecdotes about difficulties with UK exchange controls—sending money out of the country—and mention of the new British edition of the magazine).
As for comments on the stories, Max Brand’s The Receding Brow, and Charles B. Stilson’s Minos of Sardanes (the second of the ‘Polaris’ trilogy) are the two that receive the most positive mentions.
Negative comment comes from Marion McNunn Nelson from Caspar, Wyoming, (one of the few thoughtful letters in the issue):

I can’t resist writing you once again after just finishing the letter section of the March issue of Fantastic Novels. I always read the letter section first and always enjoy it, and always have a great many comments, backtalk and enthusiastic agreements swarming through my mind when I finish; and always feel I, too, simply must sit down at my typewriter and have my say. But fortunately for you—for I’m sure you must always get much too many letters—I usually subside again without writing.
While I have enjoyed some stories better than others, I feel you have never really let me down. I am amused at the tone of weighty and Olympic wisdom with which some of your younger readers criticize this and that yarn. And at the widely varying definitions of “fantasy” made. Fantasy is, to me, an all inclusive word—the supernatural, the practically impossible adventure, horror, science-fiction (the interplanetary part of which I easily get fed up on—in fact, the only kind of science fiction I care for really is that on the order of Taine or Stapledon, etc.)
Of all the stories you’ve published the only two I really didn’t like are the Chesterton’s “Thursday” novel, I’ve even forgotten the exact name—“The Man Who Was Thursday”, I guess [Famous Fantastic Mysteries, March 1944]. And your last, “The Flying Legion” [by George Allan England in the January 1950 issue]. Exciting, sure. But Chesterton was very subtly putting over a great piece of illusionary, reactionary propaganda; and England’s story, too, seemed to express much too much of personal and propagandaish bias. I am neither an anarchist nor a Moslem, but both those stories left me disgusted, with a bad taste in my mouth. I was surprised and disappointed with the England story. (Chesterton I knew of old.) Because one man is bored with life, having everything in a material way anyone could want, he is perfectly willing to sacrifice any number of lives of innocent people in a wild, cruel adventure.
The whole story is an affront to a great and brave people—even though they may have their cruelties, too. And I think anyone who has read Lawrence of Arabia’s “Seven Pillars of Wisdom”, as I have, would feel the same way. I hate any stories today that make villains out of a whole people.  p. 126

Fantasy Book Reviews by Sam Moskowitz is an interesting column, given his habit of contextualising the books covered. There is this on Theodore Sturgeon’s collection Without Sorcery, for instance:

Unlike Ray Bradbury, who has written the introduction to this volume and who is one of the brightest literary stars on the fantasy horizon, Sturgeon does not present even a hint of the repetition in theme, style and ideas, which duplication presents Bradbury’s chief weakness. Because of this, there is no need to urge moderation in the sampling of Sturgeon’s wares. With the lone exception of Butyl and the Breather, which is a sequel to The Ether Breather, it would be hard to believe that any two stories in the volume came from the pen of one author.  p. 105

And this on Ralph Milne Farley’s Myles Cabot on Venus:

If you fancy yourself as an ultra-sophisticate who must find social significance in the web of the stories and cannot tolerate lines that are not clipped in the Hemingway fashion, this tale of Myles Cabot, who is transported to the planet Venus without preparation or travail; who battles against and then with the giant ants of Venus to attain the hand of Lilia, fair princess of that planet, will prove utterly insufferable to you. But those who retain enough of their youth to remember the magic of roaming the ancient plains of Mars with Edgar Rice Burroughs’ famous character, John Carter, will also relish this story.
Old-time readers of Argosy and early issue followers of F.F.M. will he pleased to see this famous old-time scientific romance gain the sanctity of hard covers at last.  p. 106

Elsewhere there are a couple of interesting snippets. In his review of The Lungfish, the Dodo and the Unicorn by Willy Ley, he states that “Ley leans to the conclusion that some day a sea animal, hitherto unknown and larger than any whale, may be discovered.” In the comments on Stanley G. Weinbaum’s book Martian Odyssey and Others, Moskowitz notes that Time magazine used the book as an excuse for a “full page write-up on science fiction”.

A middling issue, with the Moore and Kuttner novel a particular disappointment.  ●

_____________________

rssrss

The Magazine of Fantasy & Science Fiction #716, November-December 2014

ISFDB link
F&SF subs/Amazon UKUSA /Weightless Books

Other reviews:
C. D. Lewis, Tangent Online
John Loyd, There Ain’t no Such Thing as a Free Lunch
Lois Tilton, Locus
Sam Tomaino, SF Revu
Mark Watson, Best SF
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editor, Gordon Van Gelder

Fiction:
I’ll Follow the Sun • novelette by Paul Di Filippo ∗∗+
Yeshua’s Dog • short story by Tim Sullivan
Nanabojou at the World’s Fair • short story by Justin Barbeau
The Judging • novella by Rand B. Lee
Feral Frolics • short story by Scott Baker
The Bomb Thing • short story by K. J. Kabza +
Golden Girl • novelette by Albert E. Cowdrey +
The Old Science Fiction Writer • short story by David Gerrold
Hollywood North • novella by Michael Libling

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Mondolithic Studios
Cartoons • by Mark Heath, Arthur Masear (x2)
Books to Look For • by Charles de Lint
Musing on Books • by Michelle West
Films: On Novelizing Noah • by Alan Dean Foster
Films: Coming Soon to a Tablet Near You • by Kathi Maio
Coming Attractions
F&SF Competition #88: “Anagram/Raga Man” (Results)

F&SF Competition #89
Index to Volumes 126 & 127, January-December 2014
Curiosities: The Condemned Playground, by Cyril Connolly (1945)
• book review by David Langford

_____________________

Editor Gordon Van Gelder’s introduction to I’ll Follow the Sun by Paul Di Filippo sets the tone for the issue:

There was a time—or so it seems to your editor—when writers turned to science fiction to explore ideas they couldn’t touch in any other medium. A fair number of stories regarded as classics today were transgressive when they first came out.
These days, however, the internet seems to thrive on posts by people who aren’t keen on tolerating viewpoints that differ from their own, and some of those posts focus on the science fiction and fantasy field. They’ve inspired us here at F&SF to give this issue an extra helping of stories that deal with touchy themes or go beyond the bounds of Political Correctness.  p. 5

Di Filippo’s story isn’t particularly edgy or transgressive (there are later stories that fit the bill better) but it does offer a different viewpoint to the homogeneity of today due to its time-traveller protagonist from 1964. But I’m getting ahead of myself. The story opens with a student called Dan Wishcup visiting his maths professor Chan Davis1 (the science fiction writer) with the news that he has got a draft notice for the Vietnam war, but doesn’t want to go. Davis suggests that Dan claims asylum in Canada, but Dan doesn’t want to do this because of various male relatives who have served in the military, including an uncle killed in the last days of WWI. After some back and forth over the next day or two, Davis suggests that Dan time-travels to the future to wait out the war (Davis’s mathematical research has revealed the secret of time travel). Dan agrees and goes home to arrange his affairs, which include writing to his girlfriend. He also time travels to the past to find his uncle before he joins the army, and saves him from death by taking him forward in time to 1964. After the pair arrive back, Dan abandons him there and goes to see the professor. Davis gives Dan three small gold bars for him to use as money in the future, and they also bury a copy of the first issue of Action comics, for Dan to later retrieve and sell.
The rest of the story is set in Dan’s future (our present), and is largely a comedy of manners:

People appeared at first to be interacting in the manner Dan associated with 1964-era parties. Boozing, flirting, laughing, arguing, showing off, telling jokes. But all the one-on-one interactions looked to Dan to exhibit a telltale shallowness, as if the attentions of the interlocutors were not fully present, not fully engaged. And, indeed, every few minutes each person would pull out his or her phone and obsessively surf to some site—currently, the big social media buzz centered on something called “Dawgbutt”—or dash off a selfie or read a text—or even play a few rounds of some video game!
With his Martian Vision, Dan saw a room full of parasitized Pavlovian puppets.
And when their conversations did sound authentic and enthusiastic, the topics revolved around what to Dan were the most banal and pointless threads, mostly revelatory of trivial, vapid consumerist fetishes. Who discussed anything of high import these days?
“Did you see Duck Dynasty Goes to the Golden Globes?”
“I just bought this great new skin for my smartwatch. It makes it look just like a Blake’s 7 bracelet!”
“You mean to tell me you haven’t tried the Mappuccino at Starbucks yet? It’s just like drinking a stack of pancakes and syrup!”
Dan sighed deeply and moved away from his corner to get another beer. One undeniably good thing about the future: the beer tasted much better. But did that compensate for all the ills?  p. 29

Some of the story is more serious:

The task was not pleasant. In fact, the surfeit of rancid history sickened Dan. He encountered a tapestry of nuclear meltdowns, genocidal slaughters, inauthentic recycled pop culture, social rancor, and crushed utopian schemes. By Dan’s lights—by the hopes and dreams of 1964—the past five decades represented a global litany of failure and disappointment, a catalogue of horror and insults to the human spirit, a trash heap of cheap thrills soon discarded, an abattoir of incessant suffering and slaughter. Humanity had landed on the Moon, then abandoned it, for God’s sake! Oh, sure, there had been shining moments that exalted the human soul, and some debatable technological advances. Medicine had come a long way, that was nice. Lots of bad old prejudices had been unearthed and extirpated. (Or, as current continued instances appeared to show, had they merely been driven hypocritically below public acknowledgement?) On the whole, the world seemed a mingier, more miserable, more frightened and harried place than it had in 1964. Less tenderness, more contention. Fewer vices, more bad habits. Less ease, more stress.  p. 27

At least future Dan does not have the stress of impending nuclear annihilation, such as in the Cuban Missile Crisis a couple of years before his departure.
In the last section he meets an attractive young woman who he suspects is his daughter (Dan presumes he eventually goes back in time at some point and fathers her), and then has to cope with the unwanted sexual attraction he experiences. He finally tries to resolve matters by going to see her mother and father (Dan thinks the latter will be an older version of himself). When they all meet, Dan realises (spoiler) that her father is actually his uncle, who hooked up with his old girlfriend in 1964. There is also some chat about avatars in this part of the story, and some hand-wavium about time-travel, neither of which made much sense to me, and rather spoiled the ending of the story. A pity, as most of this is quite entertaining.
Yeshua’s Dog by Tim Sullivan takes place in in Galilee almost two thousand years ago, and tells of the death of an old storyteller and carpenter called Yeshua. The story then flashbacks to when Yeshua was alive and a Greek traveller visited to collect stories for a book. After this setup—which details the prosaic origins of many bible stories and reveals that Yeshua is most likely Jesus—there are revelations about his early years as a prophet, and his subsequent imprisonment and release.
The final act (spoiler) concerns the death of Yeshua’s faithful dog Judas (this occurs after a period of pining for his dead master), and the dog’s eventual interment alongside him. After this occurs, a bright star rises in the East, The Dog Star, or Sirius, and the villagers decide to check the tomb to see if the dog is still there. They find a miracle has occurred, but not the one the reader expects.
This is an enjoyable if provocative look at Christian history (there is a note in the introduction stating that “this story is a work of fiction”), but pieces like this always leave me (an atheist, for what it is worth) cynically wondering if the editors and publishers would be as brave with transgressive stories about other religions.2 (And no, I’m not sure I would be.)
Nanabojou at the World’s Fair by Justin Barbeau is a tale about a Native American spirit/man who, after he is swindled by a forestry agent, goes to the 1904 St Louis Fair. There, after wandering around for awhile, he gatecrashes a show as a fictional “Indian”:

Slipping behind the marquee, he summoned his animal allies. “I need you to help me, my allies,” he said. “I need you to make me look authentic. First, I will need a horse.”
“I will be your horse, Nanabojou,” said the muskrat. And it became a muscled white stallion tossing its flowing mane.
“Now I need a headdress,” said Nanabojou.
“I will be your headdress,” said the grouse. It became a noble eagle-feather war bonnet with a long trailer.
“A tomahawk.”
“I will be your tomahawk,” said the eel, and it became a menacing weapon with a long wooden handle.
“Breechclout.”
“I will give you my skin for a breechclout,” said the catfish. Its skin became a gloriously beaded garment and its whiskers turned into sumptuous fringe.
When he mounted his horse, Nanabojou was noble, savage, and thrilling. He looked like no Indian had ever looked before him, though quite a few have looked like that since.
The show had already started, and a whiteman was in the sawdust-carpeted ring demonstrating his lasso tricks when Nanabojou rode into the tent with a blood-curdling yell. He raced around the ring shaking his tomahawk at the children in the front row, making them drop their ice-cream cones and scream in delicious terror. His snorting horse reared on its back legs, and no one suspected he was really dressed in fishskin, with a grouse on his head, riding a rather large muskrat. They were all too entranced with what they thought they saw.  p. 77

This is short and slight piece which recalls R. A. Lafferty and, like some of that writer’s work, doesn’t amount to much. But it is a pleasant enough piece anyhow.3
The Judging by Rand B. Lee is the sequel (it’s more like the second part of a serial) to Changes (F&SF, May-June 2013), reviewed in my last post. That story introduced us to a post-apocalyptic world where a Probability Storm has turned the world into a patchwork mosaic of different times, places, and possibilities. We also met the central character Whitsun, a lay brother of an order committed to bringing stability to those parts of the world they visit, a feat accomplished the “wealfire” they host.
The story picks up as Whitsun, his burro Francesca, and an uplifted husky called Treats penetrate a lethal (if you do not have wealfire) mist barrier at the edge of a human settlement. They immediately see a manned barricade and are interrogated by one of the men behind it. The first question Whitsun is asked concerns the recent Fortean-like rain of objects over the settlement:

“I regret to say that the collapse of the column was my doing, sir,” said Whitsun. “It was a columnar zone of nullified gravity that did not belong in our world, so the fire within me sent it back where it had come from. In so doing, all the creatures and debris that had been trapped within the column were released into the grip of gravity once more. I apologize if any damage was done on this side of the bridge. The fire within me took action before I could consider the possible repercussions.”
“No harm done,” said the headman slowly. “We were protected.” He hesitated, then looked Whitsun directly in the eye. “The fire within you, you say?”
“The Breath of God, sir. The same Spirit that manifested as tongues of flame above the heads of the disciples of our Lord Jesus Christ at Pentecost, and granted them the gift of understanding and speaking languages they had not learned.”
“And you believe you wield this Spirit?” the headman said.
“No, sir. We of my Company serve the Spirit. It does not serve us. We have no control over what It chooses to do or chooses not to do. But its action is always to heal, never to harm. To seek that which is hidden, to restore that which is lost, to bring harmony out of chaos, and to protect the weak when the strong threaten them.”
“Hey, Brother!” called a mustached rifleman in a red cap. “Could this magic of yours give me a bigger Juan Garçia?” The men laughed.
“Why, that depends, sir,” replied Whitsun politely. “Would your having a bigger Juan Garçia bring more or less harmony to your community?” The men laughed a second time.  p. 81-82

Writers take note of a neat way of doing a data dump.
After his preliminary interrogation Whitsun is told to strip, and Sheriff Montoya (Whitsun’s interlocutor) searches his possessions, finding a partially melted crucifix. Montoya pulls out his own nearly identical cross, and Whitsun explains he found the melted one at the site of many burned bodies. Montoya wonders what this similarity means, and dispatches men to investigate. Whitsun, Francesca, and Treats are eventually allowed into the town.
Here Whitsun meets Rosalie, one of the settlement’s matriarchs, and there is talk about the Probability Storm that changed the world, and Whitsun’s warning that there is another storm coming. Whitsun meets an old hippy called Hank, and at this point the story starts to drag a little. This is partly because some of the material from earlier in the story is rehashed, and partly because numerous other characters turn up (Hank’s vet son, and his pregnant and near hysterical wife, etc.).
While all these new characters are milling around, a volatile young gunman called Arthur arrives, pointing a rifle at Whitsun and accusing his of being one of them. This sets up the climactic events of the story, which involves Arthur shooting Whitsun. At the moment Arthur fires, Whitsun sees a vision of a woman called Sister Merit. She tells Whitsun she is like him, and was killed by the townspeople for her blood, which they use to protect the town. She says that they will do the same to him. There is also a suggestion in among all this that she may be responsible for the burned bodies.
More crucially she tells Whitsun to choose which version of the future he wants: one where he is killed, or one where Arthur is shot by Sheriff Montoya. Whitsun chooses the latter, time reverses, and Arthur is badly wounded as Montoya arrives and shoots. Whitsun then treats the injured man with his wealfire, the effort making him pass out. When Whitsun comes to he finds himself in captivity.
The rest of the story (spoiler) is about how he escapes what the townsfolk have planned for him.
This is a story that is vivid, original, and very entertaining in parts, but it has major problems, the most obvious that this story and Changes should have been published as a single novella. This isn’t a huge ask as together they run to around 31,000 words—doable in the large size issues of F&SF (it would be about 80 pages long)—and in any event the text could do with some trimming (chapter three of this story drags because Whitsun explains his backstory to everyone he meets). The other major failing it has is at the climax of the story, which has Whitsun making another timeline choice (I think) but one that baffled me—what exactly happens here?
These two stories feel rather like the rough draft of a superior unbifurcated work—one that could have been a ‘Best of the Year’ story.
Feral Frolics by Scott Baker4 won’t be one for cat-lovers, as it starts with an animal control contractor called O’Callaghan killing cats rather than taking them alive to the shelter. He does this because (a) they make less of a mess dead, and (b) he gets paid more, as they don’t then have to be euthanized. Unfortunately (for him) he is filmed killing a pedigree cat, and prosecuted:

[The] image was crystal clear. You could see the Persian’s shiny white fur and bright lavender collar, two and a half million volts of blue sparks crawling up and down the baton and crackling off the cat’s nametag each time I zapped it. When I saw the video on the big screen in court, saw myself grinning and giggling and almost hopping up and down with delight, it even creeped me out.
[. . .]
Because of the angle you couldn’t make out my features all that well, but my red hair, black clothes, and holstered red-and-black wildlife Taser, not to mention the truck and logo, were there for everyone to see. There was no way anybody could claim it wasn’t me, and my lawyer didn’t even try.
Instead, he went for an insanity defense that got laughed out of court. I paid him a fortune and the only thing he accomplished was making people believe that not only was I a sick, evil pervert, I was an insane sick, evil pervert.  p. 129-130

After his trial he goes to prison, an experience described with more black humour:

I lost my job and my license, which was no surprise, but I hadn’t expected to be sentenced to a full year in Soledad for aggravated cruelty to animals. The guards despised me even more than they despised everybody else, and there were dozens of crazy-violent cat lovers locked up there. Killing people was okay if you were a psychopath, but you better not touch their fucking cats. Even the Aryan Brotherhood looked down on me like I was some wannabe serial killer pervert without the balls to stand up like a man and kill real people. All of which meant I was lucky the worst that happened was getting raped a couple of times and getting the shit beat out of me whenever somebody was looking for an easy target.  p. 130

The story then moves forward a few years to the present, where O’Callaghan has left behind the notoriety of his crimes—then (spoiler) the furniture company he works for tells him to deliver a couch to a kitty-cafe. O’Callaghan worries that he might be recognised, but this doesn’t happen, or so it seems . . . .
The supernatural ending does not have the verisimilitude of the rest of the story (those green teeth, etc., are  little odd), and it suffers accordingly. If the author had treated the cat-humans that run the café in a more naturalistic way I think this would have been more effective. Still, this is quite a good read and, notwithstanding the unsympathetic viewpoint character, the enjoyment comes from O’Callaghan’s unvarnished and pointed observations about the world.
The Bomb Thing by K. J. Kabza opens with the narrator Blaine, an employee at Wacko Taco, talking about his buddy:

Mason is my best friend. He’s about 5’10” and 185 lbs., and with the buzz cut and the scar by his eye from that fight in junior year, he looks like a real asshole. And he is, sometimes. But then he smiles, and his whole face lights up, and you feel like everything in the world is gonna be okay. One look at that smile and you’d follow him anywhere.
And I have, too.
But I’m not gay, or anything.
Mason works at the university. He’s a janitor, but he’s like the janitor in that movie who secretly solves all those problems on the blackboard in the hallway. Mason says he could make significant contributions to science, if he felt like it, which he doesn’t. That’s one thing that’s so great about him: Mason is his own man, and you can’t tell him what to do. The fight he got into junior year? The other guy was a cop.  p. 146

The story carries on in much the same vein as the pair have their lunch outside the university while eyeing up a female student unloading her car outside the “Nerd Department”. After commenting on her physical attributes in forthright terms, Mason goes over and hits on her while Blaine watches. Blaine later finds out that Mason has arranged to give her a private tour of the Math department that evening.
Of course, the visit is far from straightforward, and it materialises that Phyllis, the “girl”, is actually an alien sent to Earth to stop the development of a time machine—but we only discover this after Mason picks up the device and accidentally triggers it, sending all three of them back to 1968. The rest of the story details Blaine and Mason’s adventures there as they hideout from Phyllis in the basement of a frat house. This is all told in a very amusing but politically incorrect manner (when Phyllis correctly identifies Blaine’s secret crush on Mason, he repeatedly protests “I’m not gay”). However, despite this latter aspect, the story manages to have its cake and eat it (i.e. it gives the appearance of being politically incorrect but isn’t really). In the final scene Blaine also manages to have his (not-gay) cake and eat it, but you’ll need to read the story to find out how.
One for my imaginary ‘Best of the Year’ collection, I think.
Another story for that anthology may be Golden Girl by Albert E. Cowdrey. This opens with a young woman called Doreen at the home of a man called Valois. She is supposedly there to catalog the old eccentric’s book collection, but really wants to find information about four recent deaths (three insect-related, and one of those her grandmother) in the neighbouring properties.
As Doreen settles into the job she befriends the butler and his wife and, one day, when Valois is out, the butler shows her the secret elevator key that takes them to the third floor and Valois’s private quarters. Later, after she moves into her grandmother’s nearby house, all the staff are fired—a result of her discovered trip to the third floor—and she remains the only one working there.
In the penultimate section the insect theme surfaces again (there are previous mentions of bee-keeping as well as the deaths) when Doreen (spoiler) explores the surrounding properties, and discovers it isn’t smoke coming out of the nearby chimneys but swarms of bees. Valois catches her snooping around—he has become younger since she last saw him—and then imprisons and rapes her, all of which is described graphically. We later learn that his youth—and his insect-like lack of pity—is due to a special kind of royal jelly the bees produce, and which he proceeds to feed to her. There is a biter-bit, or stinger-stung, denouement.
If I have one niggle about the story it is the fact that, despite the fact the pair are supposed to become more pitiless the more jelly they consume, Doreen still gets her grandfather out of the hospital at the end of the story to care for him. That apart, this is an atmospheric and immersive horror story, and one of Cowdrey’s best.
The Old Science Fiction Writer by David Gerrold is yet another story that has the writer as a character, and has a future version of Gerrold telling his grandson what things were like before the Big Think, what a science fiction writer was, and what they did. It includes modest little snippets like this:

“I wrote stories. People paid to read them. They gave me their money, sometimes a lot, so I ate every day and wore nice clothes and lived in a big house.”
“People really paid you for your stories?”
“Yes, they did. Once they even gave me an award.”
“No, they didn’t!”
“Yes, they did. And they paid me a lot because I was good at it.”  p. 192

How modest, but apart from that irritant it’s okay I suppose.
Hollywood North by Michael Libling is set in late 1950’s Trenton in Canada, and concerns the narrator Gus’s friendship with another boy called Jack—or Jack the Finder as he is known because of his knack for finding things. The descriptions of these childhood days are very well done, as is shown by the passage where Gus, who hero-worships Jack from afar, first encounters him:

Jack and I went to the same school. Dufferin Public. I could have told him easy how I felt, but I knew the risks. One ordinary kid declaring fandom to another is a bad idea any way you cut it. It is going to come off as weird. Smart kids nip the inclination in the bud. And I counted myself among them, until the morning my brain turned to Jiffy Pop.
I scoured the playground, locked him in my sights, and charged ahead. “You’re Jack,” I said.
“Yeah. I know.”
And without additional formality, my three years of self-restraint and meticulously cultivated anonymity went down the toilet in a sycophantic rush of verbal diarrhea. “I just want to say that uh how I think it’s really neat how you know how like how you find stuff like me too uh five dollars once outside the A&P uh I’m always looking uh Mommy uh my mom uh she said uh uh.” Mommy. I’d said Mommy. My mastery of the awkward was flawless. Kill me now.
His buddies were roaring. I was by far the funniest thing they’d heard and seen since Moe last blinded Curly.
“You got a screw loose or what, kid?”
“Look at that, Jack. You found yourself a little girlfriend.”
“You gonna cry? You gonna go tell Mommy on us?”
Jack laughed along with them, and man, I hated him right then like I’d never hated anyone. “Is that so?” he said to me, and returned to his friends and their football, jogging long and deep as he signaled for a pass, leaving me behind, alone, and, in retrospect, shielded from further ridicule.
I was never anything more than an average student. But when it came to beating up on myself, I was scholarship material from the get-go. Never took much. A minor setback, the slightest slight, and I’d agonize like nobody’s business. On those days, I knew to avoid Annie. She’d only try to cheer me up. Good thing, outside of school, we went our separate ways.  p. 200

Annie is Gus’s other friend, and in due course all three become close friends.
As Gus and Jack’s relationship develops we find out that Trenton used to have a film industry (hence the “Hollywood North” of the title) but that it shut down when the “talkies” started. More ominously, we also learn that the town has had a disproportionate number of disasters: a train wreck; an ammunition plant blowing up; planes colliding over the town; a landslide; multiple drownings, etc.
The initial arc of the story, however, concerns a set of caption cards which Jack finds (these are intertitles for silent movies, and are presented as images throughout the story). Initially the boys take the cards to the local newspaper reporter Bryan McGrath, who Jack knows well, having been interviewed and photographed by him on multiple occasions about his previous finds. McGrath reacts badly to the intertitles however, threatening the two kids and forcing them to promise to burn them.
What they actually do is go to the local dry cleaners and talk to a Mr Blackhurst, an acquaintance of Jack’s from his father’s diner. They discover that the intertitles are from films that Blackhurst made during his time in the movie industry (and which McGrath wrote for), and the boys learn about the town’s history of movie production. When Blackhurst comments that it was the fear that closed the studios, not the talkies, they are interrupted by Evie, Blackhurst’s Hollywood-beautiful wife. She makes Jack and Gus leave.
Before the two boys can make any further progress on the mystery (and while avoiding McGrath, who constantly snoops on them), Jack abruptly moves away from the town due to his parent’s divorce. He doesn’t tell Gus he is going.
A few years pass before Jack returns to the town and, after some frostiness, all three all end up as friends again. However, there is tension later when Jack and Annie become boyfriend and girlfriend.
The two boys then get jobs at the marina, where they start seeing Mr Blackhurst regularly (he commutes across the water from his house). When (spoiler) he dies suddenly, the boys are told by the dockmaster to return the boat to his wife. They are met by Evie at the house, and she takes them to a private cinema in the basement and shows them Blackhurst’s films: the mystery of the town’s tragedies is revealed.
After this there is an accident that involves the three children, and then a further section which takes place years later, when Evie dies and leaves Gus the house in her will. Gus is told to watch one final movie, which reveals the horrific events that really occurred during the “accident” that the three were involved in, the details of which Gus has forgotten or suppressed.
This is a very good piece which not only has a satisfying and original supernatural mystery set in a convincing milieu, but also has a coda that chillingly recasts previous events. Definitely one for the ‘Best of the Year’ collections.5

The Cover is a fairly bland looking effort by Mondolithic Studios, but the more I look at it (especially at larger size) the more I like it. (I note that no effort has been made to left justify the list of contributors’ names, or move them down the page to avoid overprinting the central image).
Books to Look For by Charles de Lint has reviews of a comic book superhero mashup, the third in Stephen Jay Gould’s ‘Jumper’ series, a children’s book, a werewolf trilogy, and what seems to be a novella/graphic story hybrid from Gaiman & Campbell. The usual random selection, in other words.
Musing on Books by Michelle West starts with a review of The Causal Angel by Hannu Rajaniemi, which is the third in a trilogy—not the kind of book to start a column with I’d suggest (it’s an instant turnoff for those that haven’t read the first two). The next review is the fifth of Charles Stross’s ‘Laundry’ novels (although you can apparently can jump into the series here, as West has). The remaining novels sound like the usual fantasy product (spirits, souls, werewolves, half-goblin emperors, etc).
Films: On Novelizing Noah by Alan Dean Foster is a conversation between Foster and the voice of God where they discuss the prospective novelisation of the movie Noah. A treat.
Films: Coming Soon to a Tablet Near You by Kathi Maio begins with Hollywood business talk about theatre release vs. video on demand release before discussing the promising sounding SF adventure movie Snowpiercer (I haven’t heard of it, or the second more thoughtful film I Origins—I’ll have to track them down). Snowpiercer features a train that constantly circles a post-apocalyptic world, and which contains a microcosm of our current society and its social inequality:

The series of battles—most as hand to hand combat—that the rebels must fight are only to be expected in this kind of (literally) linear warfare plot. But Bong Joon-ho is such a skilled director that he adds a ferocious grace, and even a smattering of humor, to the proceedings; each bloodbath is fresh and gripping. It helps that each car offers a striking new backdrop for the next confrontation. From the gray landscapes of the prison car and the manufacturing car where a feverish worker produces the horrific gelatinous protein bars that are the back-car peons’ only form of sustenance, Curtis and his cohorts move forward to increasingly posh and colorful cars where the elite live. These include a botanical garden car, an aquarium car (and sometime sushi bar), a meat locker car, a schoolroom (overseen by a frenetic, pregnant schoolmarm played well by Alison Pill), salon and spa cars, and even a disco car more drug-drenched than the most hedonistic days of Studio 54.  p. 185

The film essays are of much better quality than the book ones.
F&SF Competition #88: “Anagram/Raga Man” (Results) has some submissions that aren’t bad (Blade Runner = Beerland Run). The new competition, F&SF Competition #89, requires limericks.
The Index to Volumes 126 & 127, January-December 2014 reveals four stories each from Oliver Buckram and Albert E. Cowdrey (Van Gelder does have his favourites), two and a half (one collaboration) from Paul Di Filippo, and two each from David Gerrold, Michael Libling, Robert Reed, and Tim Sullivan.
Curiosities: The Condemned Playground, by Cyril Connolly (1945) by David Langford looks at a book which contains, among the other “essays and squibs”, some funny satires.
There are the usual Cartoons, and Coming Attractions.

This is an impressive issue, with one very good supernatural novella, and several other good stories.  ●

_____________________

1. I learned this about Chan Davis from Di Filippo’s story:

In 1953 Chan Davis had been a professor at the University of Michigan—with an odd sideline as a writer of curious and accomplished science fiction stories—when he had run afoul of the House Un-American Activites Committee for his “subversive” leanings. He had lost his job, been blacklisted from academic employment in the whole nation, and, after some delay in coming to trial, received a short but punitive prison sentence.  p. 7

Davis’s Wikipedia page is here.

2. There is a joke in Steve Coogan’s movie Alpha Papa (which features the character Alan Partridge, an inept radio show host, chiding his sidekick Simon)—“Never, never criticise Muslims. Only Christians. And Jews a little bit.”

3. There is a (very short) review of a second ‘Nanabojou’ story by Justin Barbeau (Nanabojou and the Race Question) by me here.

4. The introduction to Scott Baker’s story states he last appeared in F&SF in 1986. His ISFDB page shows substantial activity during the eighties and nineties, but not much this century.

5. Hollywood North was a novella finalist for the 2015 World Fantasy Awards.
As the author notes below in the comments, the story has been expanded into a novel and will be published soon (Amazon UK/USA). ●

F&SF is still being published: F&SF subs/Amazon UKUSA/Weightless Books

rssrss

The Magazine of Fantasy & Science Fiction #707, May-June 2013

ISFDB link
F&SF subs / Amazon UK, USA / Weightless Books

Other reviews:
Lois Tilton, Locus
Sam Tomaino, SF Revu
Michelle Ristuccia, Tangent Online
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editor, Gordon Van Gelder

Fiction:
Grizzled Veterans of Many and Much • novelette by Robert Reed ∗∗∗
By the Light of the Electronic Moon • short story by Angélica Gorodischer (translated by Amalia Gladhart) –
Changes • novelette by Rand B. Lee
The Woman in the Moon • novelette by Albert E. Cowdrey
Wormwood Is Also a Star • novella by Andy Stewart
Directions for Crossing Troll Bridge • short story by Alexandra Duncan
The Bluehole • novelette by Dale Bailey
The Mood Room • short story by Paul Di Filippo
Doing Emily • short story by Joe Haldeman
Systems of Romance • short story by Ted White
Canticle of the Beasts • novelette by Bruce McAllister

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Kristin Kest
Editorial • by Gordon Van Gelder
Books to Look For • by Charles de Lint
Books • by Elizabeth Hand
Coming Attractions
Cartoons
• by Arthur Masear, Bill Long, S. Harris
Films: A Funny Thing Happened on My Way to Mirkwood . . . Well, Not Really • by Lucius Shepard
Results of F&SF Competition #85
F&SF Competition #86: First Draft
Curiosities: Bull’s Hour, by Ivan Yefremov (1968)
• review by Anatoly Belilovsky

_____________________

I picked up this issue to read Andy Stewart’s novella, Wormwood Is Also a Star, the prequel to Likho, his piece in the March/April 2018 issue (which I had intended reading next). Apparently you don’t need to read the former before the latter, but as it is about Chernobyl, the subject of a recent (and excellent) TV drama,1 I thought I’d read it anyway.
The story takes place in an alternative world where the reactor explosion also occurred, but where there are significant differences:

It happened almost instantaneously—inexplicably, this dome-shaped anomaly swelled up on the day of evacuation to pocket nearly five blocks of midtown Pripyat. The Angel’s Tear. And what of the angels? At the center of it, like the nucleus of a cell, a cluster of eight children of varying ages was found huddled in the bathroom of their orphanage, alive and miraculously unradiated. And, as the military doctors and scientists soon discovered, impervious to radiation. The scientists still don’t know how the bubble came to be, how it works, or why the kids developed a psychic gift they did not previously possess (or if the events are even correlative), but the truth was this strange oasis existed in a radiated desert. The scientists found a way to monitor the bubble’s energy signature when occasional bursts of excited atoms bombarded it, causing the energy field to fluctuate, to ripple, become visible for seconds at a time but not buckle.  p. 125-126

The story deals only glancingly with the Angel’s Tear, focusing on one of the older children called Vitaly, who is now nineteen, and who is the lover of a woman called Mitka. She is a married journalist who previously wrote an article about the Tear and the children which upset the government.
Events revolve around the pair, and come to a head when she and Vitaly are summoned to a Kiev house party organised at the behest of her father, a powerful official in the Defence Ministry. Several elements come together here: the death of Mitka’s sister several years previously; Mitka’s deteriorating marital relationship; why the children have been given cyanide capsules (three have mysteriously committed suicide so far); and what Vitaly learns when he “reads” Yuri the husband.
The story is generally a character driven one (in some ways it reads like a Russian novel), although it has a satisfyingly convoluted mystery underneath it all. It also has moments of dark lyricism:

Mitka dreams she is on the banks of the river at night. It must be countryside, for there are no buildings nearby. There is no moon, only starlight brighter than she has ever seen, so bright that each star reflects in the dark, calmly flowing waters. And she is not alone on these banks. Kassandra is with her—not Kassandra as she looked when she was alive, but dead Kassandra, clothes soggy and torn, her dark hair resting mossy on her head. Only her face is less swollen, so that she is actually recognizable. Mitka’s dead, gray sister, a rusalka now, smiles and offers her hand, and Mitka takes it and walks toward the river. She has never been to these banks before, but when she puts her bare toe into the frigid water, she knows it to be the Dnieper, this ancient, long river.
Kassandra guides Mitka waist-deep into the water, and although it is freezing, the current feels more like a cold wind flowing across her legs.
Mitka follows her sister’s gaze up to the sky where a single star burns brighter than the others, this one greenish in color while the others are white or pale blue. She watches as the star grows bright and brighter, as it slowly falls, arcing down from the sky like a green flare with a shimmering trail.
This star is such a small, bright thing as it splashes into the river far ahead of them, but the water doesn’t extinguish it. Beneath the water, the point of light grows ever brighter, casts its sickly green hue upward. And then the river ceases to flow, and human-shaped shadows surface, all around. One by one the naked figures breach, dead, floating on their backs. First her father, and then her mother, who she has only seen in pictures, and then she sees Yvonna bobbing, and then Gregor, and then Bethai. The rest of the Witch Children follow, all except Vitaly. She searches for his face among the dead, but cannot find him. She splashes through the floating mass. Some of these she recognizes: an old primary school teacher, a grocer who used to sneak her candy. More and more faces from her past, and then some unknown. The still river is thick with them.
When she turns to ask her sister for help, she finds that her sister is gone. And in the skyline all around her, the distance is ablaze, smoking. One by one, the dead open their eyes.  p. 160-161

If this has a weakness it is that the SF parts of it—the Tear, the way the children are immune to, or suppress, radiation—are not explained and, apart from Vitaly’s use of his contact telepathy ability at the party, are background furniture. That criticism apart it is quite a good novella overall, and in places better than that. I look forward to reading Likho.
Grizzled Veterans of Many and Much by Robert Reed opens with an eight year old boy called Brad at his billionaire grandfather’s Aspen house at Christmas. There, Grandpa makes an announcement that he intends to Transcend:

“There is a process called Transcendence,” Grandpa said. “It’s very new, and it is not easy. But the people who undergo it…well, they gain certain benefits. Blessings. Skills nobody else in the world can enjoy.”
“Like Spider-Man,” I said.
My uncles snarled.
But Grandpa said, “Exactly. When you Transcend, your mind is improved in so many ways, and you turn superhuman, and nothing is ever the same again.”
Superheroes had physical gifts. But even an eight-year-old kid can see the benefits in being a whole lot smarter than before.
“I’m going into the hospital tomorrow,” he said.
Most of the room groaned.
“It’s a special clinic where doctors and their very smart machines will put these tiny, tiny hair-like tubes inside my blood. It won’t take the tubes an hour to join up in the brain. I might have a headache, but I probably won’t. And once those tubes piece themselves together, I’ll be tied into computers and some very special software.”
[. . .]
“I’ll live another hundred years,” Grandpa said. “My new mind will think wondrous fancy original thoughts, and maybe some of my ideas will make life better for all of you. Though that’s not why I’m doing this. I’ve already done plenty for everybody, in my family and beyond.”  p. 10-11

The downside of this process is that, although the Transcendees experience a subjectively long period of enhanced ability (Grandpa reads Moby Dick and writes a college textbook about Melville in one ninety minute burst) they only live a matter of weeks in reality. Indeed, he dies before his wives and family can visit the clinic, the news of which comes from a video avatar of the man himself, the first of many communications his digital remains make from beyond the grave. This particular message ends with a prediction:

“One way or another, everybody will follow me. What I am is just the first drop of moisture in what will be a soft, nourishing rain.”  p. 13

After this eccentric family beginning, the rest of the story follows an older Brad through a world where an increasing number of people elect to Transcend, and charts his adventures—which are mostly to do with helping his extended family out of various scrapes. The future portrayed is an immersive and intriguing one, as is shown when Brad travels to Africa to visit his ageing mother, who is living in a back-to-nature commune (and when the Earth’s population is down to two billion and projected to drop to a quarter of that):

Mogadishu looked prosperous, looked happy. There were as many smiles in the streets as there were faces, and I couldn’t count either, the city was so jammed with people. Children and their parents crowded me, plus a very few elderly, and there were armies of machines busily chasing jobs and hobbies and whatever else it was that our mechanical servants did with their neurons.
I walked through the crowds for an hour before finding a proper rental shop. I said that I wanted a car, except what I got was more a spaceship with tires. The grinning young office worker had been in town only three months, but he acted like the expert that I needed. And I needed nothing less than the best, he claimed. Driving through the interior could turn frustrating without warning.
No, there weren’t any explicit dangers outside the city. Unless I looked delicious to a saber-lion or cybernetic hyena, I was going to be safe enough.
[. . .]
As promised, the car was a wonder, and my drive proved interesting, what with the beautiful scenery woven around an endless boredom. Rains had been reliable for several years and rivers and grasslands were prospering in what used to be wastelands, and of course the wild game had returned, often wearing embellishments given by cold clever dreamers. The young highways were still in good repair, but the last economic boom that had swept across the continent, destroying drought and civil unrest, had also erased the farms that would have thrived in the new Eden. When every patch of ground is a national park, parks cease to matter very much. Each slice of this countryside was as splendid as most of its neighbors, and every time one more person Transcended, another ex-peasant from the wilderness could move into a magical city, buy an empty apartment for cheap, and settle into a robot-aided existence free of dust and dreariness.
Modern life was just the proving grounds for the greater Heaven to come, which was Transcendence. p. 26-27

Brad’s answer to all this—a world where the dead are more interesting than the living—is (spoiler) to create a simulated world and go back to that original Christmas announcement from Grandpa. There, once more an eight year old boy, Brad tells the rest of his family where they are, that there is no Transcendence in this reality, and that they need to get on with their lives. Then the simulated Brad goes outside and gets knocked down by a car, leaving them in their new world.
I can see that this closing scene mirrors the opening one, and that it provides a sense of poetic justice/balance to someone who feels as Brad does about the Transcendence process—but it seems rather quixotic, and doesn’t really convince. It also slightly spoils what is, at times, a occasionally dazzling story.
By the Light of the Electronic Moon by Angélica Gorodischer (translated by Amalia Gladhart) is a tall tale told in a café in between endless cups of coffee and glasses of sherry. One man relates to another the trouble he got himself into on a planet governed by a thousand woman:

“The next day I received another note, on letterhead but without seals, in which I was told that the interview was with the Enlightened and Chaste Lady Guinevere Lapis Lazuli.”
“What did you say?” I jumped in. “That was her name?”
“No, of course not.”
Marcos had put down the paper he had collected at one of the other tables, and now he was coming with the fourth double coffee. He didn’t bring me anything because this didn’t look like a special occasion.
“Her name,” said Trafalgar, who never puts sugar in his coffee, “was something that sounded like that. In any case, what they told me was that the interview had been postponed until the next day because the enlightened, chaste and so forth, who was a member of the Central Government, had begun her annual proceedings before the Division of Integral Relations of the Secretariat of Private Communication. The year there lasts almost twice as long as here and the days are longer and so are the hours.”
Frankly, I didn’t give a damn about Veroboar’s chronosophy.  p. 53-54

Me neither. I also found the mannered style tedious beyond belief, and struggled to get through what is a heavily padded story, but this may appeal to others.
Changes by Rand B. Lee is set in a post-apocalyptic world:

Nobody knew why the Great Probability Storm had struck when it had, fifteen years previously, or where it had come from. In an instant, millions of people the world over had vanished—faith-keepers and faith-scorners alike—leaving their clothing behind, in an eerie mockery of the Fundamentalist Christian “Rapture” predictions.
[. . .]
But nobody had any explanations to proffer concerning why the Storm had splintered the world into probability-zones, replacing slices of the known, familiar present with slices of past, future, or alternative presents more or less probable. Some mini-zones had been found as small as a meter or two across. Others—such as the zone that had changed the former Washington, D.C., back into a malarial swamp—had been large enough to affect entire cities (or in the case of Luxembourg, entire nations). And the Storm had continued to generate smaller probability-squalls at irregular intervals, sending ripples of Change throughout a splintered world that now resembled a mosaic more than anything else.
A husband and wife might lie down together one evening and wake up the next morning to find that one of them had been replaced by a stranger who possessed a complete memory of their nonexistent years of married life together. A Manhattan bicycle courier, zipping round a corner, might find himself splashing through the muddy streets of old Nieuw Amsterdam under the astonished eyes of black-hatted burghers. And sometimes the squalls, like the Great Probability Storm before them, wreaked Changes of Lovecraftian surrealism.  p. 66-67

The story concerns Whitsun and his burro Francesca as they travel through this unstable, changing world. Whitsun is a lay-brother of a non-religious order, or “Fair Dealer,” immune to the changes, and the host of “wealfire” which can stabilise, retrieve, or banish items from the probability squalls. An example of the latter occurs when Whitsun comes across an abandoned auto of a type he hasn’t seen before, and which the wealfire does not like:

Quickly, driven by the sudden sense of urgency that always gripped him at such times, the red-robed man pushed up his left sleeve. His forearm emerged, and the moon picked out the haze of pale scars that covered his forearm from wrist to elbow. Taking a knife from his belt, he clicked open a blade and made a small cut in his skin right below the wrist. A dark spot welled up, grew, elongated, began to trickle.
And the wealfire rejoiced. The tension in him was suddenly released, like an arrow from the bow. He felt the lightest pulse of pleasure, not the coruscations of joy he endured during a Judging. But the outlines of the vehicle trembled, and with a pop of inrushing air, appeared (without moving a centimeter) to dwindle, faster and faster, its ceramic white reddening as it shrank, as though it were receding at impossible speeds into the distance, not shrinking in place. And then it disappeared, leaving only three slim smudges on the desert clay to mark where it had been.  p. 69-70

After this, Whitsun and Francesca journey towards a futuristic looking city on the horizon. Before they get there a probability storm changes this glass and steel vision into a more prosaic looking Southwestern town—although Whitsun soon revises that estimation when he sees a number of crucifixes with burned bodies on them. They continue into town and see other odd things too: jackrabbits that have a malevolent appearance; a vertical column of what appears to be brown smoke (this turns out to be an null-gravity column); and a mist-wall that cuts through the town. Then they meet a pack of telepathic uplifted dogs. The greater part of the story concerns Whitsun’s dealing with the pack, and his attempt to get to the humans who live behind the (according to the dogs) lethal grey mist.
This is all entertainingly fantastic, and I was thoroughly enjoying the story when it just stopped dead in its tracks! I note that the sequel, The Judging (F&SF, November-December 2014), carries on exactly from this point, so what we have here isn’t a novelette but part one of an unannounced two-part serial. This is unfair to readers, and it loses a star for that.
The Woman in the Moon by Albert E. Cowdrey is a rambling monologue from a Professor Threefoot of the year 2077. Threefoot lectures his fellow academic, but unemployed, son-in-law about his own early career, marital infidelity, and a female colleague/lover’s discovery of the Selenite civilisation on the Moon. We further learn of the Professor’s plagiarism of her work after she is killed in a reactor explosion, and how the research material he used for his definitive book on the Selenites may include parts of a novel his ex-lover had been writing.
This is moderately humorous but rambling and unstructured.
Directions for Crossing Troll Bridge by Alexandra Duncan gives five short rules for doing just that. If there is a point to these 334 words, I missed what it is.
The Bluehole by Dale Bailey is set in the summer of 1982 and, for those who were of a certain age at that time, it will provide an immersive, Stephen King-like reading experience:

The soundtrack of that summer still thunders in my ears—Television, the Jam, the Undertones, Jimmy’s long row of vinyl. Summer days we used to lie roasting in his bedroom listening to Blank Generation and talking about girls. Jimmy was infinitely more knowledgeable than I was. I had my kiss. He had a hand job in the back seat of a ’77 Caprice while Darkness on the Edge of Town played on the eight-track mounted under the dash.
And I remember the day out on the stoop when he changed the course of my life forever. He handed me a Marlboro with the butt snapped off and a battered paperback copy of The Hitchhiker’s Guide to the Galaxy. The smokes will probably kill me—I still snap the filters off and flip them into the street—but the books saved my life. It started with Arthur Dent and Ford Prefect and the Vogon Constructor Fleet, and it went on from there— Silverberg and Bradbury, Simak and Lovecraft, the lights that would illuminate my miserable high-school years.  p. 175

The story tells of the narrator’s friendship with (and unrequited love for) a new neighbour called Jimmy, a good-looking, cool, and charismatic young man. Most of the story details their everyday adventures—shoplifting at the local store, playing games in the local arcade, going to the movies, etc.
There are three major events that stand out: the first is when they go to see the movie The Thing (they also find, read and discuss the John W. Campbell story beforehand); the second and third consist of two swimming trips they make to the Bluehole, a large lake reputed to be the home of a monster that has killed in the past.
There is a lot of engaging period description in the story, and the writer’s domestic circumstances provide even more complexity (there is a dead mother, an absentee cop father, and a drug dealing and hostile older brother). And on top of this are his feelings for Jimmy. This material is the story’s strength; its weakness, on the other hand, is the material about the monster (even though this is buttressed by much reference to Campbell’s tale), which (spoiler) finally appears in the climactic scene, attacking Jimmy while the pair are swimming, and pulling him under the surface (he does not reappear). This doesn’t entirely convince (its hard to see how the monster could kill people—even on an occasional basis—without the news eventually getting out, and what does it eat when it isn’t dining on the occasional human?)
A better than good story for the most part, but one that is flawed.
The Mood Room by Paul Di Filippo is a short piece that takes the form of an interview with a programmer involved in the development of Mood Rooms:

We called our start-up Total Immersive Environments, or TIE, and our goal was to build an artificial-reality chamber responsive to the user’s thoughts. Kinda like Bradbury’s “The Veldt,” right? You don’t know Bradbury? They burnt all his books? Ha! You had me going there for a minute.  p. 195

The ending involves the two inventors making love in the mood room whereupon (spoiler) the room joins in—leading to its subsequent marketing as a sex toy/partner.
This all very talky (it’s essentially a monologue) and the ending struck me as a bit puerile.
Doing Emily by Joe Haldeman is another VR tale (and immediately after the di Filippo story, too). This one has a university professor in a bar talking to a simulator engineer about his recent experiences as Hemingway and Fitzgerald, before making an appointment to be Emily Dickinson that afternoon.
This is an entertaining and engaging piece for the most part, with a number of lively touches, such as when the professor deliberately explores the program limits of Dickinson:

A young man in a blue uniform approached with an expression that in a less innocent age would signal the intent to couple.
Well, this age was not so innocent. Boy and girl both knew the game and the rules, though Emily had had little practice.
“Miss Emily. You look even more lovely than last time.”
“And when was that, pray tell? Grammar school?” My voice startled me, because of the female template, vocal cords vibrating too fast and in the wrong place. At his expression I added, “The heat is sapping my brain. When did we meet?”
“The Fourth of July celebration last year. There were many men in uniform; no wonder you might not remember a particular one.” He touched the brim of his hat. “Lieutenant Joshua Brilling, U.S. Cavalry, at your service. I was in charge of your father’s escort from Washington.”
“Of course I remember.” I touched his forearm, hard and strong, and stepped sideways, tipping the parasol so no one else could see my face. “You look like a nice man. Shall we repair to my room?”
“Pardon me?”
“Come up to my room and pleasure me relentlessly?”
“Miss Dickinson!”
“I know I’m not very pretty. But you have been chaste a long time, have you not? Marooned in Washington, on your best behavior?”
The alternation of expressions on his face was amazing to behold. He paled and started backing up. Emily’s quiet laugh turned into an infectious bray, and in a rush of postmodern narcissism I started to fall in love with myself.
“Come on, now; I am the virgin mother of modern American poetry. If you want, I could have Walt Whitman join us in a threesome. That would be a story for the boys back in the barracks.”
He froze and started to glow green around the edges. The goggle-eyed Roberto appeared, looking weary and anachronistic with his face mods and white lab apron. “Emily! Professor Tomlinson! You set off a parameter alarm.”
“Sorry. Just testing it.”  p. 212-213

Unfortunately, this promising piece unravels at the end with (spoiler) a deux ex machina malfunction that leaves the professor thinking he is Dickinson, and the men in the white coats taking him away.
Systems of Romance by Ted White is about a musician in the future who is over two hundred years old. He meets a young wunderkind called Cecilia-B at a party, she moves in, and they become lovers and musical collaborators. Later it materialises that she is more interested in his longevity connections than his musical ones (not everyone in this future world is offered extended life), and they have a fight about this that causes them to separate.
The remainder of the story (spoiler) has the narrator reflect on their relationship after she dies in a natural catastrophe six years later. He ponders what would have happened if she hadn’t left him.
None of this really amounts to anything, but it’s an okay future slice-of-life I guess. I note in passing that it reminded me of a 1970’s fashion for stories about artists or musicians.
Canticle of the Beasts by Bruce McAllister is an episode in the writer’s ‘Child Pope’ series,2 and tells of three children who are pursued by “Drinkers” (vampires) and other (secular) forces in fifteenth century Italy. The trio are the narrator Emilio, who is the Emissary of the spirit of La Compassione, and whose skin glows in the presence of Drinkers; the Child Pope Bonifacio; and Caterina, who is a reincarnation of the Madonna of Provenzano, and a seeress. They are travelling to see Emilio’s father at Lake Como for a final battle with the Drinkers.
This episode concerns their journey to a place of sanctuary, a chapel and caves in St. Francis’s forest. As they approach the chapel they have a strange encounter with a stag and an owl:

It was a cervo . A stag. What children called a “man-deer.” But it could not be. It was too large, too much like a dream, and yet it was no dream. A great man-deer with antlers that reached out like arms toward the oaks around it. I had seen a statue of such a creature in the abandoned garden of a Roman villa in Luni the second time my mother took me to the carnival there. The bronze had been touched by so many fingers that its nose and antlers were bright as the sun. I had seen little replicas of the same creature carved of wood or cast in metal and sold every Saturday at the village market, and had often wished for the money to buy one. I had also once seen a “woman-deer” in the hills above the village, when my mother and I had traveled by wagon to the witch who slept with lizards, hoping for a blessing for my rash. Yet nothing like this—nothing so huge and grand. Bonifacio and Caterina, it was clear, had never seen such a creature either.
It was then that I felt it: the tingling on my skin, on my arms and legs—the same tingling I had felt upon meeting Caterina for the first time. The tingling that told me she was indeed the incarnation of the Madonna. The tingling I had felt on the road from Siena, too, at a tiny chapel of blue tiles—the sensation that had made me decide we should take another road. I had come to believe that, just as the glow of my skin foretold the arrival of Drinkers, so the tingling meant the presence of something sacred, incarnate or not.  p. 239-240

The stag and the owl (spoiler) are the spirits of Saint Francis and Saint Clare, and these two protect the trio when searching soldiers, and then Drinkers, arrive in the caves.
The alternate world presented in this engaging tale convincingly combines both vampire and religious mythology, but the story is obviously part of a longer work—it starts with a fairly clunky data dump which synopsises earlier tales, and the ending telegraphs future events on the way to a final battle. It’s an entertaining fragment though, and interested me enough to make me want to dig out the other stories in the series.

The Cover by Kristin Kest is for Andy Stewart’s novella, and (I think) illustrates the dream passage above.
The Editorial by Gordon Van Gelder is a short piece that has information about new anthologies from the publisher of the magazine, Spilogale; an obituary for F&SF’s ex-managing editor (from 1979-1989), Anne Deveraux Jordan; and a fact check item about the first use of the term “computer virus” (Greg Benford’s story The Scarred Man from the May 1970 issue of Venture, probably).
Books to Look For by Charles de Lint covers a number of what appear to be generic fantasy books (and I don’t mean that in a good way—the content includes vampires, werewolves, ghosts, dead people, exorcisms, etc. There isn’t anything here that sounds remotely original.)
Books by Elizabeth Hand opens with a review of a new translation of a two thousand-year old novel, The Golden Ass by Apuleius, which she usefully compares to previous translations. The second book is a graphic novel, and the third a YA one.
(Insert here my usual complaint about the dissonance between F&SF’s review coverage and the fiction it runs.)
Films: A Funny Thing Happened on My Way to Mirkwood . . . Well, Not Really by Lucius Shepard begins with a discussion of trilogies before launching into a less than flattering review of The Hobbit: An Unexpected Journey. There are a couple of other short horror movie reviews too (The Devil’s Business and Lake Mungo, which he liked).
Results of F&SF Competition #85 details the winners of the “Chick-Lit” versions of SF novels (ho-hum), and F&SF Competition #86: First Draft sets out the next one.
Curiosities: Bull’s Hour, by Ivan Yefremov (1968)
is an interesting short essay about an “unbook” from the Soviet era (the writer read it in the Kislovodsk public library in 1971, but on later enquiry was told that the writer had never written a book by that name . . . .)
There are the usual Coming Attractions, Cartoons, and Classified Ads.

In conclusion this is a somewhat exasperating issue, given the amount of material that is potentially very good indeed but which is let down by various failings (the lack of ending in the case of the Lee and McAllister stories; an ending that doesn’t quite work in the Reed; and unintegrated SFnal elements in the Stewart and Bailey). I note that the short fiction is much weaker than the novelette and novella length material. An interesting issue overall, though.  ●

_____________________

1. Chernobyl is a five-part TV drama that premiered in May 2019, and I highly recommended it. There is a Wikipedia page here.

2. McAllister refers to an unfinished 100,000 word novel about Emilio (the Emissary) in this short interview.  ●

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe: F&SF subs / Amazon UK, USA / Weightless Books

rssrss

Science Fiction Monthly v03n01, February 1976

ISFDB link1
Archive.org link

_____________________

Editor, Julie Davis; Executive Editor, Pat Hornsey

Fiction:
The Highest Dive • short story by Jack Williamson ∗∗∗
Deep Freeze • short fiction by David Grigg ∗∗∗
Second Einstein • short fiction by C. D. Renmore ∗∗+

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Jim Burns
Interior artwork Tony Roberts (x2), Eddie Jones, Jim Burns, Patrick Woodroffe, Tony Masero, Bruce Pennington, Peter Jones, uncredited (x2)
Editorial
Book Reviews • by Malcolm Edwards (x4), John Brosnan, Peter Weston, Peter Linnett
A Look at Space 1999 • essay by John Brosnan
News • by Julie Davis
SF in the Cinema: The Ultimate Warrior • film review by John Brosnan
Paperbacks on Trial • book review matrix by Maxim Jakubowski
On the Way to the Stars: Part Three: Into the Abyss • essay by Peter Weston
Letters
The Query Box • by Walter Gillings [as by Thomas Sheridan]

_____________________

The Highest Dive by Jack Williamson2 is an old-school SF story that opens with a young man called Max caught in a violent storm on Atlas, a massive alien planet with very low gravity and high winds. As Max struggles to avoid being blown away he lapses into unconsciousness, and the story flashbacks to his time on Earth, his decision to go to the planet, and his familiarisation on arrival. This latter includes a trip to a pool:

He saw no water anywhere. The ridge was nearly flat on top, flaked and cracked with time. Ropes stretched along its rim. The reddish desert lay far, far below. Feeling bewildered, he looked back at Komatsu.
‘There’s our pool.’ Komatsu leaned out to point straight down. ‘The only open water we’ve found on Atlas.’
He gripped the rope and looked. The time-worn wall of something like black rock dropped straight down so far it made him giddy. At last he found the pool—a small round mirror of bright blue water tucked under the very foot of that frightening cliff.
‘It’s deep enough.’ Queerly casual, Komatsu pointed at another hand-rope, stretching from their feet to a rock down in the pool. ‘We climb that to get back.’ He grinned at Max. ‘Want me to go first?’
‘You’ve got to be kidding!’ Max stared at his dark, gaunt face. ‘We’re too . . . too high!’
‘Just a thousand feet.’ Komatsu’s grin grew wider. ‘About the same as ten at home. You fall slow here, kid. With air resistance, your terminal velocity is about fifteen feet a second. From any height, you never fall faster. Watch me.’
He peeled off his yellow suit, moved to the rim in a lazy, one legged dance, floated over it. Max leaned out to watch him drifting slowly down, arms spread like wings to guide him. He was a long time in the air, and his body had dwindled to a far dark speck before he broke the blue mirror of the pool.  p. 3

When Max recovers consciousness he finds himself miles up in the air. As the near-permanent clouds temporarily clear, he sees (spoiler) a huge alien city. Max contacts his team, and they gain an insight into what the planet really is . . . . After this conversation, Max’s only chance of survival is to try control his descent to dive into a body of water beside the camp.
This has a slightly dated feel, and there is no explanation as to why the alien city wasn’t revealed earlier by ground radar, but the story isn’t bad, and the final scene gives a mini-sense of wonder buzz.

Deep Freeze by David Grigg starts with the protagonist waking up in an underground deep-sleep/suspended animation facility. When he explores the upper levels and the surface he discovers there has been a nuclear war, and two hundred years have passed—not the thirty he expected.
He wanders about on the surface for a while and then returns to the facility, where he wakes a young woman for company. She is devastated to find out her cancer won’t be cured (all the frozen, bar the corrupt protagonist, were put into deep sleep to await a cure for their conditions).
The man then goes out again, this time to look for food, and surprises a primitive tribe which flees. He takes their abandoned possessions and food back to the girl but, after they eat, she asks him to put her back to sleep. He does this, and then goes to find the tribe.
All of this back and forth is a setup for the final section where, after he has made contact with the tribe (spoiler), he goes hunting with them. The shock ending has him discover that they are eating the occupants of the cryogenic facility!
I remember liking this the first time around, and, apart from a dull section after he wakes, its grisly inevitability is still quite entertaining.

The last story Second Einstein, is by C. D. Renmore, and appears to be the writer’s debut.3 It starts with a failed PhD student called Lionel White in an observatory, where recalls his failed thesis defence at the hands of a professor called Haynes:

For the hundredth time, he re-lived the interview; every detail was still there even after five long years. He had started, at Haynes’ request, by outlining the main thesis, which he called his Creative Correlation Hypothesis.
In its simplest and most compact form, this hypothesis said that, in scientific research, if a discovery isn’t made by person A, then it will be made by person B, eventually.
[. . .]
But then White had gone further and, perhaps too enthusiastically, given his conclusion: that once the correlation of scientific effort exceeds a certain threshold, the tide of knowledge will advance at an average rate that is almost independent of individual brilliance. In particular, individual geniuses no longer set the pace of scientific progress. The massed attack on the frontier of science will progress, said White, at an average rate that even a Newton or an Einstein could not match.
Haynes seemed about to explode, but subsided sufficiently to be merely condescending in his reply. ‘Look here, young man, you had better get one or two things straight. Firstly, you can’t measure an Einstein or a Newton in multiples of lesser men. That would be as ridiculous as to suggest that two men each with an IQ of 100 are as good as one man with an IQ of 200. Secondly, you’re being too superficial in judging the equivalence of two peoples’ work. You said that Heisenberg’s matrix mechanics were essentially equivalent to Schrodinger’s wave equation. Would you care to justify that in any detail? Any detail?’
White stared at the floor, as if seeking inspiration there. Even if he could answer Haynes’ question in detail—which he could not—it was the wrong question! Utterly beside the point.
[. . .]
‘I take your point, of course, sir. But look at it in this way: will you grant that over ninety per cent of the scientists who ever lived are still alive today, in 1976?’
‘Certainly.’
‘And that the combined resources of all the laboratories on Earth are sufficient to conduct literally thousands of related experiments on virtually any aspect of modern physics?’
‘With some reservations, yes; but what are you getting at?’
‘Simply this, sir: the probability of a major breakthrough depends on the number of scientists and the number of experiments; plus of course a correlation factor which will in general be complex. Although their experiments will not all be inspired ones, eventually someone, somewhere, will do just the experiment that an Einstein or a Newton would have suggested.
And, of course, they will make the same discovery. There are many millions of scientists now, and highly correlated efforts can produce results that no one person can achieve.’
[. . .]
Haynes now resumed the attack with something approaching personal animosity.
‘There are flaws in that. Just because someone does the right experiment it does not follow that they appreciate its significance. In fact, if they did the experiment more or less at random we have an independent probability to consider altogether: whether the significance of the result will be appreciated by a non-Einstein or a non-Newton at all. The combined probability that the same person will both do the right experiment and appreciate its significance is just about zero, I should think. Are you seriously suggesting that if Einstein or Newton had never lived, we might still have advanced to the state of our present know ledge in physics?’
White took a deep breath. ‘I am suggesting that as a distinct possibility; and further, I think that we might possibly be even more advanced than we are today.’  p. 26

After this intriguing (albeit talking heads) beginning, the story becomes something else entirely as the alien Fornax land near the observatory. The Fornax monitor numerous civilisations throughout the Galaxy and, as humanity has recently tripped the atomic-use alarm, they have come to make changes that will prevent humanity developing an interstellar drive.
Their solution (spoiler) involves sending White back in time to kill Newton and Einstein. This provides an ironic ending to the story, where White’s theories prove to be correct, and humanity has developed more quickly than they had in the world where the two scientists did not die. In this changed timestream, White is an acclaimed scientist, and humanity has conquered the aliens.
This is a relatively complex story, and one that has a lot of moving parts (the highbrow theory, the aliens, time travel, etc.). It probably has too much going on and, more importantly, it doesn’t quite convince, e.g., why are the original aliens still with White after the changes are made? That said, it’s an entertaining piece and an promising debut. It is a pity we didn’t see more work from this writer.

The Cover by Jim Burns is the one he produced for Kurt Vonnegut’s book The Sirens of Titan. The Interior artwork features two good paintings by Bruce Pennington (above) and Peter Jones (below), and there is also colour work from Tony Roberts (I also liked his piece for Beyond Apollo), Eddie Jones, and Patrick Woodroffe (I’m not sure why there are curved exhaust trails coming from the spaceship in the latter painting). One of the B&W story illustrations is by Tony Masero, the other two are uncredited.

The short Editorial contains the usual blather about the stories and articles, but there is an intriguing paragraph at the end:

We intend to publish special issues devoted to robots and UFOs; interviews with D G Compton and Harlan Ellison; a special French issue with stories and illustrations from France (in translation, of course); a science fact article on gravity which is more than apples dropping on your head; a history of sf film taking over from where John Baxter’s book Science Fiction in the Cinema left off; a retrospective look at Jefferson Airplane/Starship (the most sf orientated group around—as some will have it); an illustrated series about future transport, and lots more American sf artist interviews. How lucky can you get?  p. 1

There were only three more issues after this one, and they didn’t include the Harlan Ellison interview (presumably this surfaced elsewhere), or the intriguing sounding French issue which I would like to have seen (I suspect Maxim Jakubowski was involved with this project4).
Two of the Book Reviews aren’t actually on p. 17 but appear alongside the Editorial on the first page: these include John Bronsan’s piece on A Pictorial History of Science Fiction Films by Jeff Rovin, and Malcolm Edwards’ on Hello Summer, Goodbye by Michael G. Coney. Bronsan starts off with this:

It is just that; a pictorial history of science fiction films and little else. It’s silly to be disappointed by a book that lives up to its title but I can’t help feeling that author Jeff Rovin would have produced a much more valuable book if he’d put more work into the text accompanying the photographs. As it stands, the book is just a catalogue of sf films with, in most cases, one paragraph devoted to each film. The main exception is an extended piece on Things to Come but this, so Rovin tells us, was written by Alan Asherman, the same person who supplied all the stills for the book. I can’t understand why Asherman didn’t write the whole book himself as his piece stands head and shoulders above the rest of the written material.  p. 1

That, essentially, is the review: the other 90% is nit-picking about film minutiae, or the merits of various other films. As in the Space: 1999 piece below, Bronsan does tend to maunder—it’s a pity the editors didn’t get a grip.
Malcolm Edwards has this on Michael G. Coney (whose novel Hello Summer, Goodbye he liked):

[He] has not been writing novels for long, but he is proving a remarkably consistent and amazingly prolific performer with a real talent for constructing tightly-knit plots; and he seems to have established a name, a style and a string of credits in the batting of an eyelid. When I try to think of precedents, I can only come up with John Brunner at the outset of his career . . . but I would rate Coney higher than Brunner (as he was then). I do wish that he would stop setting his novels in dressed-up versions of English fishing villages, but I’m sure he will, in time.  p. 1

It is impressive that Edwards manages to describe the novel, and also contextualize Coney, within both the writer’s own career and the field, in such a short space (although I see the review is actually four hundred words long, approximately a paperback page). Edwards also contributes three more reviews (The Man in the High Castle by Philip K. Dick, The Jonah Kit by Ian Watson, and The Wizard of Anharitte by Colin Kapp). He manages to put his finger on one of the reasons I like Dick’s Castle but am lukewarm about the likes of Do Androids Dream of Electric Sheep?:

Science fiction is full of ‘classics’ which make a great initial impression but don’t stand up to rereading. The Man in the High Castle is one of those rare books which actually improves on second reading. Dick writes with more care, albeit less exuberance, than in most of his novels, and the result is a finely-wrought novel that is one of the best in all science fiction.  p. 17

Peter Weston reviews the plotless Imperial Earth by Arthur C. Clarke and, when he compares it with Rama and The Sands of Mars (1951), opines that the latter is the best of the three.
Peter Linnett reviews the Robert Sheckley Omnibus by Robert Sheckley, a volume I bought and loved, and still own.

A Look at Space 1999 by John Brosnan is an article about the execrable TV series from the mid-70s, and it starts with this:

Space 1999 swings right out of any conventional sci-fi dimension/ raves the ATV press release, ‘at the same time taking advantage of all the scientific facts that are known, such as the existence of a phenomenon known as a “black sun”, a mass of gaseous substance developing into an impenetrable ball from a burned-out asteroid, with such tremendous gravitation that it pulls everything into it, even light. Anything near it simply disappears. It upsets all theories of existence, even time. This provides the background to one episode. Time ceases to have any meaning. The players find themselves in eternity, with the sudden conviction that the whole Universe is a living thought.’  p. 4

It gets worse, when Brosnan describes the medical condition of one of the characters:

As for Professor Bergman, well he’s pretty straightforward compared with the others. ‘He is to some degree the father-figure of the key personnel on Moon Base Alpha. To some extent, he is very much the proverbial professor. He has a brilliant mind which has been responsible for a number of developments in space science, but he is unworldly in many practical matters.’ Apart from that his main problem is that he has a mechanical heart which . . . ‘because it responds more slowly to nervous stimuli than does a normal human heart, reduces his reactions to most emotional stresses. Whatever the situation, he is almost entirely physically immune from panic’. Just as the script writers are almost entirely immune from logic. If anyone can explain to me how a sluggish heart is going to prevent its owner from experiencing panic I would like to hear from them. The adrenalin might not be pumped through the system so quickly but I would imagine that the only way you could prevent the brain from experiencing fear or panic would be to shut off the blood supply completely—which wouldn’t make for a very lively character.  p. 4

Bronsan’s commentary continues in a similarly amusing vein but, unfortunately, the last quarter of the review is a superfluous examination of the wonderful special effects—as if anyone cares by this point.

News by Julie Davis is fairly thin on the ground this issue (half the space is taken up by John Bronsan’s SF in the Cinema: The Ultimate Warrior, which sounds like unpretentious fun). There is information about a revived BSFA, and what seems to be a verbatim press release from the L5 society:

The space colonies would have a virtually unlimited clean source of energy, an abundance and variety of food and material goods, freedom to travel and independence from large-scale government. The initial colonies would provide living accommodation (of a luxury standard) for up to 10,000 people and would provide plenty of jobs, shops, schools, libraries and other buildings. The colonies would also have their own rivers and lakes, stocked with fish, parklands (with birds, animals, trees) and there could even be hills and possibly mountains. Is this just a fanciful dream? No! The space engineering ability exists today and many detailed technical reports are now flowing out of universities and organisations in the USA, where the concept was born. There are participants in these studies from such institutions as [MIT], [Caltech], Princeton University, New York Polytechnic, and even the space agency NASA.
The first stage of the space colony, called Model 1 or ‘Sunflower’, could be built before the end of the 1980s.  p. 10

Good luck with that.
Paperbacks on Trial is the book review matrix complied by Maxim Jakubowski. I’ve mentioned my fascination with these before, and could happily do so again at length: I’ll limit myself to observing that Harrison and Jakubowski both thought Le Guin’s The Dispossessed mediocre. The next time you hate a book everyone else loves, remember that you aren’t the only one who feels that way.

On the Way to the Stars: Part Three: Into the Abyss by Peter Weston discusses the various types of space drives and their pros and cons with reference to various genre works, e.g., “A similar combination of cold-sleep and solar sails appears in Niven and Pournelle’s recent Mote in God’s Eye, while a first-class treatment is given by Poul Anderson in Orbit Unlimited.” It reminded me I still have several of these books to read (Anderson’s Tau Zero is probably the most egregious omission). I don’t know why the covers illustrating the piece are so badly cropped.
The Letters are mostly responses to Ian Covell’s letter in a previous issue attacking Joanna Russ’s The Female Man. Anne Looker, from Aylesbury, Buckinghamshire, replies:

Your prolific correspondent. Mr Covell (SFM Vol 2 No 10) seems to be in danger of choking on his own spleen. So The Female Man makes him angry, angry enough to forbid discussion of a book and then go on to hurl abuse at it and the author—an example of masculine illogic perhaps? The Female Man made me angry as well, though. I’m sure, for very different reasons. I am not a ‘feminist’ in the accepted sense of the word nor do I wish to chase the subject of women’s lib into your columns, but I feel that it is up to someone, preferably a woman, to take up cudgels on behalf of Ms Russ and her book. Mr Covell states that the author is an ‘idiot’. That is his own private view. I am not acquainted with the lady and would therefore hesitate to form so harsh a judgement. However. I fail to see anything idiotic in the views she expresses in The Female Man. Admittedly, she exaggerates, but hyperbole has always been the legitimate tool of any writer or speaker who is trying to make a point: and Ms Russ has at least for me succeeded in making her point.
The Female Man has some of the qualities of a fable but there is an element of truth in it which brings the reader up short. I realise that the men in the novel are grotesque parodies of the men most women know (and love?) but, nevertheless, we women recognise them only too well. Man at his ghastly worst—being patronising when he means to be nice, man incapable of thinking further than his balls whenever he’s in the company of a woman. There are many men, I know, who are not like this but, unfortunately, Ms Russ’ prototypes still live and breathe and inflict themselves upon us.
Of course The Female Man is sexist. That is the whole point of the book. Try altering all the females to males as your correspondent suggests. You will end up not with a work expressing the male chauvinist point of view but with a work expressing nothing at all—incomprehensible claptrap. You could possibly rewrite Asimov, and many others, reversing the sexes . . . but Russ? It’s unthinkable. What she says about the sexes is valid only one way; and it is valid. Perhaps you have to be a woman to realise it. Maybe she goes too far but she does succeed in Shocking readers, both male and female, into an open awareness of what they already secretly know to be true: namely, the injustices and indignities the sexes inflict on each other. In our society the main victims are women, but it can work both ways. Ms Russ’ ‘heroines’ are generally as unpleasant as her ‘heroes’, the women’s excuse is that they are more sinned against than sinning.
Meanwhile, it would help if people refrained from childish abuse. It may be comforting to affix names like ‘male chauvinist pig’ and ‘female chauvinist sow’ to those whose views we do not share: such a method of classifying individuals means that once we’ve put an individual in a convenient category we can stop considering and evaluating what they have to say. A lazy man’s (or woman’s) way out!  p. 28

The more things change, the more they stay the same . . . .
Malcolm Edwards from Harrow, Middlesex, adds:

Your correspondent Ian Covell seems such a pleasant chap that I would hate to be forced into arguing with him. I would love to be convinced by the clever sophistry of his argument that Edmund Cooper’s clearly self-contradictory remarks were really perfectly consistent all the time, but I’m afraid my mind refuses to bend quite far enough.
I suppose I should apologise for having enjoyed A Far Sunset eight years ago. I didn’t actually say that I thought it represented the direction in which sf ought to go. I happen to enjoy, for example, the stories of Leigh Brackett, but I would hate Philip K Dick or J G Ballard to start copying her. In fact, oddly enough. I don’t happen to look upon sf as a single object to be steered in a particular direction, as though it were a car.
It’s strange that Mr Covell should demonstrate such hatred for Joanna Russ’ views, as expressed in The Female Man, and yet should apparently wish to defend Edmund Cooper’s views, which he admits are ‘reverse-identical’ to Ms Russ’. I am equally out of sympathy with both of them, though I can see, sadly, that it is the attitudes of people like Mr Cooper which produce overreactions like Joanna Russ’. What it is that produces Ian Covell’s over-reactions is another matter—but that’s his problem.  p. 28

The final letter is about UFOs, and news of a special UFO issue—which thankfully did not appear.
The Query Box by Walter Gillings is the regular pre-internet Q&A column (you don’t know how lucky you are these days). I learned this about Thea von Harbou, the impressive actress from Metropolis (which I just watched for the first time recently and thought marvellous):

[Fritz Lang] wrote the screenplays of some of his early movies, such as Destiny (1921), before collaborating with Thea von Harbou, who later became his wife. She was the author of the novel on which the film Metropolis (1926) was based, and which was published here in 1927 by the Readers Library.  p. 28

This is quite a good issue, with better than normal artwork and stories.  ●

_____________________

1. ISFDB lists this as “January” because, when there is no date on a magazine, ISFDB uses the actual month of publication for the issue date. However, Mike Ashley states in Gateways to Forever, p. 128: “The first issue of Science Fiction Monthly appeared on the last Wednesday of January 1974.” He adds in footnote #147: “All issues were undated, carrying only an issue and volume number, but technically the first issue was for February 1974 and it continued on a monthly schedule.”
So—all the ISFDB dates are out by one month, and this can be seen most clearly by looking at v01n11 and v02n11, the two Christmas/December issues, which are listed as November ones.

2. The Williamson story is one of the few stories from this British magazine to be selected for a ‘Best of the Year’ anthology. It appeared in The Best Science Fiction of the Year #6 edited by Terry Carr (Dell Rey/Ballantine, 1977). (Bob Shaw’s Dark Icarus was also in a ‘Best’, but it appeared in Worlds of If a couple of months after it was published in Science Fiction Monthly).

3. Renmore’s ISFDB page shows only this story and a couple of fact articles, all from the mid-70s.

4. Maxim Jakubowski was a regular contributor to both Science Fiction Monthly and SF Digest (the single issue successor to SFM ), and he later edited/translated the anthology Travelling Towards Epsilon, a collection of French SF. Its ISFDB page is here.  ●

rssrss